KAF950GDF - Kawasaki Trans Diesel 4x4 Service Manual

MULE 4010 TRANS44
DIESEL
Utility Vehicle
Service Manual
Quick Reference Guide
General Information 1 j
Periodic Maintenance 2 j
Fuel System 3 j
Cooling System 4 j
Engine Top End 5 j
Converter System 6 j
Engine Lubrication System 7 j
Engine Removal/Installation 8 j
Crankshaft/Crankcase 9 j
Transmission 10 j
Wheels/Tires 11 j
Final Drive 12 j
Brakes 13 j
Suspension 14 j
Steering 15 j
Frame 16 j
This quick reference guide will assist

Electrical System 17 j
you in locating a desired topic or pro-
cedure.
Appendix 18 j
Bend the pages back to match the
black tab of the desired chapter num-
ber with the black tab on the edge at
each table of contents page.
Refer to the sectional table of contents
for the exact pages to locate the spe-
cific topic required.
MULE 4010 TRANS44
DIESEL
Utility Vehicle
Service Manual
All rights reserved. No parts of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic mechanical photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Quality Assurance Division/Motorcycle & Engine Company/Kawasaki
Heavy Industries, Ltd., Japan.
No liability can be accepted for any inaccuracies or omissions in this publication, although every possible
care has been taken to make it as complete and accurate as possible.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without prior notice and without incurring an obligation
to make such changes to products manufactured previously. See your dealer for the latest information on
product improvements incorporated after this publication.
All information contained in this publication is based on the latest product information available at the time
of publication. Illustrations and photographs in this publication are intended for reference use only and may
not depict actual model component parts.
2008 Kawasaki Heavy Industries, Ltd. 5th Edition (1) : May 18, 2012
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
A ampere(s) lb pounds(s)
ABDC after bottom dead center m meter(s)
AC alternating current min minute(s)
ATDC after top dead center N newton(s)
BBDC before bottom dead center Pa pascal(s)
BDC bottom dead center PS horsepower
BTDC before top dead center psi pound(s) per square inch
C degree(s) Celsius r revolution
DC direct current rpm revolution(s) per minute
F farad(s) TDC top dead center
F degree(s) Fahrenheit TIR total indicator reading
ft foot, feet V volt(s)
g gram(s) W watt(s)
h hour(s) ohm(s)
L liter(s)
COUNTRY AND AREA CODES

EUR Europe US United States
CA Canada
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
To protect the environment in which we all live, Kawasaki has incorporated crankcase emission
(1) and exhaust emission (2) control systems in compliance with applicable regulations of the
United States Environmental Protection Agency and California Air Resources Board.
1. Crankcase Emission Control System
A sealed-type crankcase emission control system is used to eliminate blow-by gases. The blow
-by gases are led to the breather chamber through the crankcase to the inlet manifold.
Oil is separated from the gases while passing through the inside of the breather chamber from
the crankcase, and then returned to the bottom of the crankcase.
2. Exhaust Emission Control System
The exhaust emission control system applied to this engine family is engine modifications that
consist of a modified injection pump and injection timing characteristics.
The fuel system has been calibrated to provide lean air/fuel mixture characteristics, with a suitable
air cleaner and exhaust system.
A maintenance free injection system provides the most appropriate injection timing and helps
maintain a thorough combustion process within the engine which contributes to a reduction of
exhaust pollutants entering the atmosphere.
The Clean Air Act, which is the Federal law covering motor vehicle pollution, contains what is
commonly referred to as the Acts tampering provisions.
Sec. 203(a) The following acts and the causing thereof are prohibited.
(3)(A) for any person to remove or render inoperative any device or element of design installed
on or in a motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine in compliance with regulations under this
title prior to its sale and delivery to the ultimate purchaser, or for any manufacturer or dealer
knowingly to remove or render inoperative any such device or element of design after such
sale and delivery to the ultimate purchaser.
(3)(B) for any person engaged in the business of repairing, servicing, selling, leasing, or trading
motor vehicles or motor vehicle engines, or who operates a fleet of motor vehicles know-
ingly to remove or render inoperative any device or element of design installed on or in a
motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine in compliance with regulations under this title follow-
ing its sale and delivery to the ultimate purchaser...
NOTE
The phrase remove or render inoperative any device or element of design has been generally
interpreted as follows.
1. Tampering does not include the temporary removal or rendering inoperative of de-
vices or elements of design in order to perform maintenance.
2. Tampering could include.
a.Maladjustment of vehicle components such that the emission standards are ex-
ceeded.
b.Use of replacement parts or accessories which adversely affect the performance
or durability of the vehicle.
c.Addition of components or accessories that result in the vehicle exceeding the stan-
dards.
d.Permanently removing, disconnecting, or rendering inoperative any component or
element of design of the emission control systems.
WE RECOMMEND THAT ALL DEALERS OBSERVE THESE PROVISIONS OF FEDERAL
LAW, THE VIOLATION OF WHICH IS PUNISHABLE BY CIVIL PENALTIES NOT EXCEEDING
$10 000 PER VIOLATION.
PLEASE DO NOT TAMPER WITH NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM
(US Model only)
To minimize the noise emissions from this product, Kawasaki has equipped it with effective
inlet and exhaust silencing systems. They are designed to give optimum performance while
maintaining a low noise level. Please do not remove these systems, or alter them in any way
which results in an increase in noise level.
Foreword
This manual is designed primarily for use by Guide shows you all of the products system
trained mechanics in a properly equipped shop. and assists in locating their chapters. Each
However, it contains enough detail and basic in- chapter in turn has its own comprehensive Ta-
formation to make it useful to the owner who de- ble of Contents.
sires to perform his own basic maintenance and For example, if you want engine oil informa-
repair work. A basic knowledge of mechanics, tion, use the Quick Reference Guide to locate
the proper use of tools, and workshop proce- the Engine Lubrication System chapter. Then,
dures must be understood in order to carry out use the Table of Contents on the first page of
maintenance and repair satisfactorily. When- the chapter to find the Engine Oil section.
ever the owner has insufficient experience or Whenever you see symbols, heed their in-
doubts his ability to do the work, all adjust- structions! Always follow safe operating and
ments, maintenance, and repair should be car- maintenance practices.
ried out only by qualified mechanics.
DANGER
In order to perform the work efficiently and
to avoid costly mistakes, read the text, thor- DANGER indicates a hazardous situa-
oughly familiarize yourself with the procedures tion which, if not avoided, will result in
before starting work, and then do the work care- death or serious injury.
fully in a clean area. Whenever special tools or
equipment are specified, do not use makeshift WARNING
tools or equipment. Precision measurements WARNING indicates a hazardous situa-
can only be made if the proper instruments are tion which, if not avoided, could result
used, and the use of substitute tools may ad- in death or serious injury.
versely affect safe operation.
For the duration of the warranty period, NOTICE
we recommend that all repairs and scheduled
maintenance be performed in accordance with NOTICE is used to address practices not
this service manual. Any owner maintenance or related to personal injury.
repair procedure not performed in accordance This manual contains four more symbols
with this manual may void the warranty. which will help you distinguish different types
To get the longest life out of your vehicle. of information.
Follow the Periodic Maintenance Chart in the
Service Manual. NOTE
Be alert for problems and non-scheduled
maintenance.
This note symbol indicates points of par-
ticular interest for more efficient and con-
Use proper tools and genuine Kawasaki Vehi-
cle parts. Special tools, gauges, and testers
venient operation.
that are necessary when servicing Kawasaki Indicates

done.
a procedural step or work to be
vehicles are introduced by the Service Man-
ual. Genuine parts provided as spare parts Indicates a procedural sub-step or how to do
are listed in the Parts Catalog. the work of the procedural step it follows. It
Follow the procedures in this manual care-
fully. Dont take shortcuts.
also precedes the text of a NOTE.
Indicates a conditional step or what action to
Remember to keep complete records of main-
tenance and repair with dates and any new
take based on the results of the test or inspec-
tion in the procedural step or sub-step it fol-
parts installed. lows.
In most chapters an exploded view illustration
of the system components follows the Table of
How to Use This Manual Contents. In these illustrations you will find the
In this manual, the product is divided into instructions indicating which parts require spec-
its major systems and these systems make up ified tightening torque, oil, grease or a locking
the manuals chapters. The Quick Reference agent during assembly.
GENERAL INFORMATION 1-1
General Information
Table of Contents
1
Before Servicing ..................................................................................................................... 1-2
Model Identification................................................................................................................. 1-7
General Specifications............................................................................................................ 1-8
Unit Conversion Table ............................................................................................................ 1-11
1-2 GENERAL INFORMATION
Before Servicing
Before starting to perform an inspection service or carry out a disassembly and reassembly oper-
ation on a vehicle, read the precautions given below. To facilitate actual operations, notes, illustra-
tions, photographs, cautions, and detailed descriptions have been included in each chapter wherever
necessary. This section explains the items that require particular attention during the removal and
reinstallation or disassembly and reassembly of general parts.
Especially note the following.
Battery Ground
Before completing any service on the vehicle, disconnect
the battery cables from the battery to prevent the engine
from accidentally turning over. Disconnect the ground cable
() first and then the positive (+). When completed with the
service, first connect the positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the battery then the negative () cable to the
negative terminal.
Edges of Parts
Lift large or heavy parts wearing gloves to prevent injury
from possible sharp edges on the parts.
Solvent
Use a high flash-point solvent when cleaning parts. High
flash-point solvent should be used according to directions
of the solvent manufacturer.
Cleaning Vehicle before Disassembly

Clean the vehicle thoroughly before disassembly. Dirt or
other foreign materials entering into sealed areas during ve-
hicle disassembly can cause excessive wear and decrease
performance of the vehicle.
Before Servicing
Arrangement and Cleaning of Removed Parts
Disassembled parts are easy to confuse. Arrange the
parts according to the order the parts were disassembled
and clean the parts in order prior to assembly.
Storage of Removed Parts

After all the parts including subassembly parts have been
cleaned, store the parts in a clean area. Put a clean cloth
or plastic sheet over the parts to protect from any foreign
materials that may collect before re-assembly.
Inspection
Reuse of worn or damaged parts may lead to serious ac-
cident. Visually inspect removed parts for corrosion, discol-
oration, or other damage. Refer to the appropriate sections
of this manual for service limits on individual parts. Replace
the parts if any damage has been found or if the part is be-
yond its service limit.
Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts must be KAWASAKI genuine or
recommended by KAWASAKI. Gaskets, O-rings, oil seals,
grease seals, circlips, cotter pins or self-locking nuts must
be replaced with new ones whenever disassembled.
Assembly Order
In most cases assembly order is the reverse of disassem-
bly, however, if assembly order is provided in this Service
Manual, follow the procedures given.
Before Servicing
Tightening Sequence
Generally, when installing a part with several bolts, nuts,
or screws, start them all in their holes and tighten them to
a snug fit. Then tighten them according to the specified se-
quence to prevent case warpage or deformation which can
lead to malfunction. Conversely when loosening the bolts,
nuts, or screws, first loosen all of them by about a quar-
ter turn and then remove them. If the specified tightening
sequence is not indicated, tighten the fasteners alternating
diagonally.
Tightening Torque
Incorrect torque applied to a bolt, nut, or screw may
lead to serious damage. Tighten fasteners to the specified
torque using a good quality torque wrench.
Force
Use common sense during disassembly and assembly,
excessive force can cause expensive or hard to repair dam-
age. When necessary, remove screws that have a non
-permanent locking agent applied using an impact driver.
Use a plastic-faced mallet whenever tapping is necessary.
Gasket, O-ring
Hardening, shrinkage, or damage of both gaskets and
O-rings after disassembly can reduce sealing performance.
Remove old gaskets and clean the sealing surfaces thor-
oughly so that no gasket material or other material remains.
Install the new gaskets and replace the used O-rings when
re-assembling.
Liquid Gasket, Non-permanent Locking Agent

For applications that require Liquid Gasket or a
Non-permanent Locking Agent, clean the surfaces so
that no oil residue remains before applying liquid gasket or
non-permanent locking agent. Do not apply them exces-
sively. Excessive application can clog oil passages and
cause serious damage.
Before Servicing
Press
For items such as bearings or oil seals that must be
pressed into place, apply small amount of oil to the con-
tact area. Be sure to maintain proper alignment and use
smooth movements when installing.
Ball Bearing and Needle Bearing

Do not remove pressed ball or needle unless removal is
absolutely necessary. Replace with new ones whenever
removed. Press bearings with the manufacturer and size
marks facing out. Press the bearing into place by putting
pressure on the correct bearing race as shown.
Pressing the incorrect race can cause pressure between
the inner and outer race and result in bearing damage.
Oil Seal, Grease Seal

Do not remove pressed oil or grease seals unless removal
is necessary. Replace with new ones whenever removed.
Press new oil seals with manufacture and size marks facing
out. Make sure the seal is aligned properly when installing.
Apply specified grease to the lip of seal before installing

the seal.
Circlips, Cotter Pins

Replace the circlips or cotter pins that were removed with
new ones. Take care not to open the clip excessively when
installing to prevent deformation.
Before Servicing
Lubrication
It is important to lubricate rotating or sliding parts during
assembly to minimize wear during initial operation. Lubri-
cation points are called out throughout this manual, apply
the specific oil or grease as specified.
Direction of Engine Rotation

When rotating the crankshaft by hand, the free play
amount of rotating direction will affect the adjustment. Ro-
tate the crankshaft to positive direction (clockwise viewed
from right side).
Electrical Wires
A two-color wire is identified first by the primary color and
then the stripe color. Unless instructed otherwise, electrical
wires must be connected to those of the same color.
Instrument
Use a meter that has enough accuracy for an accurate
measurement. Read the manufactures instructions thor-
oughly before using the meter. Incorrect values may lead
to improper adjustments.
Model Identification
KAF950G9 Left Side View
KAF950G9 Right Side View
Frame Number Engine Number

General Specifications
Items KAF950G9 GD/HA

Dimensions
Overall Length (KAF950G9 GC/HA) 3 305 (130.12 in.)
(KAF950GD) 3 265 mm (128.54 in.)
Overall Width (KAF950G9 GC/HA) 1 486 (58.50 in.)
(KAF950GD) 1 485 mm (58.46 in.)
Overall Height 1 925 mm (75.79 in.)
Wheelbase 2 165 mm (85.24 in.)
Track:
Front 1 160 mm (45.67 in.)
Rear 1 180 mm (46.46 in.)
Ground Clearance 180 mm (7.09 in.)
Seat Height:
Front 855 mm (33.66 in.)
Rear 880 mm (34.64 in.)
Curb Mass: (KAF950G9 GC/HA) 788 kg (1 738 lb)
(KAF950GD) 795 kg (1 753lb)
Front (KAF950G9 GC/HA) 349 kg (770 lb)
(KAF950GD) 355 kg (783 lb)
Rear (KAF950G9 GC/HA) 439 kg (968 lb)
(KAF950GD) 440 kg (970 lb)
(KAF950G9 GC/HA) 24.2 L (6.4 US gal.)
Fuel Tank Capacity
(KAF950GD) 24 L (6.3 US gal.)
Cargo Bed (L W H):
Long Bed (KAF950G9 GC/HA) 1 280 1 212 287 mm (50.39 47.72
11.30 in.)
(KAF950GD) 1 280 1 210 285 mm (50.39 47.64 11.22 in.)
Short Bed (KAF950G9 GC/HA) 770 1 212 287 mm (30.31 47.72
11.30 in.)
(KAF950GD) 770 1 210 285 mm (30.31 47.64 11.22 in.)
Seating Capacity:
Front 2
Rear 2
Performance
Minimum Turning Radius 3.9 m (12.8 ft)
Engine
Type 4-stroke, OHV, Diesel, 3-cylinders
Cooling System Liquid-cooled
Bore and Stroke 72 78 mm (2.83 3.07 in.)
Displacement 953 cm (58.2 cu in.)
Compression Ratio 24.8
Maximum Horsepower 17.7 kW (24 PS) @3 600 r/min (rpm)
(CA), (US)
Maximum Torque 52 Nm (5.3 kgfm, 38.4 ftlb) @2 800 r/min (rpm)
(CA), (US)
Injection Pump Denso VE type
Starting System Electric starter

Cylinder Numbering Method Right to left, 1-2-3
Firing Order Right to left, 1-2-3
Valve Timing:
Inlet:
Open 10 BTDC
Close 45 ABDC
Duration 235
Exhaust:
Open 45 BBDC
Close 10 ATDC
Duration 235
Lubrication System Forced lubrication (wet sump)
Engine Oil:
Grade API CF or CF-4
Viscosity SAE 10W-40
Capacity 3.3 L (3.5 US qt)
Drive Train
Primary Reduction System:
Type Belt drive torque converter
Reduction Ratio 3.7 0.98
Transmission Gear Ratio:
Forward:
High 1.821 (51/28)
Low 3.750 (51/28 25/20 28/17)
Reverse:
Low 4.220 (41/20 25/20 28/17)
Final Drive System:
Type Gear 4WD/2WD
Reduction Ratio 5.429 (76/14)
Overall Drive Ratio:
Forward:
High 9.690
Low 19.950
Reverse:
Low 22.454
Front Final Gear Case Oil:
Type Hypoid gear oil for LSD (Limited Slip Differential gears)
Viscosity SAE 140 (GL-5) or SAE 90 (GL-6)
Transmission Oil:
Type Hypoid gear oil
Viscosity SAE 90: above 5C (41F) or
SAE 80: below 5C (41F)

Frame
Type Steel tube, Ladder
Caster (Rake Angle) 7.5
Camber 0.8
Trail 35 mm (1.4 in.)
Tire:
Front and Rear 23 11.00-10, Tubeless
Rim Size:
Front and Rear 10 8.5 AT
Steering Type Rack and pinion (Electric power steering)
Suspension:
Front:
Type MacPherson strut
Wheel Travel 100 mm (3.94 in.)
Rear:
Type De Dion axle
Wheel Travel 70 mm (2.76 in.)
Brake Type:
Front and Rear Drum (Hydraulic)
Parking Brake Type Drum (Mechanical internal expansion)
Electrical Equipment
Battery 12 V 52 Ah
Headlight:
Type Semi-sealed beam
Bulb 12 V 35 W 2
Brake/Tail Light 12 V 21/5 W 2
Reverse Light (EUR) 12 V 10 W
Alternator:
Type Three-phase AC
Rated Output 40 A, 12 V
Load Capacity
Maximum Vehicle Load 740 kg (1 632 lb)
(Including Occupants and
Cargo)
Maximum Cargo Bed Load:
Long Bed 499 kg (1 100 lb)
Short Bed 318 kg (701 lb)
Specifications are subject to change without notice, and may not apply to every country.
Unit Conversion Table
Prefixes for Units: Units of Length:
km 0.6214 = mile
Prefix Symbol Power
m 3.281 = ft
mega M 1 000 000
mm 0.03937 = in.
kilo k 1 000
centi c 0.01
milli m 0.001 Units of Torque:
micro 0.000001 Nm 0.1020 = kgfm
Nm 0.7376 = ftlb
Nm 8.851 = inlb
Units of Mass: kgfm 9.807 = Nm
kg 2.205 = lb kgfm 7.233 = ftlb
g 0.03527 = oz kgfm 86.80 = inlb
Units of Volume: Units of Pressure:

L 0.2642 = gal (US) kPa 0.01020 = kgf/cm
L 0.2200 = gal (IMP) kPa 0.1450 = psi
L 1.057 = qt (US) kPa 0.7501 = cmHg
L 0.8799 = qt (IMP) kgf/cm 98.07 = kPa
L 2.113 = pint (US) kgf/cm 14.22 = psi
L 1.816 = pint (IMP) cmHg 1.333 = kPa
mL 0.03381 = oz (US)
mL 0.02816 = oz (IMP) Units of Speed:
mL 0.06102 = cu in. km/h 0.6214 = mph
Units of Force: Units of Power:

N 0.1020 = kg kW 1.360 = PS
N 0.2248 = lb kW 1.341 = HP
kg 9.807 = N PS 0.7355 = kW
kg 2.205 = lb PS 0.9863 = HP
Units of Temperature:
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-1
Periodic Maintenance
Table of Contents
Periodic Maintenance Chart ................................................................................................... 2-3
Torque and Locking Agent...................................................................................................... 2-5 2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 2-11
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 2-13
Periodic Maintenance Procedures.......................................................................................... 2-14
Fuel System......................................................................................................................... 2-14
Throttle Pedal Play Inspection .......................................................................................... 2-14
Throttle Pedal Play Adjustment......................................................................................... 2-14
Idle Speed Inspection ....................................................................................................... 2-15
Idle Speed Adjustment...................................................................................................... 2-15
Fuel Hoses and Connections Inspection .......................................................................... 2-15
Fuel Hoses Replacement.................................................................................................. 2-15
Fuel Filter Element Replacement...................................................................................... 2-17
Fuel Filter Water Draining ................................................................................................. 2-17
Cooling System.................................................................................................................... 2-18
Radiator Cleaning ............................................................................................................. 2-18
Radiator Hose and Connection Inspection ....................................................................... 2-18
Coolant Change ................................................................................................................ 2-18
Cooling Fan Belt Inspection .............................................................................................. 2-21
Engine Top End ................................................................................................................... 2-23
Valve Clearance Inspection .............................................................................................. 2-23
Valve Clearance Adjustment............................................................................................. 2-24
Spark Arrester Cleaning.................................................................................................... 2-25
Converter System ................................................................................................................ 2-25
Drive Belt Inspection ......................................................................................................... 2-25
Drive Belt Deflection Inspection ........................................................................................ 2-26
Drive Belt Deflection Adjustment ...................................................................................... 2-27
Converter Driven Pulley Shoe Inspection ......................................................................... 2-27
Converter Air Cleaner Element Cleaning/Inspection ........................................................ 2-28
Engine Lubrication System .................................................................................................. 2-29
Engine Oil and/or Oil Filter Change .................................................................................. 2-29
Oil Filter Removal ............................................................................................................. 2-30
Oil Filter Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-30
Transmission ....................................................................................................................... 2-30
Transmission Oil Change.................................................................................................. 2-30
Wheels/Tires ........................................................................................................................ 2-31
Wheels Nuts Tightness Inspection.................................................................................... 2-31
Tire Wear Inspection ......................................................................................................... 2-31
Final Drive............................................................................................................................ 2-31
Front Final Gear Case Oil Change ................................................................................... 2-31
Brakes.................................................................................................................................. 2-32
Brake Fluid Level Inspection............................................................................................. 2-32
Brake Fluid Change .......................................................................................................... 2-33
Brake Pedal Play Inspection ............................................................................................. 2-34
Brake Master Cylinder Cup and Dust Seal Replacement ................................................. 2-35
Brake Hose and Pipe Inspection....................................................................................... 2-35
Brake Hose and Pipe Replacement.................................................................................. 2-36
Brake Wear Inspection...................................................................................................... 2-37
Brake Wheel Cylinder Assembly Replacement ................................................................ 2-38
Parking Brake Lever Inspection ........................................................................................ 2-40
2-2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Steering ............................................................................................................................... 2-42

Steering Inspection ........................................................................................................... 2-42
Steering Joint Dust Boot Inspection.................................................................................. 2-42
Frame .................................................................................................................................. 2-43
Seat Belt Inspection .......................................................................................................... 2-43
Electrical System ................................................................................................................. 2-43
Electrolyte Level Inspection (Conventional Type Battery)................................................. 2-43
Electrolyte Specific Gravity Inspection (Conventional Type Battery) ................................ 2-44
Charging Condition Inspection (Conventional Type Battery) ............................................ 2-45
Brake Light Switch Inspection........................................................................................... 2-45
General Lubrication ............................................................................................................. 2-46
Bolts, Nuts and Fasteners Tightness Inspection ................................................................. 2-47
Periodic Maintenance Chart
The scheduled maintenance must be done in accordance with this chart to keep the vehicle in good
running condition. The initial maintenance is vitally important and must not be neglected.
FREQUENCY Whichever First
Regular Service
comes Service
first After Every Every Every Every
50 h, 100 h, 250 h, 500 h, 800 h, See
Page
or or or or or
1 000 2 000 5 000 10 000 16 000

km km km km km
OPERATION Every of use of use of use of use of use
ENGINE
Throttle pedal play - inspect 2-14
Idle speed - adjust 2-15
Fuel hoses and connections -
inspect* 2-15
Fuel hose - replace 5 years 2-15

Fuel filter element - replace* 2-17
Fuel filter water - drain* 2-17
Radiator - clean* 2-18
Radiator hoses and connections -
inspect*
1 year 2-18
Coolant - change 2 years 2-18

Cooling fan belt - inspect 2-21
Valve clearance - inspect* 2-23
Spark arrester - clean 2-25
Converter drive belt - inspect* 2-25
Converter drive belt deflection -
inspect* 2-26
Converter driven pulley shoe -

inspect* 2-27
Converter air cleaner element -

clean* 2-28
Engine oil - change* 1 year 2-29

Oil filter - replace 2-30
: Clean, adjust, lubricate, torque, or replace parts as necessary.
*: Service more frequently when operated in mud, dust, or other harsh riding conditions.
Periodic Maintenance Chart
FREQUENCY Whichever First

Regular Service
comes Service
first After Every Every Every Every
50 h, 100 h, 250 h, 500 h, 800 h, See
Page
or or or or or
1 000 2 000 5 000 10 000 16 000

km km km km km
OPERATION Every of use of use of use of use of use
CHASSIS
Front final gear case oil and 2-30,
transmission case oil - change*
1 year 2-31
Wheel nuts tightness - inspect 2-31
Tire wear - inspect* 2-31
Brake fluid level - inspect 2-32
Brake fluid - change 2 years 2-33
Brake pedal play - inspect* 2-34
Brake master cylinder cup and dust
2 years 2-35
seal - replace
Brake hose and pipe - inspect 2-35
Brake hose - replace 4 years 2-36
Brake wear - inspect* 2-37
Brake wheel cylinder assembly -
2 years 2-38
replace
Parking brake lever - inspect 2-40
Steering - inspect 2-42
Steering joint dust boots - inspect 2-42
Seat belt - inspect 2-43
Battery - inspect (Note 1) 2-43
Brake light switch - inspect 2-45
General lubrication - perform* 2-46
Bolts, nuts, and fasteners tightness
- inspect 2-47
: Clean, adjust, lubricate, torque, or replace parts as necessary.

*: Service more frequently when operated in mud, dust, or other harsh riding conditions.
Note 1: Conventional Type Battery
Torque and Locking Agent
The following tables list the tightening torque for the major fasteners requiring use of a
non-permanent locking agent or silicone sealant etc.
Letters used in the Remarks column mean:

B: Apply brake fluid.
EO: Apply engine oil.
G: Apply grease.
L: Apply a non-permanent locking agent.
MO: Apply molybdenum disulfide grease oil solution.
(mixture of the engine oil and molybdenum disulfide grease in a weight ratio 10 : 1)
R: Replacement Part
S: Follow the specified tightening sequence.
SS: Apply silicone sealant.
Torque
Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
Fuel System
Air Cleaner Housing Mounting Bolts 20 2.0 15
Air Duct Mounting Bolt 5.0 0.51 44 inlb
Air Vent Plug 5.0 0.51 44 inlb
Distributor Head Bolt 17 1.7 13
Fuel Filter Mounting Bolts 20 2.0 15
Fuel Injection Nozzles 59 6.0 44
Fuel Injection Pipe Clamp Bolts 7.4 0.75 65 inlb
Fuel Injection Pipe Mounting Nuts 25 2.5 18
Fuel Injection Pump Bracket Bolts 20 2.0 15
Fuel Injection Pump Gear Nut 64 6.5 47
Fuel Injection Pump Mounting Nuts 20 2.0 15
Idle Adjusting Screw Locknut 6.9 0.70 61 inlb
Linkage Pipe Nuts 27 2.8 20
Maximum Speed Set Screw Locknut 6.9 0.70 61 inlb
Fuel Level Gauge Mounting Bolts (KAF950GD) 4.0 0.41 35 inlb
Cooling System
Coolant Drain Plug 25 2.5 18 L
Coolant Inlet Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Coolant Reserve Tank Bolt 4.4 0.45 39 inlb
Coolant Temperature Switch 27 2.8 20 L
Fan Mounting Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Radiator Fan Mounting Bolts 6.0 0.61 53 inlb
Radiator Fan Switch (KAF950GB ) 23 2.3 17
Radiator Fan Switch (KAF950G9 GA/HA) 25 2.5 18
Radiator Mounting Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Radiator Screen Mounting Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Shroud Mounting Bolts 6.0 0.61 53 inlb
Thermostat Housing Cap Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Water Pipe Mounting Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Water Pump Mounting Bolts and Nuts 20 2.0 15
Torque
Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
Engine Top End
Cylinder Head Bolts 34 3.5 25 EO, S
Cylinder Head Cover Nuts 5.4 0.55 48 inlb
Exhaust Manifold Mounting Nuts 20 2.0 15
Inlet Manifold Mounting Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Inlet Manifold Mounting Nuts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Rocker Arm Components Mounting Nuts 20 2.0 15
Valve Adjusting Screw Locknuts 11 1.1 97 inlb
Muffler Mounting Bolts 20 2.0 15 L
Converter System
Air Cleaner Housing Mounting Bolts
16 1.6 12
(KAF950GA/HA late models and KAF950GB )
Air Cleaner Housing Mounting Bolts (KAF950G9
20 2.0 15
and KAF950GA/HA early models)
Converter Case Bolts (L = 55 mm) 27 2.8 20 L
Converter Case Bolts (L = 28 mm) 20 2.0 15 L
Converter Cover Bolts 4.4 0.45 39 inlb
Drive Pulley Bolt 93 9.5 69
Drive Pulley Cover Bolts 13 1.3 115 inlb
Driven Pulley Bolt 93 9.5 69 L
Fan Cover Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Inner Cover Bolts 4.4 0.45 39 inlb
Inner Cover Nut 8.8 0.90 78 inlb R
Ramp Weight Nuts 6.9 0.70 61 inlb R
Spider 275 28.0 203
Wear Shoe Mounting Screws 1.1 0.11 10 inlb L
Engine Lubrication System
Engine Oil Drain Plugs 34 3.5 25
Oil Filter Stud Bolt 44 4.5 32
Oil Nozzle 14 1.4 10
Oil Pan Bolts and Nuts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Oil Pressure Switch 14 1.4 10 SS
Oil Pump Drive Gear Bolt 20 2.0 15
Oil Strainer Mounting Bolt and Nuts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Relief Valve Bolt 39 4.0 29
Engine Removal/Installation
Engine Mounting Bolts 44 4.5 32
Stay Rod Rear Nut 88 9.0 65
Crankshaft/Crankcase
Camshaft Drive Gear Bolt 43 4.4 32
Camshaft Retainer Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Connecting Rod Cap Nuts 36 3.7 27
Coolant Drain Plug 25 2.5 18 L
Torque
Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap Bolts 59 6.0 44
Crankshaft Pulley Bolt 98 10.0 72.3 EO
End Plate Bolts 39 4.0 29
Flywheel Mounting Bolts 44 4.5 32 L, S
Fuel Injection Pump Drive Gear Nut 64 6.5 47
Idle Gear Bolts 25 2.5 18
Oil Nozzle 14 1.4 10
Oil Pump Drive Gear Bolt 20 2.0 15
Oil Seal Retainer Bolts 5.4 0.55 48 inlb
Timing Gear Case Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Timing Gear Case Cover Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Transmission
Bearing Holder 118 12.0 87.0 MO
Differential Gear Housing Bolts 57 5.8 42 L
Hi/Low Gear Case Bolts 20 2.0 15
Neutral Switch 15 1.5 11
Shift Arm Positioning Bolt 37 3.8 27
Shift Shaft Stop Bolt 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Transmission Case Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Transmission Case Mounting Nuts 44 4.5 32 R
Transmission Oil Drain Plug 15 1.5 11
Wheels/Tires
Wheel Nuts 137 14.0 101
Final Drive
Bearing Holder 118 12.0 87.0 L
Bevel Gear Case Bolts 22 2.2 16
Bevel Gear Case Holder Nuts 25 2.5 18
Differential Case Cap Bolts 32 3.3 24 L
Drive Gear Nut 118 12.0 87.0 MO
Drive Shaft Cap Bolts 20 2.0 15
Driven Gear Shaft Nut 108 11.0 79.7 L
Front Axle Cap Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Gear Case Bracket Bolts 44 4.5 32
Gear Case Mounting Nuts 44 4.5 32 R
Grease Nipple 2.3 0.23 20 inlb G
Housing Locknut 118 12.0 87.0 L
Oil Drain Plug 20 2.0 15
Oil Filler Cap 29 3.0 21
Pinion Gear Bearing Housing Nuts 25 2.5 18
Pinion Gear Slotted Nut 118 12.0 87.0 MO
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Cover Bolts 3.4 0.35 30 inlb
Ring Gear Bolts 82 8.2 61 L
Ring Gear Cover Bolts (M10) 47 4.8 35
Torque
Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
Ring Gear Cover Bolts (M8) 25 2.5 18
Speed Sensor Bolt 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Brakes
Bleed Valves 5.4 0.55 48 inlb
Brake Hose Banjo Bolts 25 2.5 18
Brake Pipe Nipples 18 1.8 13 B
Front Axle Nuts 196 20.0 145
Front Brake Panel Mounting Bolts 44 4.5 32 L
Front Wheel Cylinder Mounting Bolts 10.3 1.1 91 inlb
Master Cylinder Reservoir Cap 3.4 0.35 30 inlb
Piston Stop Bolt 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Push Rod Locknut 17.2 1.8 13
Rear Axle Nuts 304 31.0 224
Rear Brake Panel Mounting Bolts 44 4.5 32 L
Rear Wheel Cylinder Mounting Nuts 7.4 0.75 65 inlb
Reservoir Clamp Bolt 6.1 0.62 54 inlb
Suspension
Damper Bracket Mounting Nuts 59 6.0 44 R, S
Front Suspension Arm Joint Nuts 78 8.0 58
Front Suspension Arm Pivot Bolts 98 10.0 72.3 L
Leaf Spring Mounting Bolts (Front) 98 10.0 72.3
Leaf Spring Mounting Nuts (Rear) 59 6.0 44
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Nuts 59 6.0 44 R
Strut Clamp Nuts 98 10.0 72.3
Strut Locknuts 49 5.0 36
Strut Mounting Locknuts 44 4.5 32 R
Tie-Rod End Nuts 34 3.5 25
Steering
EPS Unit Mounting Bolts 20 2.0 15
Rack Guide Spring Cap Locknut 39 4.0 29
Steering Gear Assembly Bracket Bolts 52 5.3 38 L
Steering Wheel Mounting Nut 52 5.3 38 R
Strut Clamp Nuts 98 10.0 72.3
Tie-Rod End Locknuts 44 4.5 32
Tie-Rod End Nuts 34 3.5 25
Universal Joint Clamp Bolts 20 2.0 15
Frame
Battery Holder Mounting Nuts 17 1.7 13
Center Bar Mounting Bolts 64 6.5 47
Front Bar Mounting Bolts (Lower) 98 10.0 72.3
Front Bar Mounting Bolts (Upper) 44 4.5 32
Front Seat Bar Mounting Bolts 64 6.5 47
Hood Latch Lever Mounting Bolts 37 3.8 27 L
Torque
Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
Rear Bar Mounting Bolts (Lower) 64 6.5 47
Rear Bar Mounting Bolts (Upper) 44 4.5 32
Rear Bar Mounting Nuts (Middle) 44 4.5 32
Rear End Subframe Mounting Nuts 44 4.5 32 R
Screen Fixing Lever Screws 4.4 0.45 39 inlb L
Seat Belt Buckle Mounting Bolts 34 3.5 25
Seat Belt Mounting Bolts 34 3.5 25
Stay Rod Rear Nut 88 9.0 65
Tail Gate Fixing Lever Screws 4.4 0.45 39 inlb L
Top Bar Mounting Bolts 44 4.5 32
Electrical System
Alternator Adjusting Bracket Bolts 20 2.0 15
Alternator Mounting Bolt 39 4.0 29
Alternator Pulley Locknut 11 1.1 97 inlb
Battery Holder Mounting Nuts 17 1.7 13
Connecting Plate Nuts 1.2 0.12 11 inlb
Coolant Temperature Switch 27 2.8 20 L
Glow Plugs 17 1.7 13
Neutral Switch 15 1.5 11
Oil Pressure Switch 14 1.4 10 SS
Radiator Fan Switch (KAF950GB ) 23 2.3 17
Radiator Fan Switch (KAF950G9 GA/HA) 25 2.5 18
Speed Sensor Bolt 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Starter Motor End Cover Screws 1.5 0.15 13 inlb
Starter Motor Mounting Bolts 39 4.0 29
Starter Motor Through Bolts 9.3 0.95 82 inlb
The table below, relating tightening torque to thread diameter, lists the basic torque for the bolts and
nuts. Use this table for only the bolts and nuts which do not require a specific torque value. All of the
values are for use with dry solvent-cleaned threads.
Basic Torque for General Fasteners of Engine Parts
Threads
Mark of Torque
Diameter
(mm) bolt head Nm kgfm ftlb
6 4T 3.9 4.9 0.40 0.50 35 43 inlb
6 7T 7.8 9.8 0.80 1.0 69 87 inlb
6 9T 12 15 1.2 1.5 104 130 inlb
8 4T 10 14 1.0 1.4 87 120 inlb
8 7T 18 22 1.8 2.2 13 16
10 4T 20 24 2.0 2.4 14 17
10 7T 39 44 4.0 4.5 29 33
Basic Torque for General Fasteners of Frame Parts
Threads Diameter Torque
(mm) Nm kgfm ftlb
5 3.4 4.9 0.35 0.50 30 43 inlb
6 5.8 7.9 0.60 0.80 52 69 inlb
8 14 19 1.4 1.9 10 14
10 26 34 2.6 3.5 19 25
12 44 61 4.5 6.2 33 45
Specifications
Item Standard Service Limit

Fuel System
Throttle Pedal Play 5 10 mm (0.20 0.39 in.)
Idle Speed 850 950 r/min (rpm)
Cooling System
Coolant:
Type (Recommended) Permanent type of antifreeze
(soft water and ethylene glycol plus corrosion
and rust inhibitor chemicals for aluminum
engines and radiators)
Color Green
Mixed Ratio Soft water 50%, coolant 50%
Freezing Point 35C (31F)
Total Amount 4.4 L (4.7 US qt)
Fan Belt Deflection 9.5 11.5 mm (0.37 0.45 in.) at 98 N (10
kgf, 22 lb)
Engine Top End
Valve Clearance 0.20 mm (0.0079 in.)
Converter System
Belt Width 34.1 mm (1.34 in.) 32.6 mm (1.28 in.)
Belt Deflection 28 36 mm (1.10 1.42 in.)
Wear Shoe Width 16.4 mm (0.65 in.)
Engine Oil:
Capacity 3.0 L (3.2 US qt) (When filter is not removed)
3.3 L (3.5 US qt) (When filter is removed)
Oil Level Between F and L marks on dipstick
Transmission
Transmission Oil:
Oil Level Between H and L level lines on dipstick
Wheels/Tires
Tire Tread Depth 13.2 mm (0.52 in.) 3 mm (0.12 in.)
Final Drive
Front Final Gear Case Oil:
Type Hypoid gear oil for LSD (Limited Slip
Differential gears)
Oil Level Filler opening level
Specifications

Brakes
Brake Fluid:
Type DOT3
Fluid Level Between upper and lower level lines
Brake Pedal Play 2 10 mm (0.08 0.39 in.)
Brake Drum Inside Diameter 180.000 180.160 mm 180.75 mm
(7.0866 7.0929 in.) (7.116 in.)
Brake Shoe Lining Thickness 4.5 mm (0.18 in.) 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking Brake Lever Travel 8 12 notches (clicks) at 200 N (20 kgf, 44 lb)
Steering
Steering Wheel Free Play 0 20 mm (0 0.79 in.)
Electrical System
Battery:
Capacity 12 V 52 Ah
Voltage 12.6 V or more
Electrolyte Level* Between upper and lower level
Specific Gravity* 1.265 at 20C (68F)
Switches:
Brake Light Switch Timing ON after 10 mm (0.39 in.) of pedal travel
*: Conventional Type Battery
Special Tools
Inside Circlip Pliers: Flywheel & Pulley Holder:
57001-143 57001-1605
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Fuel System
Throttle Pedal Play Inspection
Check that the throttle pedal moves smoothly from full
open to close.
If the throttle pedal does not return properly, lubricate the
throttle cable and link (see Throttle Cable Lubrication in
the Fuel System chapter).
Check the throttle pedal play [A].
Throttle Pedal Play
Standard: 5 10 mm (0.20 0.39 in.)
If the play is incorrect, adjust the throttle cable.
Throttle Pedal Play Adjustment
Tilt up the cargo bed.
Loosen the adjuster mounting nuts [A] at the engine end
of the cable.
Slide the adjuster [B] until the proper amount of throttle
pedal play is obtained.
Tighten the adjuster mounting nuts securely.
With the transmission
Start the engine.
a few times to make insure
neutral, operate the throttle pedal
that the idle speed does not
change.
If the idle speed does change, the throttle cable may be
improperly adjusted, incorrectly routed, or it may be dam-
aged.
Correct any of these conditions before operation.
WARNING
Operation with improperly adjusted, incorrectly
routed or damaged cables could result in an unsafe
riding condition. Follow the service manual to be
make sure to correct any of these conditions.
NOTE
If the throttle pedal play can not be adjusted by using
the adjuster at the engine end of the cable, use the ca-
ble adjuster [A] at the throttle pedal. Do not forget to
securely tighten the adjuster mounting nuts [B].
Idle Speed Inspection
Start the engine and warm it up thoroughly.
Tachometer
Check the idle speed with a suitable tachometer [A].
Adapter [B]
Idle Speed
Standard: 850 950 r/min (rpm)
If the idle speed is out of the specified range, adjust it.
Idle Speed Adjustment

Loosen the locknut [A].
the idle speed
Turn the idle adjusting screw [B] at the injection pump until
is correct.
Tighten:
Torque - Idle Adjusting Screw Locknut: 6.9 Nm (0.70
kgfm, 61 inlb)
Open and close the throttle a few times to make sure that
the idle speed is within the specified range. Readjust if
necessary.
Fuel Hoses and Connections Inspection
Tilt up the cargo bed and seat.
and signs
Check the fuel hoses and fittings for deterioration, cracks
of leakage.
Replace the fuel hose if any fraying, leak [A], cracks [B]
or bulges [C] are noticed.
Check that the hoses are securely connected and clamps
are installed correctly.
When installing, run the hoses according to Cable, Wire,
and Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter.
When installing the fuel hoses, avoid sharp bending, kink-
ing, flattening or twisting, and route the fuel hoses with a
minimum of bending so that the fuel flow will not be ob-
structed.
Replace the hose if it has been sharply bent or kinked.
Fuel Hoses Replacement
Tilt up the cargo bed and seat.
Front Seat Lower Cover Front (see Floor Center Panel
Remove:
Removal in the Frame chapter)

Clamps [A]
Fuel Hoses [B]
Remove:
Clamps [A]
Fuel Hoses [B]
Remove:
Clamps [A]
Fuel Hoses [B]
Remove:
Clamp [A]
Fuel Hose [B]
Fuel Filter Mounting Bolts [C]
Remove:
Clamps [A]
Fuel Hoses [B]
When installing, run the hoses according to Cable, Wire,

and Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter.
When installing the fuel hoses, avoid sharp bending, kink-
ing, flattening or twisting, and run the fuel hoses with a
minimum of bending so that the fuel flow will not be ob-
structed.
Fit the fuel hose [A] onto the fitting fully and install the
plate clamp [B] beyond the raised rib [C].
1 2 mm (0.039 0.079 in.) [D]
The hose end must reach the filler [E] or be as near as
possible to the step [F].
Bleed the air from the fuel filter (see Fuel Filter Installation
in the Fuel System chapter).
Fuel Filter Element Replacement
Remove:
Fuel Filter (see Fuel Filter Removal in the Fuel System
chapter)
Drain Cap [A]
O-ring [B]
Filter Cartridge [C]
a suitable filter wrench.
Use
Install a new filter cartridge by hand until the gasket con-
tacts the housing. Then tighten it 1/3 turn more.
Install:
Drain Cap
New O-ring
Fuel Filter (see Fuel Filter Installation in the Fuel System
chapter)
Fuel Filter Water Draining
Loosena the
Place suitable container under the filter drain hose [A].
Loosen the drain
air vent plug [B].
water from the filtercapuntil
[C] approximately 1 turn, and drain
only fuel flows from the filter.
Bleed the air from the fuel filter (see Fuel Filter Element
Tighten the drain cap securely.
Replacement).
Wipe off any spilled fuel.
Start the engine, and check for fuel leakage.
Cooling System
Radiator Cleaning
NOTICE
Clean the radiator screen and the radiator in ac-
cordance with the Periodic Maintenance Chart.
In dusty areas, they should be cleaned more fre-
quently than the recommended interval. After
riding through muddy terrain, the radiator screen
and the radiator should be cleaned immediately.
Remove:
Front Cover (see Front Cover Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Radiator Screen Mounting Bolts [A]
Radiator Screen [B]
Clean the radiator screen in a bath of tap water, and then
dry it with compressed air or by shaking it.
NOTICE
When cleaning the radiator with a steam cleaner, be
careful of the following to prevent radiator damage.
Keep the steam gun [A] away more than 0.5 m (1.6
ft) [B] from the radiator core.
Hold the steam gun perpendicular to the core sur-
face.
Run the steam gun following the core fin direction.
Install the radiator screen.

Tighten:
Torque - Radiator Screen Mounting Bolts: 8.8 Nm (0.90
kgfm, 78 inlb)
Radiator Hose and Connection Inspection

The high pressure inside the radiator hose can cause
coolant to leak [A] or the hose to burst if the line is not
properly maintained. Visually inspect the hoses for signs
of deterioration. Squeeze the hoses. A hose should not
be hard and brittle, nor should it be soft or swollen.
Replace the hose if any fraying, cracks [B] or bulges [C]
are noticed.
Check that the hoses are securely connected and clamps
are tightened correctly.
Coolant Change
WARNING
Coolant can be extremely hot and cause severe
burns, is toxic and very slippery. Do not remove
the radiator cap or attempt to change the coolant
when the engine is hot; allow it cool completely.
Immediately wipe any spilled coolant from tires,
frame, engine or other painted parts. Do not ingest
coolant.
Tilt up the front cargo hood.

Quick Rivets [A]
Remove:
Tapping Screw [B] and Collar

Partition [C]
Remove the coolant reserve tank mounting bolts [A].

Install the removed
Remove the cap [B] and poor the coolant into a container.
parts except the cap.
Remove the front final gear case skid plate (see Front
Final Gear Case Oil Level Inspection in the Final Drive
chapter).
Place a container under the drain plugs.
Remove the coolant drain plugs [A] at water pipes.
Place a funnel under the drain hole.
Remove the radiator cap [A] in two steps.

First turn the cap counterclockwise to the first step.
Then push and turn it further in the same direction and
remove the cap.
Tighten the drain plugs.

Install the reserve tank hose and reserve tank.
Tighten:
Torque - Coolant Reserve Tank Bolt: 4.4 Nm (0.45 kgfm,
39 inlb)
ground
Lift the front wheels 20 30 cm (7.9 11.8 in.) from the
so that the radiator cap is the highest port of the
system.
Pour the coolant slowly into the radiator cap fitting.
NOTE
Pour in the coolant slowly so that the air in the engine
and radiator can escape.
Front [A] Radiator Cap [C]

Air Bleeder Bolt [B] Reserve Tank Cap [D]
NOTICE
Soft or distilled water must be used with antifreeze
in the cooling system.
If hard water is used in the system, it causes scale
accumulation in the water passages, considerably
reducing the efficiency of the cooling system.
Water and Coolant Mixture Ratio (Recommended)

Soft Water: 50%
Coolant: 50%
Freezing Point: 35C (31F)
Total Amount: 4.4 L (4.7 US qt)
NOTE
Choose a suitable mixture ratio by referring to the
coolant manufacturers directions.
When the coolant begins to flow out the air bleeder bolt
holes, tighten the air bleeder bolt.
Fill the cooling system up to the filler neck [A] in the radi-
ator cap fitting with coolant.
Bleed the air from the cooling system as follows.

Start the engine and run it until no more air bubbles [A]
can be seen in the coolant (less than five minutes).
Tap the radiator hoses to force any air bubbles caught
inside.
Stop the engine and add coolant up to the filler neck.
Install the radiator cap.
Lower the front wheels slowly.
Fill the reserve tank up to the F (full) level line [A] with
coolant.
NOTICE
Do not add more coolant above the F (full) level line.
Install the reserve tank cap [B].
Cooling Fan Belt Inspection

Remove:
Rear Propeller Shaft (see Propeller Shaft Removal in the
Final Drive chapter)
Water Pipe [A] and Water Hose [B]
Remove the fan cover bolts [A].
Take off the fan cover [A].

Rotate
figure.
the fan blade [B], and position it as shown in the
Remove the fan cover [A] as shown in the figure.
Remove:
Fan Mounting Bolts [A]
Cooling Fan [B]
Spacer
Reinstall the spacer [A] and tighten the fan mounting bolts
[B] temporary.
Torque - Fan Mounting Bolts: 8.8 Nm (0.90 kgfm, 78 inlb)
Remove:
Bolts [A]
Fan Belt Cover [B]
Check the cooling fan belt [A] for excessive wear crack or
broken.
If necessary, replace the belt with a new one.
Check the fan belt deflection.

Use a ruler [A], push the belt with 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lb)
force.
Push Gauge [B]
Fan Belt Deflection
Standard: 9.5 11.5 mm (0.37 0.45 in.)
If the deflection is incorrect, adjust it.
Loosen the alternator adjusting bracket bolt [A] and alter-

nator mounting bolt [B].
Alternator [C]
Adjust the fan belt deflection.
Use a ruler, push the belt with 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lb) force.
Tighten the bolts.
Torque - Alternator Adjusting Bracket Bolts: 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Alternator Mounting Bolt: 39 Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29
ftlb)
When installing the water pipe and water hose, note the
following.
Check that the damper [A] is in place on the water pipe
[B].
Air Bleed Bolt [C]
5 10 mm (0.20 0.40 in.) [D]
If the damper is damaged or deteriorated, replace it.
Insert the water pipe [A] up to the end of the bending

radius of the water hose [B] as shown in the figure.
Air Bleed Bolt [C]
Make sure that there is clearance between the water pipe
and the fan cover.
Engine Top End

Valve Clearance Inspection
NOTE
Valve clearance must be checked when the engine is
cold (at room temperature).
Remove:
Fan Belt Cover (see Cooling Fan Belt Inspection)
Cylinder Head Cover (see Rocker Arm Components Re-
moval in the Engine Top End chapter)
Turn the crankshaft pulley [A] clockwise so that the timing

mark [B] on the pulley aligns with the reference point [C]
on the timing gear case cover.
Check that the rocker arms at #1 cylinder are free.
If not, turn the pulley one more turn to free the rocker
arms.
Using a thickness gauge [A], measure the valve clearance

between the rocker arm [B] and the valve stem cap [C].
If the valve clearance is incorrect, adjust it.
Valve Clearance
Standard: 0.20 mm (0.0079 in.)
When positioning #1 piston TDC at the compression

stroke:
Inlet valve clearance of #1 and #3 cylinders
Exhaust valve clearance of #1 and #2 cylinders
Front [A]
Measuring Valve [B]
Turn the crankshaft pulley 360 clockwise.

Inlet valve clearance of #2 cylinder
Exhaust valve clearance of #3 cylinder
Front [A]
Measuring Valve [B]
Valve Clearance Adjustment

Loosen the valve adjusting screw locknut [A].
ance is obtained.
Turn the valve adjusting screw [B] until the correct clear-
Holding the adjusting screw, tighten the locknut.

Torque - Valve Adjusting Screw Locknuts: 11 Nm (1.1
kgfm, 97 inlb)
Spark Arrester Cleaning
WARNING
The muffler can become extremely hot during nor-
mal operation and cause severe burns. Since the
engine must be running during this procedure, wear
heat-resistant gloves while cleaning the spark ar-
rester.
Remove the drain plug [A] from the muffler [B].

In an openparking
Apply the brake.
the engine with
area away from combustible materials, start
the gear shift lever in the N (neutral) po-
sition.
Raise and lower engine speed while tapping on the muf-
fler with a rubber mallet until the carbon particles are
purged from the muffler.
DANGER
Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color-
less, odorless poisonous gas. Inhaling carbon
monoxide can cause serious brain injury or death.
DO NOT run the engine in enclosed areas. Operate
only in a well-ventilated area.
Stop the engine.

Install the drain plug.
Converter System
Drive Belt Inspection
Remove the drive belt (see Drive Belt Removal in the
Converter System chapter).
Measure the width [A] of the belt.
If any measurements exceed the service limit, replace the
belt.
Belt Width
Service Limit: 32.6 mm (1.28 in.)
Check the belt for wear, cracks, breaks or peeling.

Belt [A]
Crack [B]
Broken [C]
NOTE
Whenever the belt is replaced, inspect the drive and the
driven pulleys.
Drive Belt Deflection Inspection
Remove the torque converter inner cover (see Torque
Converter Inner Cover Removal in the Converter System
chapter).
Put the transmission in neutral and rotate the driven pulley
by hand to make sure the belt is shifted all the way to the
top of the driven pulley.
Measure the belt deflection as shown in the figure.
Place a straightedge [A] on top of the belt between the
drive pulley [B] and the driven pulley [C].
Use a ruler to push the belt away from the straightedge.
Push hard, but with no more force than 59 N (6 kgf, 13 lb).
Belt Deflection
Standard: 28 36 mm (1.10 1.42 in.)
If the belt deflection is not within the specified range, first
measure the drive belt width (see Drive Belt Inspection).
Adjust the deflection by adding or removing spacers be-
tween the driven pulley shaft hub and cam ramp.
When adjusting the deflection, less is better than more.
Less deflection will maintain better performance for more
time as the belt width decreases by normal wear, which
causes the deflection to increase with usage.
Drive Belt Deflection Adjustment
Disassemble the driven pulley [A] (see Driven Pulley Dis-
assembly in the Converter System chapter).
If the belt deflection is more than 36 mm (1.42 in.), remove
the spacers to decrease it.
The rule-of-thumb is: 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) change in spacer
thickness equals about 1.4 mm (0.055 in.) change in belt
deflection.
If the belt deflection is less than 28 mm (1.10 in.), add the
spacers [B] to increase it.
The rule-of-thumb is: 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) change in spacer
thickness equals about 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) change in belt
deflection.
Spacers
Thickness Part No.
0.3 mm (0.012 in.) 92026-0036
0.6 mm (0.024 in.) 92026-1626
0.8 mm (0.031 in.) 92026-1628
1.0 mm (0.039 in.) 92026-1625
1.4 mm (0.055 in.) 92026-1627
Assemble the driven pulley (see Driven Pulley Assembly

in the Converter System chapter).
With the transmission in neutral, rotate the driven pulley
to allow the belt to return to the top of the sheaves before
measuring the belt deflection.
Measure the belt deflection again and repeat the above
procedures until it is within the standard range.
Using the flywheel & pulley holder, apply a non
-permanent locking agent to the driven pulley bolt
and tighten it.
Special Tool - Flywheel & Pulley Holder: 57001-1605
Torque - Driven Pulley Bolt: 93 Nm (9.5 kgfm, 69 ftlb)
Converter Driven Pulley Shoe Inspection

Disassemble the driven pulley (see Driven Pulley Disas-
sembly in the Converter System chapter).
If the cams [A] of ramp [B] or the wear shoes [C] are dam-
aged or worn, replace the ramp or the wear shoes.
If the wear shoe contact area width [A] is greater than the
service limit, replace the shoe [B].
Wear Shoe Width
Converter Air Cleaner Element Cleaning/Inspec-

tion
NOTE
In dusty areas, the element should be cleaned more
frequently than the recommended interval.
After riding through rain or on muddy roads, the element
should be cleaned immediately.
WARNING
Gasoline and low flash-point solvents can be
flammable and/or explosive and cause severe
burns. Clean the element in a well-ventilated area,
and take care that there is no spark or flame any-
where near the working areas. Do not use gasoline
or low flash-point solvents to clean the element.
Remove the air cleaner element (see Air Cleaner Element

Removal in the Converter System chapter).
Separate
[B].
the foam element [A] from the paper element
Clean the foam element in a bath of a high flash-point

solvent, and then dry it with compressed air or by shaking
it.
After cleaning, saturate the foam element with SE class
SAE30 oil, squeeze out the excess, then wrap it in a clean
rag and squeeze it as dry as possible. Be careful not to
tear the foam element.
Clean the paper element by tapping gently.
NOTICE
Do not use compressed air to clean the paper ele-
ment.
Do not oil the paper element.
Engine Oil and/or Oil Filter Change
Warm up the engine so that the oil will pick up any sedi-
ment and drain easily.
Place an oil pan beneath the engine.
completely.
Remove the engine oil drain plug [A], and let the oil drain
If the oil filter is to be changed, replace it with a new one

(see Oil Filter Removal/Installation).
Replace the gasket with a new one.
After the oil has completely drained out, install the drain
plug with the gasket.
Torque - Engine Oil Drain Plugs: 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25 ftlb)
NOTICE
To avoid engine damage, do not fill the engine oil
above the full level. If the oil level in the cylinder
head cover gets too high because of filling too fast,
oil may over flow from the filler opening and/or may
flow through the crankcase breather hose into the
inlet manifold. Oil in the inlet manifold may flow
into the combustion chambers and cause hydraulic
lock, resulting in severe engine damage.
Remove the oil filler cap, and pull the dipstick out a little
(about 5 cm, 2 in.) to allow the air in the crankcase to
escape.
Slowly and evenly fill the engine with a good quality oil as
specified in the table.
Check the oil level.
Engine Oil
Grade: API CF or CF-4
Viscosity: SAE 10W-40
Capacity: 3.0 L (3.2 US qt )
(When filter is not removed)
3.3 L (3.5 US qt )
(When filter is removed)
Oil Level: Between F and L marks on dipstick
NOTE
Although 10W-40 engine oil is the recommended oil
for most conditions, the oil viscosity may need to be
changed to accommodate atmospheric conditions in
your riding area.
Oil Filter Removal
Remove the oil filter [A] from under the vehicle.
When unscrewing the oil filter, cover the filter bottom with
a clean cloth so as not to spill the engine oil out of the
filter. Any spilled oil should be wiped up completely.
Oil Filter Installation

Apply engine oil to the oil filter gasket.
Install a new filter.
Screw the filter in until the gasket touches the engine, then
turn it 1 turn.
Add the engine oil (see Engine Oil and/or Oil Filter
Change).
Thoroughly warm up the engine, and check for oil leakage
and the oil level.
If necessary, add more engine oil.
Transmission
Transmission Oil Change
Warm up the oil by running the vehicle so that the oil will
pick up any sediment and drain easily. Then stop the
vehicle.
Place an oil pan beneath the transmission case.
Remove the transmission oil drain plug [A], and let the oil
drain completely.
Replace the gasket with a new one.
plug with the gasket.
Torque - Transmission Oil Drain Plug: 15 Nm (1.5 kgfm,
11 ftlb)
Fill the transmission case with a good quality oil as spec-
ified in the table.
Check the oil level.
Transmission Oil
Type: Hypoid gear oil
Viscosity: SAE 90: above 5C (41F) or
Capacity: 2.5 L (2.6 US qt)
Oil Level: Between H and L level lines on dipstick
Wheels/Tires
Wheels Nuts Tightness Inspection
Check the tightness of all the wheel nuts.
If there are loose nut, first loosen by 1/2 turn, then re-
torque them to the specified torque.
Torque - Wheel Nuts: 137 Nm (14.0 kgfm, 101 ftlb)
Tighten the wheel nuts [1] [4] in a criss-cross pattern.
Tire Wear Inspection

Examine the tire for damage and wear.
If the tire is cut or cracked, replace it.
Lumps or high spots on the tread or sidewalls indicate
internal damage, requiring tire replacement.
Remove any foreign objects from the tread. After re-
moval, check for leaks with a soap and water solution.
Measure the tread depth at the center of the tread with a
depth gauge [A]. Since the tire may wear unevenly, take
measurements at several places.
If any of the measurements is less than the service limit,
replace the tire.
Tire Tread Depth
Service Limit 3 mm (0.12 in.)
Standard Tire
Front and Rear: 23 11.00-10 DUNLOP KT869 Tubeless
Final Drive
Front Final Gear Case Oil Change
Warm up the oil by running the vehicle so that the oil will
pick up any sediment and drain easily. Then stop the
vehicle.
Park the vehicle so that it is level, both side-to-side and
front-to-rear.
Remove the front final gear case skid plate (see Front
Final Gear Case Oil Level Inspection in the Final Drive
chapter).
Place an oil pan beneath the front final gear case and
remove the drain plug [A].
WARNING
Oil on tires can cause loss of traction and an ac-
cident resulting in serious injury or death. When
draining or filling the final gear case, do not spill oil
the tire or rim. Clean any oil that may spill with a
high flash-point solvent.
plug with a new aluminum gasket, and tighten it.
Torque - Oil Drain Plug: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Fill the gear case up to the bottom [A] of filler opening [B]
with the oil specified below.
Front Final Gear Case Oil
Type: Hypoid gear oil for LSD (Limited Slip
Differential gears)
Viscosity: SAE 140 (GL-5) or SAE 90 (GL-6)
Capacity: 0.4 L (0.4 US qt)
Oil Level: Filler opening level
NOTE
GL-5 or GL-6 indicate a quality and additive rating.
BeFiller
sure the O-ring [A] is in place, and tighten the filler cap.
Opening [B]
Torque - Oil Filler Cap: 29 Nm (3.0 kgfm, 21 ftlb)
Install the front final gear case skid plate (see Front Final
Gear Case Oil Level Inspection in the Final Drive chapter).
Brakes
Brake Fluid Level Inspection
With the vehicle on level ground, check that the fluid level
in the reservoir is between the upper (MAX) and lower
(MIN) level lines.
Look the fluid level through the hole [A] in the control
panel.
If the fluid level is lower than the lower level line, check
for fluid leaks in the brake lines, and fill the reservoir to
the upper level line.
WARNING
Mixing brands and types of brake fluid can reduce
the brake systems effectiveness and cause an ac-
cident resulting in injury or death. Do not mix two
brands of brake fluid. Change the brake fluid in the
brake line completely if the brake fluid must be re-
filled but the type and brand of the brake fluid that
is already in the reservoir are unidentified.

Rubber Cap [A]
Remove:
FillUpper
the reservoir to the upper level line [A].
Level Line (MAX)
Lower Level Line (MIN) [B]
Hole [C] of Front Cargo Compartment
Apply the brake forcefully for a few seconds and check for
fluid leakage around the fittings.
WARNING
Air in the brake lines diminish braking performance
and can cause an accident resulting in injury or
death. If the brake pedal has a soft or "spongy" feel-
ing mushy when it is applied, there might be air in
the brake lines or the brake may be defective. Do
not operate the vehicle and service the brake sys-
tem immediately.
Brake Fluid Change

Level the brake fluid reservoir [A].
NOTE
The fluid level must be checked several times during
the fluid changing and replenished as necessary. If the
fluid in the reservoir runs completely out any time during
fluid changing, air bleeding must be done since air will
have entered the line.
Remove the wheel for extra clearance (see Wheel Re-

moval in the Wheels/Tires chapter).
Remove the reservoir cap.
cylinder. rubber cap from the bleed valve on the wheel
Remove the
Connect a clear plastic hose [A] to the bleed valve at the

wheel cylinder, running the other end of the hose into a
container.
Left Front Brake Panel [B]
NOTE
Start with the rear left or right wheel and finish with the
front left or right wheel.
Fill the reservoir with new brake fluid.

Change the install
Temporarily the reservoir cap.
brake fluid as follows.
1. Open bleed valve.
2. Pump brake pedal and hold it.
3. Close bleed valve.
4. Release brake pedal.
Tighten:
Torque - Bleed Valves: 5.4 Nm (0.55 kgfm, 48 inlb)
Repeat the previous step for each wheel.
upper level influid
When brake changing is finished, add the fluid to the
the reservoir.
After changing the fluid, check the brake for good braking
power, no brake drag, and no fluid leakage.
If necessary, bleed the air from the brake lines (see Brake
Line Air Bleeding in the Brakes chapter).
WARNING
Air in the brake lines diminish braking performance
and can cause an accident resulting in injury or
death. If the brake pedal has a soft or "spongy" feel-
ing mushy when it is applied, there might be air in
the brake lines or the brake may be defective. Do
not operate the vehicle and service the brake sys-
tem immediately.
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).

Brake Pedal Play Inspection
Check the brake pedal play [A].
Brake Pedal Play
Standard: 2 10 mm (0.08 0.39 in.)
If the play is not correct, adjust it.
Remove the front cargo compartment (see Front Cargo

Compartment Removal in the Frame chapter).
Loosen the locknut [A] and turn the push rod [B] to obtain
the correct amount of free play.
Tighten:
Torque - Push Rod Locknut: 17.2 Nm (1.8 kgfm, 13 ftlb)
Check
drag.
the brake for good braking power and no brake
WARNING
Insufficient free play can cause brake heating and
drag, resulting in skidding and loss of control which
could cause an accident resulting in serious injury
or death. Be sure the brake free play is adjusted to
the specification.
Brake Master Cylinder Cup and Dust Seal
Replacement
Remove the master cylinder (see Master Cylinder Re-
moval in the Brakes chapter).
Remove the piston stop bolt [G].
the circlipthepliers.
Remove dust seal [A] and then the retainer [B] with
Special Tool - Inside Circlip Pliers: 57001-143

Remove the piston assembly (two pistons) by lightly tap
the master cylinder on a wooden block.
Pistons [C]
Springs [D]
Secondary Cups [E]
Primary Cups [F]
Master Cylinder [H]
careful of the secondary cup direction [I].
Be
Assemble the master cylinder.

Clean all the parts including the master cylinder with brake
fluid or alcohol, and apply brake fluid to the removed parts
and the inner wall of the cylinder.
NOTICE
Use only brake fluid, isopropyl alcohol, or ethyl al-
cohol for cleaning brake parts. Do not use any other
fluid for cleaning these parts. Gasoline, motor oil,
or any other petroleum distillate will cause deterio-
ration of the rubber parts. Oil spilled on any part will
be difficult to wash off completely, and will eventu-
ally deteriorate the rubber used in the brake.
Push the piston assembly in all the way with a screwdriver
and install the piston stop bolt. Use a new aluminum
washer.
Tighten:
Torque - Piston Stop Bolt: 8.8 Nm (0.90 kgfm, 78 inlb)
Reservoir Clamp Bolt: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kgfm, 54
inlb)
Install the master cylinder (see Master Cylinder Installa-
tion in the Brakes chapter).
Brake Hose and Pipe Inspection
The high pressure inside the brake line can cause fluid to
leak [A] or the hose to burst if the line is not properly main-
tained. Bend and twist the rubber hose while examining
it.
Replace it if any cracks [B] or bulges [C] are noticed.
The metal pipe will rust if the plating is damaged.
Replace the pipe if it is rusted, cracked (especially check
the fittings), or if the plating is badly scratched (see Brake
Hose and Pipe Replacement).
Brake Hose and Pipe Replacement
To remove the brake pipe [A], unscrew the nipple [B].
To remove the hoses [C], remove the banjo bolts [D]
and/or pull out the retainers.
The front cargo compartment inside is shown.
Immediately wipe up any brake fluid that spills.
NOTICE
Brake fluid quickly ruins painted surfaces; any
spilled fluid should be completely wiped up imme-
diately.
Use a new copper washer for each side of the hose fittings
at the master cylinder.
Apply brake fluid to the threads of the nipple [B] of the
brake pipe [A].
Tighten:
Torque - Brake Hose Banjo Bolts: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18
ftlb)
Brake Pipe Nipples: 18 Nm (1.8 kgfm, 13 ftlb)
Check that the brake line has proper fluid pressure and
no fluid leakage.
The left front brake drum is shown.
The left front knuckle is shown.
Brake Pipe [A]
Nipple [B]
Brake Hose [C]
Retainer [D]
The rear-middle of the vehicle is shown with the cargo

bed tilted up.
Brake Hose and Pipes [A]
Nipples [B]
The middle-left of the vehicle is shown with the cargo bed
tilted up.
Brake Pipe [A]
Nipple [B]
Brake Hose [C]
Retainer [D]
Torque Converter Outer Cover [E]
Front [F]
The rear-left brake line is shown.

Brake Pipe [A]
Nipple [B]
Brake Hose [C]
Retainer [D]
Front [E]
Brake Wear Inspection

Remove the brake drum (see Brake Drum Removal in the
Brakes chapter).
Measure
points.
the inside diameter [A] of the drum at several
If any measurement is greater than the service limit, re-

place the drum.
If the drum is worn unevenly or scored, lightly turn the
drum on a brake drum lathe or replace it. Do not turn the
drum beyond the service limit.
Brake Drum Inside Diameter
Standard: 180.000 180.160 mm
(7.0866 7.0929 in.)
Remove the brake drum for brake shoe inspection (see

Brake Drum Removal in the Brakes chapter).
Measure the lining thickness at several points.
Brake Shoe Lining Thickness
If any measurement is less than the service limit, replace
both shoes as a set.
If the lining thickness is greater than the service limit, do
the following before installing the shoes.
File or sand down any high spots on the surface on the
lining.
Use a wire brush to remove any foreign particles from the
lining.
Wash off any oil or grease with an oilless solvent.
NOTICE
Do not use a solvent which will leave an oily
residue. The shoes will have to be replaced.
Brake Wheel Cylinder Assembly Replacement
(Front Brake Panel)
Remove the brake drum (see Brake Drum Removal in the
Brakes chapter).
The left front brake panel is shown.
Remove the brake shoe springs [A] and brake shoes [B]
individually.
Push the shoe hold-down springs [C] and twist the pins
[D] to remove the shoes.
NOTE
Wrap the brake shoes with a clean cloth to protect the
linings from grease or dirt.
Remove the brake pipe nipple [A] and plug the nipple.
NOTICE
diately.
Unscrew the mounting bolts [B] and take off [C] the front
brake wheel cylinder.
(Rear Brake Panel)

Remove the brake shoes [A] in the same way as in the
front brake panel.
Rear Brake Wheel Cylinder [B]
(Rear Brake Panel)

Remove the brake pipe nipple [A] and plug the nipple.
Unscrew the mounting nuts [B] and take off [C] the rear
brake wheel cylinder.
Front [D]
Replace the rear wheel cylinder with a new one.

can be reinstalled
Set the brake shoe clearance adjuster so that the drum
on the panel assembly.
(Front Brake Panel)
Turn [A] either end of the cylinder fully while holding the
other end [B]. Both ends are put into the cylinder.
(Rear Brake Panel)

Push the ratchet [A] forwards and in to reset the shoe
clearance adjuster from the protruding position to its orig-
inal position. The stop [B] sets the position.
Left Parking Brake Lever Linkage [A] of Rear Brake

Ratchet [B]
Protruding Position [C]
Shoe Clearance Adjuster [E]
Front [F]

Ratchet [B]
Original Position [D]
Front [F]
Apply brake fluid to the threads of the brake pipe nipple
and tighten it.
Torque - Brake Pipe Nipples: 18 Nm (1.8 kgfm, 13 ftlb)
Front Wheel Cylinder Mounting Bolts: 10.3 Nm
(1.1 kgfm, 91 inlb)
Rear Wheel Cylinder Mounting Nuts: 7.4 Nm (0.75
kgfm, 65 inlb)
Apply grease to the following portions (front and rear

brake panels).
Brake Panel and Brake Shoe Contact Points [A]
Wheel Cylinder Piston Ends [B]
Brake Shoe Anchor Ends [C]
left front brake is shown.
The
(Rear Brake Panel)

Grease the shoe clearance adjuster pivots [A].
(Rear Brake Panel)

Pack the gaps [A] with a little grease.
(Front and Rear Brake Panels)
Bleed the brake line after drum installation (see Brake
Line Air Bleeding in the Brakes chapter).
Be sure to check the brake system for good braking
power, no brake drag and no fluid leakage.
WARNING
After servicing, it takes several applications of the
brake pedal before the brake shoes contact the
drum, which could result in increased stopping
distance and cause an accident resulting in injury
or death. Do not attempt to ride the vehicle until a
firm brake pedal is obtained by pumping the pedal
until the shoes are against the drum.
Inspect the parking brake lever (see Parking Brake Lever

Inspection).
Parking Brake Lever Inspection
Check parking brake lever travel [A] by feeling clicks.
Pull the parking brake lever [B] upward slowly all the way.
Count the number of notches (clicks) during lever travel.
The vehicle should not roll while parked.
Parking Brake Lever Travel
Standard: 8 12 notches (clicks) at 200 N (20 kgf, 44
lb)
Release
position.
the parking brake and return the lever to its rest
If the lever travel is not correct, adjust it.
Pull up the rubber boot [A].
Loosen the locknut [B] and turn the adjusting nut [C] to
obtain the correct amount of lever travel.
Tighten the locknut.
Check the parking brake for good braking power and
when released, no brake drag.
WARNING
Insufficient free play can cause brake heating and
drag, resulting in skidding and loss of control which
could cause an accident resulting in serious injury
or death. Be sure the brake free play is adjusted to
the specification.
NOTE
If the parking brake lever travel cannot be adjusted with
the adjusting nut at the lever, remove the cover [A] and
use the adjusters [B] behind the parking brake lever and
adjusters [C] near the rear wheels. Be sure to adjust
both the left and right cables evenly, and then securely
tighten the adjuster mounting nuts [D].
Steering
Steering Inspection
Check steering wheel free play [A].
Set the front wheels straight ahead. Gently turn [B] the
steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel free play
is the amount of travel in the steering wheel, before the
front wheels begin to turn.
Steering Wheel Free Play
Standard: 0 20 mm (0 0.79 in.)
If steering wheel free play is not correct, inspect the fol-
lowing.
Steering Wheel Mounting Nut (see Steering Wheel Cen-
tering in the Steering chapter)
Universal Joint Clamp Bolts (see Exploded View in the
Steering chapter)
EPS Unit Mounting Bolts (see EPS Unit Installation in
the Steering chapter)
Steering Gear Assembly Bracket Bolts (see Steering
Gear Assembly Installation in the Steering chapter)
Steering Gear Assembly Mounting Rubber Dampers
Tie-Rod End Nuts (see Steering Gear Assembly Instal-
lation in the Steering chapter)
Steering Gear Preload Adjustment (see Steering Gear
Preload Adjustment in the Steering chapter)
If the inspections above are good but the free play is out
of the specified, the steering gear assembly is damaged
and should be replaced as a unit.
Steering Joint Dust Boot Inspection
Visually inspect the dust boots [A] at both the ends of the
steering gear assembly.
Front [B]
If there is any signs of deterioration, cracks, or damage,
replace the steering gear assembly together with these
boots.
Frame
Seat Belt Inspection
Check the belts [A] for damage or tear.
Check
[B].
the tightness torque of the seat belt mounting bolts
Torque - Seat Belt Mounting Bolts: 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25

ftlb)
Seat Belt Buckle Mounting Bolts [C]: 34 Nm (3.5
kgfm, 25 ftlb)
Check the operation of the buckle [A].

Set the plate [B] in the buckle, and confirm the plate does
not come off when pulling it.
Set the plate in the buckle, and confirm the plate comes
off when the buckle button [C] is pushed.
If operation is not correct, visually inspect the plate.
If the plate is damaged, replace the plate assembly with
a new one.
If the plate is not damaged, replace the buckle assembly.
Electrical System
Electrolyte Level Inspection (Conventional Type
Battery)
WARNING
Electrolyte contains sulfuric acid which is harmful
to skin, eyes, and clothing.
Wear eye protection and rubber gloves.
If spillage occurs on body or clothing, rinse at once
with water for at least 15 minutes.
Remove the filler caps [A] on the battery.

Lift the side of the cap [B] opposite the terminals, and then
lift the side of the cap nearest the terminals.
The electrolyte level should be between the upper and

lower levels.
Upper level is bottom [A] of the split ring [B].
Lower level is top of the plates [C].
If the level of electrolyte in any cell is below the lower level,
add only distilled water to the upper level of the cell.
NOTICE
Ordinary tap water is not a substitute for distilled
water and will shorten the life of the battery.
Do not fill into the split [D].
Do not overfill.
Electrolyte Specific Gravity Inspection
(Conventional Type Battery)
WARNING
Check battery condition by testing the specific gravity of

the electrolyte in each cell with a hydrometer.
Read the level [A] of the electrolyte on the floating scale
[B].
Specific Gravity
Standard: 1.265 at 20C (68F)
If the specific gravity is below 1.20 (charge 70%), the bat-
tery needs to be charged.
NOTE
The specific gravity of the electrolyte varies with
changes in temperature, so the specific gravity reading
must be corrected for the temperature of the electrolyte.
Celsius: Add 0.007 points to reading for each 10C
(50F) above 20C (68F) or subtract 0.007 points for
each 10C (50F) below 20C (68F)
Fahrenheit: Add 0.004 points to reading for each 12C
(10F) above 20C (68F) or subtract 0.004 points for
each 12C (10F) below 20C (68F)
If the specific gravity of any of the cells is more than 0.050
away from any other reading, the battery will probably not
accept a charge. It is generally best to replace a battery
in this condition.
If the specific gravity of all the cells is 1.265 or more, the
battery is fully charged.
Charging Condition Inspection (Conventional
Type Battery)
Battery charging condition can be checked by measuring
battery terminal voltage.
Disconnect the battery terminal cables.
NOTICE
Be sure to disconnect the negative terminal cables
first.
Measure the battery terminal voltage.

NOTE
Measure with a digital voltmeter [A] which can be read
to 0.1 volt.
If the reading is below the specified, refreshing charge is
required.
Battery Terminal Voltage
Standard: 12.6 V or more
Terminal Voltage (V) [A]
Battery Charge Rate (%) [B]
Refresh charge is required [C]
Note [D]
Good [E]
Brake Light Switch Inspection

Check the operation of the brake light switch by depress-
ing the brake pedal. The brake light should go on after 10
mm (0.39 in.) of pedal travel [A].
If it does not, adjust the brake light switch [A] up or down.

To change the switch position, turn the adjusting nut [B].
Brake Light Switch Timing
Standard: ON after 10 mm (0.39 in.) of pedal travel
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the electrical connections in-
side the switch, be sure that the switch body does
not turn during adjustment.
General Lubrication
Before lubricating each part, clean off any rusty spots with
rust remover and wipe off any grease, oil, dirt, or grime.
Lubricate the points listed below with indicated lubricant.
NOTE
Whenever the vehicle has been operated under
wet or rainy conditions, or especially after using a
high-pressure spray water, perform the general lubri-
cation.
Pivots and Points: Lubricate with Grease.

2WD/4WD Shift Lever Pivot
Brake Pedal Pivot
Cargo Bed Mounting Pins
Differential Shift Lever Pivot
Propeller Shaft Bearing [A] (under Fuel Tank)
Seat Brackets
Throttle Pedal Pivot
Transmission Shift Lever Pivot
Grease the propeller shaft bearing using the grease nip-
ple [B].
Cables: Lubricate with Grease.
2WD/4WD Shift Cable
Differential Shift Cable
Parking Brake Cables
Throttle Cable
Cables: Lubricate with Rust Inhibitor.

2WD/4WD Shift Cable
Differential Shift Cable
Throttle Cable
With the cable disconnect at both ends, the cable should

move freely [A] within the cable housing.
If cable movement is not free after lubricating, if the cable
is frayed [B], or if the cable housing is kinked [C], replace
the cable.
Bolts, Nuts and Fasteners Tightness Inspection

Check the tightness of the bolts and nuts listed here. Also,
check to see that each cotter pin is in place and in good
condition.
NOTE
Check the engine fastener tightness when the engine is
cold (at room temperature).
If there are loose fasteners, first loosen by 1/2 turn, then
retorque them to the specified torque following the speci-
fied tightening sequence. Refer to the appropriate chap-
ter for torque specifications. If torque specifications are
not in the appropriate chapter, see the basic torque table.
Bolt, Nut, and Fasteners to be checked

Engine
Engine Mounting Bolts
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Joint Bolts
Exhaust Pipe Holder Nuts
Fuel Tank Bolt and Nut
Muffler Mounting Bolts
Throttle Pedal Pivot Cotter Pin
Transmission/Final Drive
2WD/4WD Shift Lever Pivot Snap Pin
2WD/4WD Shift Shaft Lever Mounting Nut
Axle Nuts and Cotter Pins
Differential Shift Cable Upper End Snap Pin
Differential Shift Lever Pivot Snap Pin
Differential Shift Shaft Lever Mounting Nut
Hi/Low Shift Cable Upper End Snap Pin
Hi/Low Shift Lever Pivot Snap Pin
Hi/Low Shift Shaft Lever Mounting Nut
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Nuts
Shift Shaft Lever Clamp Bolts
Transmission Shift Cable Upper End Snap Pin
Wheels
Wheel Nuts
Brakes
Brake Pedal Pivot Shaft Cotter Pin
Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts
Master Cylinder Push Rod Joint Cotter Pin
Parking Brake Cable Lower End Joint Cotter Pins
Parking Brake Lever Assembly Mounting Bolts
Suspension
Front Suspension Arm Pivot Bolts
Leaf Spring Mounting Nuts
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Nuts
Strut Clamp Nuts and Cotter Pins
Strut Mounting Locknuts
Steering
Front Suspension Arm Joint Nuts and Cotter Pins
Steering Shaft Mounting Bolts and Nuts
Steering Wheel Mounting Nut
Tie-Rod End Locknuts
Tie-Rod End Nuts and Cotter Pins
Universal Joint Clamp Bolts
Frame
Battery Holder Mounting Nuts
Cargo Bed Hook Mounting Bolts
Cargo Bed Mounting Pin Snap Pins
Front and Rear Bar Mounting Bolts and Nuts
Front and Rear Seat Back Mounting Nuts
Front and Rear Seat Belt Mounting Bolts
Front and Rear Seat Belt Backle Mounting Bolts
Front Final Gear Case Skid Plate Mounting Bolts
Front Guard Nuts
Rear End Subframe Mounting Nuts
Seat Bracket Nuts
FUEL SYSTEM 3-1
Fuel System
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 3-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 3-8
Special Tool ............................................................................................................................ 3-9
Throttle Pedal and Cable........................................................................................................ 3-10 3
Throttle Pedal Play Inspection .......................................................................................... 3-10
Throttle Pedal Play Adjustment......................................................................................... 3-10
Full Throttle Pedal Position Adjustment ............................................................................ 3-10
Throttle Cable Installation ................................................................................................. 3-11
Throttle Cable Lubrication................................................................................................. 3-11
Throttle Cable Inspection .................................................................................................. 3-11
Fuel Injection Nozzle .............................................................................................................. 3-12
Fuel Injection Nozzle Removal ......................................................................................... 3-12
Fuel Injection Nozzle Installation ...................................................................................... 3-12
Fuel Injection Nozzle Inspection ....................................................................................... 3-12
Fuel Injection Pump................................................................................................................ 3-15
Idle Speed Inspection ....................................................................................................... 3-15
Idle Speed Adjustment...................................................................................................... 3-15
Maximum Engine Speed Inspection ................................................................................. 3-15
Maximum Engine Speed Adjustment................................................................................ 3-15
Fuel Injection Pipe Removal ............................................................................................. 3-15
Fuel Injection Pipe Installation .......................................................................................... 3-16
Fuel Injection Pump Removal ........................................................................................... 3-17
Fuel Injection Pump Installation ........................................................................................ 3-17
Fuel Injection Pump Timing Inspection ............................................................................. 3-18
Fuel Injection Pump Timing Adjustment ........................................................................... 3-19
Fuel Injection Pump Inspection and Repair ...................................................................... 3-21
Fuel Injection Pump Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 3-22
Air Cleaner.............................................................................................................................. 3-29
Air Cleaner Element Cleaning........................................................................................... 3-29
Air Cleaner Housing Removal........................................................................................... 3-30
Air Cleaner Housing Installation........................................................................................ 3-30
Air Cleaner Housing Dust and/or Water Inspection .......................................................... 3-30
Fuel Filter................................................................................................................................ 3-31
Fuel Filter Removal........................................................................................................... 3-31
Fuel Filter Installation........................................................................................................ 3-31
Fuel Filter Cartridge Replacement .................................................................................... 3-31
Water Draining .................................................................................................................. 3-31
Fuel Tank ................................................................................................................................ 3-32
Fuel Tank Removal ........................................................................................................... 3-32
Fuel Tank Installation ........................................................................................................ 3-33
Fuel Tank Cleaning/Inspection.......................................................................................... 3-35
Fuel Level Gauge Removal (KAF950G9 GC/HA).......................................................... 3-36
Fuel Level Gauge Installation (KAF950G9 GC/HA)....................................................... 3-37
Fuel Level Gauge Check (KAF950G9 GC/HA).............................................................. 3-37
Fuel Level Gauge Removal (KAF950GD)......................................................................... 3-37
Fuel Level Gauge Installation (KAF950GD)...................................................................... 3-38
3-2 FUEL SYSTEM
Exploded View
FUEL SYSTEM 3-3
Exploded View
Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Air Cleaner Housing Mounting Bolts 20 2.0 15
2 Air Duct Mounting Bolt 5.0 0.51 44 inlb
3. Approximately 60
4. Horizontal Line
5. Install the duct so that the long side faces frame.
6. Position the outlet boot downward.
7. KAF950G9, GA/HA
G: Apply grease.
R: Replacement Parts
3-4 FUEL SYSTEM
Exploded View
KAF950G9 GC/HA
FUEL SYSTEM 3-5
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Air Vent Plug 5.0 0.51 44 inlb
2 Distributor Head Bolt 17 1.7 13
3 Fuel Filter Mounting Bolts 20 2.0 15
4 Fuel Injection Nozzles 59 6.0 44
5 Fuel Injection Pipe Clamp Bolts 7.4 0.75 65 inlb
6 Fuel Injection Pipe Mounting Nuts 25 2.5 18
7 Fuel Injection Pump Bracket Bolts 20 2.0 15
8 Fuel Injection Pump Gear Nut 64 6.5 47
9 Fuel Injection Pump Mounting Nuts 20 2.0 15
10 Idle Adjusting Screw Locknut 6.9 0.70 61 inlb
11 Linkage Pipe Nuts 27 2.8 20
12 Maximum Speed Set Screw Locknut 6.9 0.70 61 inlb
13. Air Vent Hose
14. Check Valve
15. Fuel Output Hose (from Fuel Filter to Fuel Injection Pump)
16. Fuel Output Hose (from Fuel Tank to Fuel Filter)
17. Fuel Return Hose (from Fuel Injection Pump to Fuel Tank)
18. KAF950G9, GA/HA
AD: Apply adhesive.
G: Apply grease.
3-6 FUEL SYSTEM
Exploded View
KAF950GD
FUEL SYSTEM 3-7
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Air Vent Plug 5.0 0.51 44 inlb
2 Distributor Head Bolt 17 1.7 13
3 Fuel Filter Mounting Bolts 20 2.0 15
4 Fuel Injection Nozzles 59 6.0 44
5 Fuel Injection Pipe Clamp Bolts 7.4 0.75 65 inlb
6 Fuel Injection Pipe Mounting Nuts 25 2.5 18
7 Fuel Injection Pump Bracket Bolts 20 2.0 15
8 Fuel Injection Pump Gear Nut 64 6.5 47
9 Fuel Injection Pump Mounting Nuts 20 2.0 15
10 Idle Adjusting Screw Locknut 6.9 0.70 61 inlb
11 Linkage Pipe Nuts 27 2.8 20
12 Maximum Speed Set Screw Locknut 6.9 0.70 61 inlb
13 Fuel Level Gauge Mounting Bolts 4.0 0.41 35 inlb
14. Air Vent Hose
15. Check Valve
16. Fuel Output Hose (from Fuel Filter to Fuel Injection Pump)
17. Fuel Output Hose (from Fuel Tank to Fuel Filter)
18. Fuel Return Hose (from Fuel Injection Pump to Fuel Tank)
AD: Apply adhesive.
G: Apply grease.
3-8 FUEL SYSTEM
Specifications

Throttle Pedal and Cable
Throttle Pedal Play 5 10 mm (0.20 0.39 in.)
Fuel Injection Nozzle
Fuel Injection Nozzle Injection
Pressure:
Marking of Injection Nozzle:
Red or Green 13 239 14 220 kPa (135 145
kgf/cm, 1 920 2 062 psi)
None 14 465 14 955 kPa (147.5 152.5
kgf/cm, 2 098 2 169 psi)
Fuel Injection Pump
Idle Speed 850 950 r/min (rpm)
Maximum Engine Speed (No Load) 3 800 3 900 r/min (rpm)
Injection Timing (Plunger Stroke):
Red or Green 0.81 0.03 mm (0.0319 0.0012 in.)
None 0.81 0.02 mm (0.0319 0.0008 in.)
Injection Nozzle Mark Position [A]

FUEL SYSTEM 3-9
Special Tool
Dial Gauge Adapter:
57001-1430
3-10 FUEL SYSTEM
Throttle Pedal Play Inspection
Refer to the Throttle Pedal Play Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Throttle Pedal Play Adjustment
Refer to the Throttle Pedal Play Adjustment in the Periodic
Full Throttle Pedal Position Adjustment
Screw in the throttle pedal stop bolt [B].

Injection Pump Cover Bolts [A] and Collars
Remove:
Injection Pump Cover [B]
Reinstall the collars [A] and tighten the pump cover bolts
[B] together with the bracket [C] temporary.
Depress the throttle pedal until the speed control lever [A]
on the injection pump is in the fully opened position, and
hold it there.
Turn the throttle pedal stop bolt until the bolt head lightly
touches the bottom of the throttle pedal.
Tighten the locknut securely.
FUEL SYSTEM 3-11
Throttle Cable Installation
Run the throttle cable correctly (see Cable, Wire, and
Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter).
Adjust the throttle pedal play adjustment (see Throttle
Pedal Play Adjustment in the Periodic Maintenance chap-
ter).
WARNING
Operation with improperly adjusted, incorrectly
routed or damaged cables could result in an unsafe
riding condition. Follow the service manual to be
make sure to correct any of these conditions.
Throttle Cable Lubrication

Whenever the throttle cable is removed, lubricate the ca-
ble as follows.
Apply a thin coating of grease to the cable upper and
lower ends.
Lubricate the cable with a penetrating rust inhibitor
through a pressure cable luber.
Throttle Cable Inspection

With the throttle cable disconnected at both ends, the ca-
ble should move freely [A] within the cable housing.
If the cable does not move freely after lubricating, if the
cable is frayed [B], or if the housing is kinked [C], replace
the cable.
3-12 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Injection Nozzle Removal
Remove:
Fuel Injection Pipes (see Fuel Injection Pipe Removal)
Fuel Return Hose [A]
Linkage Pipe Nuts [B]
Linkage Pipe [C]
Remove:
Washer [A]
Fuel Injection Nozzle [B] and Gasket
NOTICE
Handle the fuel injection nozzles with extreme care.
Do not drop the nozzles.
Fuel Injection Nozzle Installation

Replace the gasket [A] with a new one.
Install the fuel injection nozzle [B].
Torque - Fuel Injection Nozzles: 59 Nm (6.0 kgfm, 44 ftlb)
Replace the washer [C] with a new one.
Linkage Pipe [D]
Install:
Linkage Pipe Nuts [E]

Torque - Linkage Pipe Nuts: 27 Nm (2.8 kgfm, 20 ftlb)
Install:
Fuel Return Hose
Fuel Injection Pipes (see Fuel Injection Pipe Installation)
Fuel Injection Nozzle Inspection
WARNING
Fuel is released from the injection nozzle at high
pressure and is highly flammable. Keep hands, fin-
gers and other body parts at least 12 inches from
the nozzle during testing. Do not smoke. Make sure
the area is well ventilated and free from any source
of flame or sparks; this includes any appliance with
a pilot light.
NOTE
Refer to the Fuel Injection Pump Inspection and Repair
for nozzle repair information.
FUEL SYSTEM 3-13
Injection Pressure Check
Install the fuel injection nozzle on a nozzle tester.
Quickly move the tester lever up and down so that the
injection nozzle sprays two to three times.
This step blows off any carbon deposits on the injection
nozzle port.
Move the lever very slowly, gradually raising the pressure.
Measure the maximum pressure just as the pointer of the
pressure gauge drops suddenly.
Fuel Injection Nozzle Injection Pressure
Red or Green: 13 239 14 220 kPa (135 145
kgf/cm, 1 920 2 062 psi)
None: 14 465 14 955 kPa (147.5 152.5
kgf/cm, 2 098 2 169 psi)
If the measured pressure does not comply with the spec-
ification, replace the injection nozzle.
Leakage Check
(When there is a mark (green or red) on the nozzle.)
Slowly depress the tester lever, until the pressure reaches
about 11 768 kPa (120 kgf/cm, 1 706 psi.)
(When there is no mark on the nozzle.)
Slowly depress the tester lever, until the pressure reaches
about 12 749 kPa (130 kgf/cm, 1 849 psi.)
Checking for Buzzing and Spray Pattern

Operate the tester lever at a rate of 30 to 60 strokes per
minute in the case of a new nozzle; 15 to 60 strokes per
minute in the case of a used nozzle.
Make sure that buzzing occurs during these strokes.
NOTE
When this buzzing occurs, you can feel a pulsation
transmitted to your hand through the nozzle tester han-
dle while the nozzle injection is taking place.
When the pressurized fuel from the injection pump is in-
jected, this injection is accompanied by rapid, recurring
pressure variations during the time from the start to the
finish of the injection. These pulsing pressure variations
are felt as buzzing.
These pulsations of the fuel are affected mainly by the
movement of the nozzle needle and good or bad condi-
tions of the valve seat section.
Generally, a nozzle that buzzes is good, because a
spray condition where intermittent pulsations are gen-
erated assures good cut-off of the fuel supply.
3-14 FUEL SYSTEM
Ensure that the fuel spray forms a cone shape while the
buzzing is occurring, and that the center of the cone is
aligned with the center line of the nozzle.
Ensure that the nozzle does not drip.
FUEL SYSTEM 3-15
Fuel Injection Pump
Idle Speed Inspection
Refer to the Idle Speed Inspection in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
Idle Speed Adjustment
Refer to the Idle Speed Adjustment in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
Maximum Engine Speed Inspection
Check the full throttle pedal position (see Full Throttle
Pedal Position Adjustment).
Set the parking brake.
Start thethe
Be sure transmission is in neutral.
Tilt up the cargo and
engine warm it up thoroughly.
Check the maximum engine speed with a suitable
bed.
tachometer.
Maximum Engine Speed (No Load)
Standard: 3 800 3 900 r/min (rpm)
If the maximum engine speed is not in the specified range,
adjust it.
Maximum Engine Speed Adjustment
Set the parking brake.
Tilt up thethecargo
Be sure transmission is in neutral.
Remove the fuel bed.
Pedal Position Adjustment).
injection pump cover (see Full Throttle
Cut and remove the wire [A] on the maximum speed set
screw [B].
Turn thethemaximum
Loosen locknut [C].
engine speed is correct.
speed set screw until the maximum
Tighten:
Torque - Maximum Speed Set Screw Locknut: 6.9 Nm (0.70
kgfm, 61 inlb)
Lock the maximum speed set screw with a wire or paint
on the locknut and pump housing.
Fuel Injection Pipe Removal
WARNING
Fuel is extremely flammable and can be explosive
under certain conditions. Turn the main switch off.
Do not smoke. Make sure the area is well ventilated
and free from any source of flame or sparks; this
includes any appliance with a pilot light.
NOTICE
Take care to prevent any dirt from entering injection
nozzle holes or delivery valve ports when fuel deliv-
ery lines are removed.
3-16 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Injection Pump
Cut the bands [A].

Air Duct Mounting Screw [B]
Remove:
Air Duct [C]
Remove the air duct [A].
Remove:
Fuel Injection Pipe Clamp Bolts [A]
Fuel Injection Pipe Clamps [B]
Loosen the fuel injection pipe upper nuts [C].
Remove:
Fuel Injection Pipe No. 3 Lower Nut [A] and Upper Nut
Fuel Injection Pipe No. 1 Lower Nut [B] and Upper Nut
Fuel Injection Pipe No. 2 Lower Nut [C] and Upper Nut
Fuel Injection Pipe Installation

Install the fuel injection pipes using the following steps.
First, install the No. 2 injection pipe [A].
Secondly, install the No. 1 injection pipe.
Finally, install the No. 3 injection pipe.
NOTE
Tighten the upper and lower nuts temporarily and then
tighten them to the specified torque.
Tighten:
Torque - Fuel Injection Pipe Mounting Nuts: 25 Nm (2.5
kgfm, 18 ftlb)
Fuel Injection Pipe Clamp Bolts: 7.4 Nm (0.75
kgfm, 65 inlb)
FUEL SYSTEM 3-17
Fuel Injection Pump
Fuel Injection Pump Removal
Remove:
Engine (see Engine Removal in the Engine Removal/In-
stallation chapter)
Fuel Injection Pump Drive Gear (see Timing Gear Case
Removal in the Crankshaft/Crankcase chapter)
Fuel Return Hose [A]
Fuel Injection Pump Bracket Bolts [B]
Fuel Injection Pump Bracket [C]
Remove:
Fuel Injection Pump Mounting Nuts [A]
Fuel Injection Pump [B]
Fuel Injection Pump Installation

Replace the O-ring [A] with a new one.
Apply grease to the new O-ring.
Install the fuel injection pump temporary.

Align the timing marks [A] on the injection pump and tim-
ing gear case.
Tighten the mounting nuts with fingers.
3-18 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Injection Pump
Install:
Fuel Injection Pump Drive Gear, Timing Gear Case
Cover and Crankshaft Pulley (see Timing Gear Case
Installation in the Crankshaft/Crankcase chapter)
Adjust the fuel injection pump timing (see Fuel Injection
Pump Timing Inspection).
Tighten:
Torque - Fuel Injection Pipe Mounting Nuts: 25 Nm (2.5
kgfm, 18 ftlb)
Fuel Injection Pipe Clamp Bolts: 7.4 Nm (0.75
kgfm, 65 inlb)
Adjust:
Maximum Engine Speed (New Injection Pump) (see
Maximum Engine Speed Adjustment)
Idle Speed (see Idle Speed Adjustment in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter)
Fuel Injection Pump Timing Inspection
Remove:
Fan Belt Cover (see Cooling Fan Belt Inspection in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter)
Cylinder Head Cover (see Rocker Arm Components Re-
moval in the Engine Top End chapter)
Oil Level Gauge Pipe (see End Plate Removal in the
Crankshaft/Crankcase chapter)
Torque Converter Case (see Torque Converter Case Re-
moval in the Converter System chapter)
Turn the crankshaft pulley [A] clockwise, and position the

crankshaft at #1 piston TDC on the compression stroke.
Align the timing mark [B] on the crankshaft pulley and
reference point [C] on the timing case cover.
If the inlet and exhaust valves for #1 cylinder have no
clearance, turn the crankshaft pulley one revolution.
Remove the distributor bolt [A].

FUEL SYSTEM 3-19
Fuel Injection Pump
Install the dial gauge adapter [A] and dial gauge [B].
Special Tool - Dial Gauge Adapter: 57001-1430
Slowly turn the crankshaft pulley counterclockwise about

30 until the dial gauge needle stops. Pump plunger lift is
zero at this point.
Set the dial gauge to the 0 position.
Slowly turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise, stopping at

#1 piston TDC on the compression stroke.
NOTE
Do not turn the crankshaft pulley past TDC. If the crank-
shaft pulley is turned past TDC, turn the crankshaft back
to 0 on the dial gauge and repeat the procedure.
Note dial gauge reading.

Injection Timing (Plunger Stroke)
Red or Green: 0.81 0.03 mm (0.0319 0.0012 in.)
None: 0.81 0.02 mm (0.0319 0.0008 in.)
If the gauge reading is within the specification, the injec-
tion pump is properly timed.
If the gauge reading is not within the specification, adjust
the injection pump timing (see Fuel Injection Pump Timing
Adjustment).
Fuel Injection Pump Timing Adjustment
Inspect the fuel injection pump timing.
NOTE
Do not turn the crankshaft pulley past TDC. If the crank-
shaft pulley is turned past TDC, turn the crankshaft back
to 0 and repeat the procedure.
3-20 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Injection Pump
Loosen the fuel injection pump mounting nuts [A].
Loosen the fuel injection pump bracket bolt [A].
While observing the dial gauge, slowly rotate the fuel in-
jection pump away from the cylinder head until gauge
reads 0.81 0.03 mm (0.0319 0.0012 in.).
Hold the fuel injection pump in this position and tighten
the fuel injection pump mounting nuts.
NOTE
Do not rotate the pump past the specification. If the
pump is rotated past the specification, rotate the pump
back toward the cylinder head and repeat the proce-
dure.
Tighten:
Torque - Fuel Injection Pump Mounting Nuts: 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Fuel Injection Pump Bracket Bolts: 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
To verify that the timing is correct, turn the crankshaft pul-

ley counterclockwise until the dial indicator reads 0.
Then turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise until the timing
mark on the crankshaft pulley aligns with reference point
on the timing case cover.
The indicator should be within the specification.
Injection Timing (Plunger Stroke)
Red or Green: 0.81 0.03 mm (0.0319 0.0012 in.)
None: 0.81 0.02 mm (0.0319 0.0008 in.)
If the indicator reading is not within the specification, re-
peat the procedure.
Remove the dial gauge adapter and dial gauge.
Install the distributor head bolt and washer.
Tighten:
Torque - Distributor Head Bolt: 17 Nm (1.7 kgfm, 13 ftlb)
FUEL SYSTEM 3-21
Fuel Injection Pump
Fuel Injection Pump Inspection and Repair
NOTE
Do not disassemble the fuel injection pump and injec-
tion nozzles. The pump and nozzles are produced in
highly automated modern production facilities. They
cannot be assembled by hand in the field.
Refer to the troubleshooting section to check of the pump.

If the pump and nozzle are malfunction, replace them, or
consult a reliable repair shop (ex. Denso Service Station).
3-22 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Injection Pump Troubleshooting
FUEL SYSTEM 3-23
3-24 FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL SYSTEM 3-25
3-26 FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL SYSTEM 3-27
3-28 FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL SYSTEM 3-29
Air Cleaner
A clogged engine air cleaner restricts the engines air in-
let, increasing fuel consumption, reduction engine power.
NOTICE
A clogged air cleaner may allow dirt and dust to en-
ter the engine causing excessive wear and possible
engine damage.
The engine air filter restriction gauge [A] shows whether
the air cleaner is clogged. Whenever the red band shows
in the gauge window [B], the air cleaner element should be
cleaned.
Air Cleaner Element Cleaning
Unlock the clamps [A].
Remove the air cleaner cover [B].
Remove the element [A].

of a screwdriver.
Clean the element by tapping gently with the handle end
If the element is very dirty or damaged, replace the ele-

ment.
Carefully clean out the air cleaner cover.
Install the cover and lock the clamps.

Face the TOP mark [A] upward.
3-30 FUEL SYSTEM
Air Cleaner
Reset the air filter restriction gauge [A].

After servicing the air cleaner element, the restriction
gauge should be reset by pushing the button [B] at the
end of the gauge.
Air Cleaner Housing Removal

Tilt up the seat.
Remove:
Air Ducts [A]
Air Cleaner Housing Mounting Bolts [B]
Air Cleaner Housing [C]
Air Cleaner Housing Installation

Apply sealant to the area [A] shown in the figure.
Sealant - General Electric: RTV100 (Black)
Do not apply sealant to the inside [C] of the duct.
Install the air ducts [B] and tighten the clamp screws.
Install the air cleaner housing [A] as shown in the figure.

Approximately 60 [B]
Inside [C]
Tighten:
Torque - Air Cleaner Housing Mounting Bolts: 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Air Cleaner Housing Dust and/or Water Inspection

Push open the drain tube [A] on the bottom of the air
cleaner housing.
FUEL SYSTEM 3-31
Fuel Filter
Fuel Filter Removal
Remove:
Clamp [A]
Fuel Hose [B]
Fuel Filter Mounting Bolts [C]
Remove:
Clamp [A]
Fuel Hose [B]
Fuel Filter [C]
Fuel Filter Installation

Install:
Fuel Filter
Fuel Hoses (see Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing section
in the Appendix chapter)
Tighten:
Torque - Fuel Filter Mounting Bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 15
ftlb)
Bleed the air from the fuel filter.

Loosen the air vent plug [A].
Pump the priming button [B] until the fuel comes out of
the air vent.
Tighten the air vent plug securely.
Torque - Air Vent Plug: 5.0 Nm (0.51 kgfm, 44 inlb)
Wipe up any spilled fuel.
Start the engine, and check for fuel leakage.
Fuel Filter Cartridge Replacement
Refer to the Fuel Filter Element Replacement in the Peri-
odic Maintenance chapter.
Water Draining
Refer to the Fuel Filter Water Draining in the Periodic
3-32 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank Removal
WARNING
Remove:
Front Seat Lower Cover Front and Rear (see Floor Cen-
ter Panel Removal in the Frame chapter)
Fuel Tank Cap [A]
Screws [B]
Front Seat Lower Cover Right [C]
For KAF950G9 GC/HA

Remove:
Clamps and Fuel Hoses [A]
Clamp and Air Vent Hose [B]
Bolt [C] and Washer
Remove:
Bolt [A], Washer and Nut
Bolt [B] and Washer
Fuel Tank [C]
For KAF950GD
Disconnect the fuel level gauge lead connector.
Remove the clamps and fuel hoses [A].
FUEL SYSTEM 3-33
Fuel Tank
Remove the clamp [A] and air vent hose [B].
Remove the bolt [A] and washer.
Remove:
Bolt [A], Washer and Nut
Bolt [B] and Washer
Fuel Tank [C]
Fuel Tank Installation

Check that the dampers [A] are in place on the fuel tank.
[B] KAF950G9, GA/HA
[C] KAF950GB
3-34 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank
Replace the nut [G] with a new one.

figure. dampers [A] in the fuel tank as shown in the
Install the
Thicker Side [B]

Front Side [C]
Collars [D]
Washers [E]
Bolts [F]
Nut
[I] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[J] KAF950GD
FUEL SYSTEM 3-35
Fuel Tank
Install
tank.
the check valve [A] so that the arrow [B] faces fuel
Black Color [C]

Blue Color [D]
Install the clamps [E].
[F] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[G] KAF950GD
Install:
Fuel Return Hose [A] and Clamp
Fuel Output Hose [B] and Clamp
Run the fuel hoses and air vent hose correctly (see Cable,
Wire, and Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter).
Fuel Tank Cleaning/Inspection
WARNING
Gasoline and low flash-point solvents can be
flammable and/or explosive and cause severe
burns. Clean the tank in a well-ventilated area, and
take care that there are no sparks or flame any-
where near the working area. Do not use gasoline
or low flash-point solvents to clean the tank.
3-36 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank
Remove the fuel tank and drain it.

Fuel Level Gauge (KAF950G9 GC/HA, see Fuel Level
Remove:
Gauge Removal)
Fittings [A], Seals [B] and Fuel Hoses [C]
Pour some high flash-point solvent into the fuel tank and
shake the tank to remove dirt and fuel deposits.
Pour the solvent out of the tank.
Dry the tank with compressed air.
Visually inspect the following items for any damage.
Fuel Tank Cap Gasket
Fuel Level Gauge Gasket (KAF950G9 GC/HA)
Seals
Replace the gaskets if they are damaged.
Push down the gasket [A] into the bottom of the fuel tank
cap [B], and insert the flange portions [C] of the gasket to
the cap threads.
Fuel Level Gauge Removal (KAF950G9 GC/HA)

WARNING
Tilt up the seat.

Check
Pry off the gauge cap [A] and discard the cap.
If the grooves
the grooves [B] in the fuel tank boss.
are damaged by removing the cap or can
not hold the cap nails, the fuel tank must be replaced.
Pull out the fuel level gauge [C].
FUEL SYSTEM 3-37
Fuel Tank
Fuel Level Gauge Installation (KAF950G9
GC/HA)
WARNING
Install the fuel level gauge so that the 1/2 scale [A] faces
the left [B] of the vehicle.
Push the new gauge cap over the gauge so that the notch
[C] aligns with the 1/2 scale.
Check that the gauge cap nails fit securely in the grooves
in the fuel tank boss.
Fuel Level Gauge Check (KAF950G9 GC/HA)
Remove the fuel level gauge from the fuel tank (see Fuel
Level Gauge Removal).
Check that the float [A] moves up and down [B] smoothly
without binding. It should go down under its own weight.
If the float does not move smoothly or has visual damage,
replace the gauge.
Fuel Level Gauge Removal (KAF950GD)

WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and can be explo-
sive under certain conditions, creating the potential
for serious burns. Make sure the area is well venti-
lated and free from any source of flame or sparks;
this includes any appliance with a pilot light. Do
not smoke. Turn the main switch off. Disconnect
the battery (-) terminal. To avoid fuel spills, draw it
from the tank when the engine is cold. Be prepared
for fuel spillage; any spilled fuel must be completely
wiped up immediately.
NOTICE
Never drop the fuel level gauge, especially on a hard
surface. Such a shock to the fuel level gauge can
damage it.
Tilt up the seat.

available
Draw the fuel out from the fuel tank with a commercially
electric pump.
3-38 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank
Remove:
Fuel Level Gauge Lead Connector [A]
Fuel Level Gauge Mounting Bolts [B]
Plate [C]
Fuel Level Gauge [D]
Discard the O-ring [A].
Fuel Level Gauge Installation (KAF950GD)

Remove dirt or dust from the fuel level gauge [A] by lightly
applying compressed air.
Replace the O-ring with a new one and install it in the
groove on the fuel tank.
Install the fuel level gauge [A] and plate [B], so that the
projections [C] fit into the recesses.
Tighten:
Torque - Fuel Level Gauge Mounting Bolts: 4.0 Nm (0.41
kgfm, 35 inlb)
COOLING SYSTEM 4-1
Cooling System
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 4-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 4-4
Flow Chart .............................................................................................................................. 4-5
Coolant ................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Coolant Level Inspection................................................................................................... 4-6
Coolant Draining ............................................................................................................... 4-6 4
Coolant Filling ................................................................................................................... 4-6
Coolant Reserve Tank Removal ....................................................................................... 4-6
Coolant Reserve Tank Installation .................................................................................... 4-7
Water Pump............................................................................................................................ 4-8
Water Pump Removal ....................................................................................................... 4-8
Water Pump Installation .................................................................................................... 4-8
Water Pump Inspection..................................................................................................... 4-9
Radiator and Radiator Fan ..................................................................................................... 4-10
Radiator Removal ............................................................................................................. 4-10
Radiator Installation .......................................................................................................... 4-11
Radiator Fan Removal ...................................................................................................... 4-11
Radiator Fan Installation ................................................................................................... 4-11
Radiator Inspection ........................................................................................................... 4-12
Radiator Cleaning ............................................................................................................. 4-12
Radiator Cap Inspection ................................................................................................... 4-12
Thermostat ............................................................................................................................. 4-13
Thermostat Removal......................................................................................................... 4-13
Thermostat Installation...................................................................................................... 4-13
Thermostat Inspection ..................................................................................................... 4-13
Hoses and Pipes .................................................................................................................... 4-14
Hose and Pipe Installation ................................................................................................ 4-14
Hose Inspection ................................................................................................................ 4-14
Radiator Fan Switch, Coolant Temperature Switch ................................................................ 4-15
Radiator Fan Switch Removal .......................................................................................... 4-15
Coolant Temperature Switch Removal.............................................................................. 4-15
Radiator Fan Switch, Coolant Temperature Switch Installation ........................................ 4-15
Radiator Fan Switch Inspection ........................................................................................ 4-15
Coolant Temperature Switch Inspection ........................................................................... 4-15
4-2 COOLING SYSTEM
Exploded View
COOLING SYSTEM 4-3
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Coolant Drain Plug 25 2.5 18 L
2 Coolant Inlet Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
3 Coolant Reserve Tank Bolt 4.4 0.45 39 inlb
4 Coolant Temperature Switch 27 2.8 20 L
5 Fan Mounting Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
6 Radiator Fan Mounting Bolts 6.0 0.61 53 inlb
7 Radiator Fan Switch 23 2.3 17
9 Radiator Mounting Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
10 Radiator Screen Mounting Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
11 Shroud Mounting Bolts 6.0 0.61 53 inlb
12 Thermostat Housing Cap Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
13 Water Pipe Mounting Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
14 Water Pump Mounting Bolts and Nuts 20 2.0 15
15. Blue Marks: Install the hoses so that their marks face upwards.
16. KAF950G9, GA/HA
G: Apply grease.
4-4 COOLING SYSTEM
Specifications
Item Standard
Coolant
Type (Recommended) Permanent type of antifreeze (soft water and ethylene glycol
plus corrosion and rust inhibitor chemicals for aluminum
engines and radiators)
Color Green
Mixed Ratio Soft water 50%, coolant 50%
Freezing Point 35C (31F)
Total Amount 4.4 L (4.7 US qt)
Radiator Cap
Relief Pressure 93 123 kPa (0.95 1.25 kgf/cm, 13 18 psi)
Thermostat
Valve Opening Temperature 81 84C (178 183F)
Valve Full Opening Temperature 95C (203F)
COOLING SYSTEM 4-5
Flow Chart
This engine has a pressurized, forced circulation cooling system.
The water pump circulates coolant through the cylinder block, cylinder head and radiator. The ther-
mostat maintains optimum engine temperature.
The thermostat is equipped with a by-pass valve which permits coolant to re-circulate through the
cylinder block and cylinder head.
As the engine warms, the by-pass valve closes as the thermostat opens, permitting complete cir-
culation through the radiator.
Always maintain a 50% solution of phosphate free antifreeze at all times for adequate heat dissipa-
tion, lubrication and protection from freezing.
1. Water Pump
2. Thermostat
3. Air Bleed Bolt
4. Reserve Tank
5. Radiator
6. Radiator Cap
7. Drain Bolts
8. Front
4-6 COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant
Coolant Level Inspection
NOTE
Check the level when the engine is cold (room of ambi-
ent temperature).
NOTICE
Do not check the level through the coolant filler by
removing the radiator cap. If the cap is removed,
the coolant will flow out from the reserve tank.

Check the coolant level in the reserve tank [A] with the
vehicle parked on a level surface.
If the coolant level is lower than the L (Low) level line [C],
remove the reserve tank cap [B], then add coolant to the
F (Full) level line [D].
NOTICE
For refilling, add the specified mixture of coolant
and soft water. Adding water alone dilutes the
coolant and degrades its anticorrosion properties.
The diluted coolant can attack the aluminum engine
parts. In an emergency, soft water can be added.
But the diluted coolant must be returned to the cor-
rect mixture ratio within a few days.
If coolant must be added often, or the reserve tank
has run completely dry; there is probably leakage
in the cooling system. Check the system for leaks.
Coolant Draining
Refer to the Coolant Change in the Periodic Maintenance
chapter.
Coolant Filling
Refer to the Coolant Change in the Periodic Maintenance
chapter.
Coolant Reserve Tank Removal
Quick Rivets [A]
Remove:

Partition [C]
COOLING SYSTEM 4-7
Coolant
Remove the coolant reserve tank mounting bolts [A].

Remove: cap and poor the coolant into a container.
Remove the
Reserve Tank Overflow Hose [B]
Radiator Overflow Hose [C]
Coolant Reserve Tank
Coolant Reserve Tank Installation

Installation is the reverse of removal, note the following.
Insert the projection [A] of the coolant reserve tank into
the grommet [B] on the font cargo compartment.
Run the hoses according to the Cable, Wire, and Hose
Routing section in the Appendix chapter.
Fill the coolant reserve tank with coolant (see Coolant
Change in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
4-8 COOLING SYSTEM
Water Pump
Water Pump Removal
Drain the coolant (see Coolant Change in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter).
Remove the fan belt cover (see Cooling Fan Belt Inspec-
tion in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Loosen the cooling fan belt (see Cooling Fan Belt Inspec-
Remove:
Fan Mounting Bolts [A]
Spacer [B]
Water Pump Pulley [C]
Fan Belt [D]
Remove the bracket bolt [A], and move the fan belt ad-
justing bracket [B] forward.
Remove:
Water Pump Hose [A]
Coolant Temperature Switch Lead Connector [B]
Water Pump Mounting Nuts [C]
Water Pump Mounting Bolts [D]
Water Pump [E] and Bracket [F]
Water Pump Installation

Replace the water pump gasket with a new one.
Install the water pump.
Torque - Water Pump Mounting Bolts and Nuts: 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Tighten:
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Adjust the fan belt deflection (see Cooling Fan Belt In-
spection in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
COOLING SYSTEM 4-9
Water Pump
Water Pump Inspection
Check the drainage outlet passage at the top [A] and bot-
tom [B] of the water pump body for coolant leakage.
If the mechanical seal is damaged, the coolant leaks
through the seal and drains through the passages. Re-
place the water pump unit.
Remove the water pump pulley [A], and check it.

If the pulley is bent or damaged, replace the pulley.
Check the water pump bearings by rotating pulley flange

[A] by hand.
Make sure pulley rotates smoothly.
If the water pump shows evidence of the bearings are
rough, replace the water pump unit.
4-10 COOLING SYSTEM
Radiator and Radiator Fan
Radiator Removal
WARNING
A spinning radiator fan can cause serious injury.
The radiator fan is connected directly to the battery
and may start even if the main switch is off. Do not
touch the radiator fan until it has been disconnected
from the battery.

Remove:
chapter)
Radiator Fan Lead Connector [A]
Remove the water hoses [A].
Turn over the rubber cover [A].

Disconnect the radiator fan switch lead connectors [B].
Remove:
Radiator Mounting Bolts [A]
Radiator with Screen [B]
NOTICE
Do not touch the radiator core. This could damage
the radiator fins, resulting in loss of cooling effi-
ciency.
COOLING SYSTEM 4-11
Radiator Installation
Install:
Dampers [A]
Washers [B]
Collars [C]
Washers [D]
Install the washers [D] so that the round side [E] faces to
the collar [C].
Tighten:
Torque - Radiator Mounting Bolts [F]: 8.8 Nm (0.90 kgfm,
78 inlb)
Connect:
Radiator Fan Switch Lead Connectors
Radiator Fan Lead Connector
Install:
Radiator Hoses [G]
Reserve Tank Hose [H]
Clamps [I]
Run the hoses according to the Cable, Wire, and Hose
Routing section in the Appendix chapter.
Radiator Fan Removal

Remove:
Radiator
Radiator Fan Mounting Bolts [A]
Radiator Fan Assembly [B]
Remove:
Shroud Mounting Bolts [A]
Shroud [B]
Radiator Fan Installation

Install the shroud [A] so that the recess [B] of the shroud
fit on the stopper [C] of the radiator.
Tighten:
Torque - Shroud Mounting Bolts: 6.0 Nm (0.61 kgfm, 53
inlb)
Install:
Radiator Fan Assembly
Radiator Fan Mounting Bolts
Tighten:
Torque - Radiator Fan Mounting Bolts: 6.0 Nm (0.61 kgfm,
53 inlb)
4-12 COOLING SYSTEM
Radiator Inspection
Check the radiator core.
If there are obstructions to air flow, remove them.
If the corrugated fins [A] are deformed, carefully
straighten them.
If the air passages of the radiator core are blocked more
than 20% by unremovable obstructions or irreparable de-
formed fins, replace the radiator.
Radiator Cleaning
Refer to the Radiator Cleaning in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
Radiator Cap Inspection
Check the condition of the radiator cap valve seals [A] and
valve spring [B].
If any one of them shows visible damage, replace the cap
with a new one.
Install the cap [A] on a cooling system pressure tester [B].

NOTE
Wet the cap sealing surfaces with water or coolant to
prevent pressure leakage.
Watching the pressure gauge, slowly pump the pressure

tester to build up the pressure. The gauge pointer must
remain within the relief pressure range in the table below
at least 6 seconds. Continue to pump the tester until the
relief valve opens, indicated by the gauge pointer flicking
downward. The relief valve must open within the specified
range.
Radiator Cap Relief Pressure
Standard: 93 123 kPa (0.95 1.25 kgf/cm, 13
18 psi)
If the cap cannot hold the specified pressure, or if it holds
too much pressure, replace the cap.
COOLING SYSTEM 4-13
Thermostat
Thermostat Removal
Remove:
Coolant Temperature Switch Lead Connector [A]
Thermostat Housing Cap Bolts [B]
Thermostat Housing Cap [C]
Remove:
Locating Screw [A]
Thermostat [B]
Thermostat Installation
Replace the thermostat housing gasket with a new one.
Install the locating screw.
Tighten:
Torque - Thermostat Housing Cap Bolts: 7.8 Nm (0.80
kgfm, 69 inlb)
Adjust the coolant (see Coolant Change in the Periodic
Thermostat Inspection
Remove the thermostat, and inspect the thermostat valve
[A] at room temperature.
If the valve is open, replace the thermostat with a new
one.
To check valve opening temperature, suspend the ther-

mostat [A] in a container of water and raise the tempera-
ture of the water.
The thermostat must be completely submerged and must
not touch the container sides or bottom. Suspend an ac-
curate thermometer [B] in the water. It must not touch the
container, either.
If the measurement is out of the specified range, replace
the thermostat with a new one.
Thermostat Valve Opening Temperature
Standard: 81 84C (178 183F)
Thermostat Valve Full Opening Temperature

Standard: 95C (203F)
4-14 COOLING SYSTEM
Hoses and Pipes
Hose and Pipe Installation
Install the hoses and pipes being careful to follow bend-
ing direction or diameter. Avoid sharp bending, kinking,
flattening, or twisting.
Install the clamps [A] as near as possible to the hose end
to clear the raised rib or the fitting. This will prevent the
hoses from working loose.
The clamp screws should be positioned correctly to pre-
vent the clamps from contacting anything.
Install the water pipes [A].

Tighten:
Torque - Water Pipe Mounting Bolts [B]: 8.8 Nm (0.90
kgfm, 78 inlb)
Hose Inspection
Refer to the Radiator Hose and Connection Inspection in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
COOLING SYSTEM 4-15
Radiator Fan Switch, Coolant Temperature Switch
Radiator Fan Switch Removal
NOTICE
The fan switch or the coolant temperature switch
should never be allowed to fall on a hard surface.
Such a shock to their parts can damage them.

Remove the front cover (see Front Cover Removal in the
Frame chapter).
Turn over the rubber cover [A].
Radiator Fan Switch Lead Connectors [B]
Remove:
Radiator Fan Switch [C]
Coolant Temperature Switch Removal

Coolant Temperature Switch Lead Connector [A]
Remove:
Coolant Temperature Switch [B]
Radiator Fan Switch, Coolant Temperature Switch

Installation
Apply grease to the O-ring on the fan switch.
the coolant
Apply a non-permanent locking agent to the threads of
temperature switch.
Tighten the fan switch and coolant temperature switch.
Torque - Radiator Fan Switch: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18 ftlb)
Coolant Temperature Switch: 27 Nm (2.8 kgfm,
20 ftlb)
Radiator Fan Switch Inspection

Refer to the Radiator Fan Switch Inspection in the Elec-
trical System chapter.
Coolant Temperature Switch Inspection
Refer to the Coolant Temperature Switch Inspection in the
Electrical System chapter.
ENGINE TOP END 5-1
Engine Top End

Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 5-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 5-5
Cylinder Head......................................................................................................................... 5-7
Cylinder Compression Measurement................................................................................ 5-7
Cylinder Head Removal .................................................................................................... 5-7
Cylinder Head Installation ................................................................................................. 5-8
Cylinder Head Warp..........................................................................................................
Rocker Shaft and Rocker Arm................................................................................................
5-9
5-10
5
Rocker Arm Components Removal .................................................................................. 5-10
Rocker Arm Components Installation ............................................................................... 5-10
Rocker Arm Components Disassembly ............................................................................ 5-11
Rocker Arm Components Assembly ................................................................................. 5-11
Rocker Arm/Shaft Wear .................................................................................................... 5-11
Valve Lifters ............................................................................................................................ 5-13
Valve Lifter Removal ......................................................................................................... 5-13
Valve Lifter Installation ...................................................................................................... 5-13
Valve Lifter Inspection....................................................................................................... 5-13
Valves ..................................................................................................................................... 5-14
Valve Clearance Inspection .............................................................................................. 5-14
Valve Clearance Adjustment............................................................................................. 5-14
Valve Removal .................................................................................................................. 5-14
Valve Installation ............................................................................................................... 5-14
Valve Guide Removal ....................................................................................................... 5-15
Valve Guide Installation .................................................................................................... 5-15
Valve Seat Inspection ....................................................................................................... 5-15
Valve Seat Repair ............................................................................................................. 5-16
Valve Spring Free Length ................................................................................................. 5-21
Valve Head Thickness ...................................................................................................... 5-21
Valve Stem Diameter ........................................................................................................ 5-21
Valve Guide Inspection ..................................................................................................... 5-21
Measuring Valve/Guide Clearance ................................................................................... 5-22
Valve Stem Cap Inspection............................................................................................... 5-22
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler ....................................................................................................... 5-23
Exhaust Pipe Removal...................................................................................................... 5-23
Muffler Removal................................................................................................................ 5-23
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Installation................................................................................ 5-24
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Inspection ................................................................................ 5-24
Spark Arrester Cleaning.................................................................................................... 5-24
5-2 ENGINE TOP END
Exploded View
ENGINE TOP END 5-3
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Cylinder Head Bolts 34 3.5 25 EO, S
2 Cylinder Head Cover Nuts 5.4 0.55 48 inlb
3 Exhaust Manifold Mounting Nuts 20 2.0 15
4 Inlet Manifold Mounting Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
5 Inlet Manifold Mounting Nuts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
6 Rocker Arm Components Mounting Nuts 20 2.0 15
7 Valve Adjusting Screw Locknuts 11 1.1 97 inlb
8 Muffler Mounting Bolts 20 2.0 15 L
M: Apply molybdenum disulfide grease.
5-4 ENGINE TOP END
Specifications

Cylinder Head
Cylinder Compression 3 330 kPa (34.0 kgf/cm, 2 990 kPa (30.5 kgf/cm,
483 psi) at 300 r/min (rpm) 434 psi) at 300 r/min
(rpm)
Cylinder Head Warp 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
Rocker Shaft and Rocker Arm
Rocker Arm Inside Diameter 10.00 10.02 mm 10.03 mm (0.3949 in.)
(0.3937 0.3945 in.)
Rocker Shaft Diameter 9.97 9.99 mm 9.957 mm (0.3920 in.)
(0.3925 0.3933 in.)
Valve Lifters
Valve Lifter Outside Diameter 17.98 mm (0.7079 in.) 17.91 mm (0.7051 in.)
Valves
Valve Clearance 0.20 mm (0.0079 in.)
Valve Seating Surface:
Width: 0.8 1.2 mm (0.0315 0.0472 in.)
Outside Diameter:
Inlet 28 mm (1.1024 in.)
Exhaust 24.5 mm (0.9646 in.)
Valve Seat Cutting Angle 32, 45, 60
Valve Spring Free Length 30.7 mm (1.2087 in.) 29.7 mm (1.1693 in.)
Valve Head Thickness 1.2 mm (0.0472 in.) 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
Valve Stem Diameter:
Inlet 5.945 5.960 mm 5.903 mm (0.2324 in.)
(0.2341 0.2346 in.)
Exhaust 5.965 5.980 mm 5.923 mm (0.2332 in.)
(0.2348 0.2354 in.)
Valve Guide Inside Diameter 6.000 6.015 mm 6.036 mm (0.2376 in.)
(0.2362 0.2368 in.)
Valve Guide Outside Diameter:
Standard Valve Guide 11.05 mm (0.4350 in.)
Replacement Valve Guide 11.08 mm (0.4362 in.)
Valve/Guide Clearance:
Inlet 0.055 0.070 mm 0.090 mm (0.0035 in.)
(0.0022 0.0028 in.)
Exhaust 0.035 0.050 mm 0.094 mm (0.0037 in.)
(0.0014 0.0020 in.)
ENGINE TOP END 5-5
Special Tools
Outside Circlip Pliers: Valve Seat Cutter, 60 - 30:
57001-144 57001-1123
Valve Guide Arbor, 5.5: Valve Seat Cutter Holder, 5.5:

57001-1021 57001-1125
Valve Seat Cutter, 45 - 27.5: Valve Seat Cutter Holder Bar:

57001-1114 57001-1128
Valve Seat Cutter, 32 - 28: Compression Gauge Adapter:

57001-1119 57001-1431
Valve Seat Cutter, 30 - 30: Valve Guide Driver:

57001-1120 57001-1432
5-6 ENGINE TOP END
Special Tools
Valve Spring Compressor:
57001-1433
ENGINE TOP END 5-7
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Compression Measurement
Thoroughly warm up the engine so that the engine oil be-
tween the piston and the cylinder wall will help seal com-
pression as it does during normal running.
Stop the engine, remove the glow plugs, and attach a
compression gauge [A] firmly into the one glow plug hole.
Special Tool - Compression Gauge Adapter [B]: 57001
-1431
Wrap a tape around the glow plug lead (black/white) end
to insulate.
Disconnect the fuel cut solenoid lead connector [C].
Using the starter motor, turn the engine over until the com-
pression gauge stops rising; this is the highest compres-
sion reading obtainable.
Cylinder Compression
Standard: 3 330 kPa (34.0 kgf/cm, 483 psi)
at 300 r/min (rpm)
Service Limit: 2 990 kPa (30.5 kgf/cm, 434 psi)
at 300 r/min (rpm)
Repeat the measurement for the other cylinders.

The following table should be consulted if the obtainable compression reading is not within the spe-
cific range.
Problem Diagnosis Remedy (Action)
Cylinder compression is Carbon accumulation on piston Remove the carbon deposits and
higher than standard. and cylinder head, and in replace damaged parts.
combustion chamber possibly
due to damaged valve stem oil
seal and/or damaged piston oil
rings.
Incorrect cylinder head gasket Replace with a gasket of the proper
thickness thickness.
Cylinder compression is lower Gas leakage around cylinder Replace damaged gasket and
than service limit. head check cylinder head warp.
Bad condition of valve seating Repair if possible.
Incorrect valve, piston/cylinder Adjust
clearance
Piston seizure Inspect the cylinder and liner and
replace/repair as necessary.
Bad condition of piston ring Replace
and/or piston ring grooves.
Cylinder Head Removal
Remove:
Water Pump (see Water Pump Removal)
Fuel Injection Pipes (see Fuel Injection Pipe Removal in
the Fuel System chapter)
Exhaust Pipe (see Exhaust Pipe Removal)
Rocker Arm Components (see Rocker Arm Components
Removal)
5-8 ENGINE TOP END
Cylinder Head
Remove:
Bolts [A] and Nuts
Engine Mount Stay [B]
Bolts [C]
Oil Level Gauge Pipe [D]
Bolts [E]
Plate [F]
Remove:
Glow Plug Caps [A]
Glow Plug Lead [B]
Glow Plug Connecting Plate [C]
Rocker Arm Push Rods [D]
Valve Stem Caps [E]
Mark the push rods so that they may be installed in their
original positions.
Remove the coolant from the cylinder head, using a

syringe [A] or some other suitable device, through the
coolant inlet opening [B].
Insert the gauge tube [C] 10 11 cm (3.9 4.3 in.) from
the opening.
the handle slowly to pump out the coolant until the
Pull
coolant no longer comes out.
Remove the cylinder head bolts following loosening se-

quence [1 14].
Remove:
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Gasket
Cylinder Head Installation

Clean the mating surface of the cylinder head and the
cylinder.
Replace the cylinder head gasket [A] with a new one.
Install the dowel pins [B].
ENGINE TOP END 5-9
Cylinder Head
Apply engine oil to the cylinder head bolts.

Tighten the cylinder head bolts in the order shown.
Torque - Cylinder Head Bolts: 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25 ftlb)
Apply engine oil and install the rocker arm push rods [A]
(in original locations if reused).
Face the recessed end [B] upward.
Install:
Valve Stem Caps
Installation)
Inspect the valve clearance (see Valve Clearance Inspec-
Cylinder Head Warp
Clean the cylinder head.
Lay a straightedge [A] across the lower surface, inlet and
exhaust manifold mounting surface of the head at several
different points, and measure warp by inserting a thick-
ness gauge [B] between the straightedge and the head.
If warp exceeds the service limit, repair the mating sur-
face. Replace the cylinder head if the mating surface is
badly damaged.
Cylinder Head Warp
5-10 ENGINE TOP END
Rocker Arm Components Removal
Remove:
Breather Hose [A]
Cylinder Head Cover Bolts [B] and Washers [C]
Cylinder Head Cover [D]
Turn the crankshaft pulley [A] clockwise so that the timing

mark [B] on the pulley aligns with the reference point [C]
on the timing cover.
Check that the rocker arms at #1 cylinder are free.
If not, turn the pulley one more turn to free the rocker
arms.
Remove:
Rocker Arm Components Mounting Nuts [A] and Wash-
ers [B]
Rocker Arm Components [C]
Rocker Arm Components Installation

Install the rocker arm components.
Torque - Rocker Arm Components Mounting Nuts: 20 Nm
(2.0 kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Inspect the valve clearance (see Valve Clearance Inspec-
Tighten:
Torque - Cylinder Head Cover Nuts: 5.4 Nm (0.55 kgfm, 48
inlb)
Install the breather hose [A].

Twist the breather hose so that the white marks [B] face
upward and the center part is higher than both ends.
ENGINE TOP END 5-11
Rocker Arm Components Disassembly
Remove:
Removal)
Circlips [A]
Special Tool - Outside Circlip Pliers [B]: 57001-144
Remove:
Rocker Arms [A]
Rocker Arm Supports [B]
Washers [C]
Springs [D]
Set Bolt [E]
Rocker Shaft [F]
Rocker Arm Components Assembly

Apply engine oil to the all components.
Small grooves next to oil holes [A] in the rocker shaft [B]
must face down.
Install the center rocker arm support [C] as shown in the
figure, and tighten the set bolt.
Left Lower Oil Hole [D]
Install:
Rocker Arms [A]
Springs [B]
Rocker Arm Supports [C]
Washers [D]
New Circlips [E]
Special Tool - Outside Circlip Pliers: 57001-144
Rocker Arm/Shaft Wear

Measure the inside diameter [A] of the rocker arm.
If the bearing has worn past the service limit, replace the
rocker arm.
Rocker Arm Inside Diameter
Standard: 10.00 10.02 mm (0.3937 0.3945 in.)
5-12 ENGINE TOP END
Measure the diameter [A] of the rocker shaft.

If the shaft has worn past the service limit, replace the
rocker shaft.
Rocker Shaft Diameter
Standard: 9.97 9.99 mm (0.3925 0.3933 in.)
ENGINE TOP END 5-13
Valve Lifters
Valve Lifter Removal
Remove:
Cylinder Head (see Cylinder Head Removal)
Valve Lifters [A]
Mark and record the valve lifter locations so that they can
be installed in their original positions.
Valve Lifter Installation

Apply
tions).
engine oil and install the valve lifters (original posi-
Valve Lifter Inspection

Measure the outside diameter of the valve lifters [A].
If the valve lifter has worn past the service limit, replace
the lifter.
Valve Lifter Outside Diameter
Standard: 17.98 mm (0.7079 in.)
5-14 ENGINE TOP END
Valves
Valve Clearance Inspection
Refer to the Valve Clearance Inspection in the Periodic
Valve Clearance Adjustment
Refer to the Valve Clearance Adjustment in the Periodic
Valve Removal
Remove:
Cylinder Head (see Cylinder Head Removal)
Valve Stem Cap
Mark and record the valve stem cap locations so they can
be installed in their original positions.
Using the valve spring compressor [A] remove the split
keepers.
Special Tool - Valve Spring Compressor: 57001-1433
Remove:
Retainer [A]
Valve Spring [B]
Remove:
Valve [A]
Spring Seat [B]
Oil Seal [C]
Valve Installation
Replace the oil seal [A] with a new one.
Apply a thin coat
Apply engine oil to the new oil seal.
valve stem beforeofvalve
molybdenum disulfide grease to the
installation.
Install:
Oil Seal
Valve [B]
Spring Seat [C]
Valve Spring [D]
Retainer [E]
Split Keepers [F]
ENGINE TOP END 5-15
Valves
Valve Guide Removal
Remove:
Valve (see Valve Removal)
Spring Seat
Oil Seal
Hammer lightly on the valve guide arbor [A] to remove the
guide from the top of the head.
Special Tool - Valve Guide Arbor, 5.5: 57001-1021
Valve Guide Installation

Apply engine oil to the valve guide outer surface before
installation.
Press the valve guide [A] in from the top of the head us-
ing the valve guide driver [B] until the driver bottoms on
cylinder head.
Special Tool - Valve Guide Driver: 57001-1432
Valve Seat Inspection

Remove the valve (see Valve Removal).
Coat the valve seat with machinists dye.
Rotatethethevalve
Push into the guide.
Pull the valve out,against
valve the seat with a lapping tool.
valve head. It must be the correct
and check the seating pattern on the
width [A] and even all
the way around.
NOTE
The valve stem and guide must be in good condition, or
this check will not be valid.
If the valve seating pattern is not correct, repair the seat.
Measure the outside diameter [B] of the seating pattern
on the valve seat.
If the outside diameter of the valve seating pattern is too
large or too small, repair the seat.
Valve Seating Surface [C] Too Wide [G]
Valve [D] Too Narrow [H]
Valve Seat [E] Uneven [I]
Good [F]
Valve Seating Surface Width

Standard: 0.8 1.2 mm (0.0315 0.0472 in.)
Valve Seating Surface Outside Diameter

Inlet: 28 mm (1.1024 in.)
Exhaust: 24.5 mm (0.9646 in.)
5-16 ENGINE TOP END
Valves
Valve Seat Repair
Follow the manufacturers instructions for use of valve
seat cutters.
Special Tools - Valve Seat Cutter Holder, 5.5: 57001-1125
Valve Seat Cutter Holder Bar: 57001-1128
[For Inlet Valve Seat]
Valve Seat Cutter, 45 - 27.5: 57001-1114
Valve Seat Cutter, 60 - 30: 57001-1123
[For Exhaust Valve Seat]
If the manufacturers instructions are not available, use
the following procedure.
Seat Cutter Operation Care
1. This valve seat cutter is developed to grind the valve for
repair. Therefore the cutter must not be used for other
purposes than seat repair.
2. Do not drop or shock the valve seat cutter, or the dia-
mond particles may fall off.
3. Do not fail to apply engine oil to the valve seat cutter
before grinding the seat surface. Also wash off ground
particles sticking to the cutter with washing oil.
NOTE
Do not use a wire brush to remove the metal particles
from the cutter. It will take off the diamond particles.
4. Setting the valve seat cutter holder in position, operate
the cutter in one hand. Do not apply too much force to
the diamond portion.
NOTE
Prior to grinding, apply engine oil to the cutter and dur-
ing the operation, wash off any ground particles sticking
to the cutter with washing oil.
5. After use, wash it with washing oil and apply thin layer
of engine oil before storing.
Marks Stamped on the Cutter
The marks stamped on the back of the cutter [A] represent
the following.
60 ........................... Cutter angle [B]
37.5 ....................... Outer diameter of cutter [C]
ENGINE TOP END 5-17
Valves
Operating Procedures
Clean the seat area carefully.
Coat the seat with machinists dye.
Fit a 45 cutter into the holder and slide it into the valve
guide.
Press down lightly on the handle and turn it right or left.
Grind the seating surface only until it is smooth.
NOTICE
Do not grind the seat too much. Overgrinding will
reduce valve clearance by sinking the valve into the
head. If the valve sinks too far into the head, it will
be impossible to adjust the clearance, and the cylin-
der head must be replaced.
Measure the outside diameter of the seating surface with

a vernier caliper.
If the outside diameter of the seating surface is too small,
repeat the 45 grind until the diameter is within the spec-
ified range.
Widened Width [A] of engagement by machining with
45 cutter
Ground Volume [B] by 32 cutter
32 [C]
Correct Width [D]
Ground Volume [E] by 60 cutter
60 [F]
Measure the outside diameter of the seating surface with

a vernier caliper.
If the outside diameter of the seating surface is too small,
repeat the 45 grind [A] until the diameter is within the
specified range.
Original Seating Surface [B]
NOTE
Remove all pittings of flaws from 45 ground surface.
After grinding with 45 cutter, apply thin coat of machin-
ists dye to seating surface. This makes seating surface
distinct and 32 and 60 grinding operation easier.
When the valve guide is replaced, be sure to grind with
45 cutter for centering and good contact.
5-18 ENGINE TOP END
Valves
If the outside diameter [A] of the seating surface is too
large, make the 32 grind described below.
If the outside diameter of the seating surface is within the
specified range, measure the seat width as described be-
low.
Grind the seat at a 32 angle [B] until the seat outside
diameter is within the specified range.
To make the 32 grind, fit a 32 cutter into the holder, and
slide it into the valve guide.
Turn the holder one turn at a time while pressing down
very lightly. Check the seat after each turn.
NOTICE
The 32 cutter removes material very quickly.
Check the seat outside diameter frequently to pre-
vent overgrinding.
After making the 32 grind, return to the seat outside di-
ameter measurement step above.
To measure the seat width, use a vernier caliper to mea-
sure the width of the 45 angle portion of the seat at sev-
eral places around the seat.
If the seat width is too narrow, repeat the 45 grind until
the seat is slightly too wide, and then return to the seat
outside diameter measurement step above.
If the seat width is too wide, make the 60 [A] grind de-
scribed below.
If the seat width is within the specified range, lap the valve
to the seat as described below.
Grind the seat at a 60 angle until the seat width is within
the specified range.
To make the 60 grind, fit 60 cutter into the holder, and
slide it into the valve guide.
Turn the holder, while pressing down lightly.
After making the 60 grind, return to the seat width mea-
surement step above.
Correct Width [B]
ENGINE TOP END 5-19
Valves
Lap the valve to the seat, once the seat width and outside
diameter are within the ranges specified above.
Put a little coarse grinding compound on the face of the
valve in a number of places around the valve head.
Spin the valve against the seat until the grinding com-
pound produces a smooth, matched surface on both the
seat and the valve.
Repeat the process with a fine grinding compound.
Lapper [A]
Valve Seat [B]
Valve [C]
The seating area should be marked about in the middle
of the valve face.
If the seat area is not in the right place on the valve, check
to be sure the valve is the correct part. If it is, it may have
been refaced too much; replace it.
Be sure to remove all grinding compound before assem-
bly.
When the engine is assembled, be sure to adjust the valve
clearance (see Valve Clearance Inspection in the Periodic
5-20 ENGINE TOP END
Valves
ENGINE TOP END 5-21
Valves
Valve Spring Free Length
Measure the valve spring free length.
If the free length is less than the service limit, replace the
valve spring [A] with a new one.
Valve Spring Free Length
Valve Head Thickness

Measure the thickness [A] of the valve head.
If the valve head thickness is less than the service limit,
replace the valve with a new one.
Valve Head Thickness
Valve Stem Diameter

Measure the diameter of the valve stem at specified dis-
tance from end of the valve [A] as shown in the figure.
35 mm (1.38 in.) [B]
If any single measurement is less than the service limit,
replace the valve with a new one.
Valve Stem Diameter
Standard:
Inlet 5.945 5.960 mm (0.2341 0.2346 in.)
Exhaust 5.965 5.980 mm (0.2348 0.2354 in.)
Service Limit:
Inlet 5.903 mm (0.2324 in.)
Exhaust 5.923 mm (0.2332 in.)
Valve Guide Inspection

Measure the inside diameter of the valve guide.
If the valve guide has worn past the service limit, replace
the valve guide or cylinder head.
Valve Guide Inside Diameter
Standard: 6.000 6.015 mm (0.2362 0.2368 in.)
Measure the outside diameter of the valve guide re-
moved.
If the diameter is 11.05 mm (0.4350 in.), replace it with a
replacement valve guide.
If the diameter is 11.08 mm (0.4362 in.), it is a replace-
ment valve guide. Replace the cylinder head.
Valve Guide Outside Diameter
Standard Valve Guide: 11.05 mm (0.4350 in.)
Replacement Valve Guide: 11.08 mm (0.4362 in.)
5-22 ENGINE TOP END
Valves
Measuring Valve/Guide Clearance
Subtract the valve stem diameter from the valve guide
inside diameter to get the valve/valve guide clearance.
Valve/Guide Clearance
Standard:
Inlet 0.055 0.070 mm (0.0022 0.0028 in.)
Exhaust 0.035 0.050 mm (0.0014 0.0020 in.)
Service Limit:
Inlet 0.090 mm (0.0035 in.)
Exhaust 0.094 mm (0.0037 in.)
Valve Stem Cap Inspection

Visually inspect the valve stem cap [A] for wear.
If the cap is worn, replace it.
ENGINE TOP END 5-23
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
Exhaust Pipe Removal
Remove:
Bolts [A] and Washers
Exhaust Pipe Cover [B]
Remove the exhaust pipe holder nuts [A].
Remove:
Joint Bolts and Nuts [A]
Exhaust Pipe [B]
Muffler Removal
Remove the joint bolts and nuts [A].
Remove:
Muffler Mounting Bolts [A] and washers
Muffler [B]
5-24 ENGINE TOP END
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Installation
Tighten:
Torque - Muffler Mounting Bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 15 ftlb)
the muffler mounting bolts.
Replace the exhaust pipe gasket and muffler connecting
gasket with new ones.
After installation, thoroughly warm up the engine, wait un-
til the engine cools down, retighten all the bolts and nuts.
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Inspection
Before removing, check for signs of leakage at the ex-
haust pipe gasket in the cylinder head and at the muffler
joint.
If there are signs of leakage around the exhaust pipe gas-
ket, it should be replaced. If the muffler-to-exhaust pipe
joint leaks, tighten the joint bolts.
Check the exhaust pipe and muffler for dents, cracks, rust
and holes.
If the exhaust pipe or muffler is damaged, it should be
replaced for best performance and least noise.
Spark Arrester Cleaning
Refer to the Spark Arrester Cleaning in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
CONVERTER SYSTEM 6-1
Converter System
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 6-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-6
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 6-7
Air Cleaner.............................................................................................................................. 6-8
Air Cleaner Housing Removal........................................................................................... 6-8
Air Cleaner Housing Installation........................................................................................ 6-9
Air Cleaner Element Removal........................................................................................... 6-9
Air Cleaner Element Cleaning/Inspection ......................................................................... 6-10
Torque Converter.................................................................................................................... 6-11
Torque Converter Outer Cover Removal .......................................................................... 6-11
Torque Converter Outer Cover Installation ....................................................................... 6-11
6
Torque Converter Inner Cover Removal ........................................................................... 6-11
Torque Converter Inner Cover Installation ........................................................................ 6-12
Torque Converter Case Removal...................................................................................... 6-12
Torque Converter Case Installation................................................................................... 6-13
Torque Converter Case Disassembly ............................................................................... 6-14
Torque Converter Case Assembly .................................................................................... 6-14
Drive Belt ................................................................................................................................ 6-15
Drive Belt Removal ........................................................................................................... 6-15
Drive Belt Installation ........................................................................................................ 6-15
Drive Belt Inspection ......................................................................................................... 6-15
Drive Belt Deflection Inspection ........................................................................................ 6-15
Drive Belt Deflection Adjustment ...................................................................................... 6-15
Drive Pulley ............................................................................................................................ 6-16
Drive Pulley Removal........................................................................................................ 6-16
Drive Pulley Disassembly ................................................................................................. 6-16
Drive Pulley Inspection ..................................................................................................... 6-17
Spider Shoe Side Clearance Adjustment.......................................................................... 6-19
Drive Pulley Assembly ...................................................................................................... 6-21
Bushing Installation........................................................................................................... 6-22
Drive Pulley Installation..................................................................................................... 6-22
Driven Pulley .......................................................................................................................... 6-24
Driven Pulley Removal...................................................................................................... 6-24
Driven Pulley Disassembly ............................................................................................... 6-24
Driven Pulley Inspection ................................................................................................... 6-25
Converter Driven Pulley Shoe Inspection ......................................................................... 6-26
Driven Pulley Assembly .................................................................................................... 6-27
Driven Pulley Installation................................................................................................... 6-28
6-2 CONVERTER SYSTEM
Exploded View
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
3 Converter Cover Bolts 4.4 0.45 39 inlb
4 Drive Pulley Bolt 93 9.5 69
5 Drive Pulley Cover Bolts 13 1.3 115 inlb
6 Fan Cover Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
7 Inner Cover Bolts 4.4 0.45 39 inlb
8 Ramp Weight Nuts 6.9 0.70 61 inlb R
9 Spider 275 28.0 203
10. KAF950G9 and GA/HA Early Models
Exploded View
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Converter Case Bolts (L = 55 mm) 27 2.8 20 L
2 Converter Case Bolts (L = 28 mm) 20 2.0 15 L
3 Driven Pulley Bolt 93 9.5 69 L
4 Inner Cover Nut 8.8 0.90 78 inlb R
5 Wear Shoe Mounting Screws 1.1 0.11 10 inlb L
G: Apply grease.
TO: Apply transmission oil.
Specifications

Drive Belt
Belt Width 34.1 mm (1.34 in.) 32.6 mm (1.28 in.)
Belt Deflection 28 36 mm (1.10 1.42 in.)
Drive Pulley
Cover Bushing Inside Diameter 27.655 27.955 mm (1.089 1.101 in.) 27.99 mm (1.102 in.)
Sheave Bushing Inside Diameter 38.055 38.155 mm (1.498 1.502 in.) 38.19 mm (1.504 in.)
Ramp Weight Bushing Inside
7.000 7.091 mm (0.276 0.280 in.) 7.23 mm (0.28 in.)
Diameter
Spring Free Length 77 mm (3.03 in.)
Shoe Side Clearance 0.05 0.20 mm (0.0020 0.0079 in.)
Driven Pulley
Movable Sheave Bushing Inside 39.655 39.965 mm (1.561 1.573 in.) 40 mm (1.57 in.)
Diameter
Wear Shoe Width 16.4 mm (0.65 in.)
Spring Free Length 137.5 mm (5.41 in.)
Special Tools
Outside Circlip Pliers: Drive & Driven Pulley Holder:
57001-144 57001-1473
Bearing Driver Set: Drive Pulley Holder:

57001-1129 57001-1548
Drive & Driven Pulley Holder: Drive Pulley Wrench:

57001-1412 57001-1549
Drive Pulley Puller Bolt: Flywheel & Pulley Holder:

57001-1429 57001-1605
Driven Pulley Holder:

57001-1465
Air Cleaner
Air Cleaner Housing Removal
Loosen:
Clamps [A]
Air Ducts [B]
Remove:
[C] KAF950G9 and KAF950GA/HA early models

[D] KAF950GA/HA late models and KAF950GB
NOTICE
If dirt gets into the torque converter, excessive wear
and loss of driving power may result.
Remove:
Air Cleaner Housing Bolts [A], Washers and Nuts
Air Cleaner Housing [B]
[C] KAF950G9 and KAF950GA/HA early models
[D] KAF950GA/HA late models and KAF950GB
After removing the housing, stuff pieces of lint-free, clean

cloth into the torque converter cover duct to keep dirt out
of the torque converter.
NOTICE
Air Cleaner
Air Cleaner Housing Installation
Install:
Air Cleaner Housing [A]
Bracket Bolt [B]
Washer [C]
Damper [D] (The shorter side faces lower side.)
Collar [E]
Nut [F]
For KAF950G9 and KAF950GA/HA Early Models
Tighten:
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
For KAF950GA/HA Late Models and KAF950GB
Tighten:
kgfm, 12 ftlb)
Install the clamps [A] at about 3mm (0.12 in.) [B] from the
end of air ducts.
Install the clamp [C] into the bare position from the end of
air duct.
Air Cleaner Element Removal

For KAF950G9 and KAF950GA/HA Early Models
Remove:
Wingbolts [A]
Cap [B]
Air Cleaner
For KAF950GA/HA Late Models and KAF950GB
Remove:
Clamps [A]
Cap [B]
Remove the air cleaner element [A].

cloth into the airthecleaner
After removing element, stuff pieces of lint-free, clean
duct to keep dirt out of the torque
converter.
NOTICE
Air Cleaner Element Cleaning/Inspection

Refer to the Converter Air Cleaner Element Cleaning/In-
spection in the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Torque Converter
Torque Converter Outer Cover Removal
Lift up the cargo easy to work.
Remove:
Converter Air Cleaner Housing (see Air Cleaner Housing
Removal)
Left Rear Wheel (see Wheel Removal in the
Wheels/Tires chapter)
Flap Stay (see Flap and Flap Stay Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Left Rear Shock Absorber (see Rear Shock Absorber
Removal in the Suspension chapter)
Screws [A]
Cover [B]
Remove:
Converter Cover Bolts [A] and Collars
Torque Converter Outer Cover [B]
Torque Converter Outer Cover Installation

Install the outer cover [A] as shown in the figure.
First, insert the rear side [B] of the outer cover in the
frame.
Install the collars and converter cover bolts.
Tighten:
Torque - Converter Cover Bolts: 4.4 Nm (0.45 kgfm, 39
inlb)
Torque Converter Inner Cover Removal

Remove:
Exhaust Pipe (see Exhaust Pipe Removal in the Engine
Top End chapter)
Torque Converter Outer Cover (see Torque Converter
Outer Cover Removal)
Drive Pulley (see Drive Pulley Removal)
Loosen the clamp [A] and separate the air duct [B] from
the cover.
Torque Converter
Remove:
Inner Cover Bolts [A] and Collars
Clamps [B]
Nut [C]
Avoid
ward.
the bracket [A] and remove the inner cover [B] up-
Torque Converter Inner Cover Installation

Replace the nut [E] with a new one.
Install:
Inner Cover [A]
Clamps [B]
Inner Cover Bolts (L = 30 mm (1.18 in.)) [C]
Inner Cover Bolt (L = 35 mm (1.38 in.)) [D]
Nut
Collars [F]
When installing the trim, add the glue to the place be-
tween bolt hole and bolt hole.
Tighten:
Torque - Inner Cover Bolts: 4.4 Nm (0.45 kgfm, 39 inlb)
Inner Cover Nut: 8.8 Nm (0.90 kgfm, 78 inlb)
Install the drive pulley (see Drive Pulley Installation).
Torque Converter Case Removal

Remove:
Driven Pulley (see Driven Pulley Removal)
Damper Bracket Nuts [A] (Loosen)
Torque Converter
Hold the left part of the rear axle bracket with a jack [A].
Leaf Spring Mounting Nuts [B]
Remove:
Leaf Spring Rods [C]
Loosen the clamp [A] and remove the air duct [B] from the
torque converter case.
Remove:
Converter Case Bolts [A]
Converter Case Nut [B] and Washer
Torque Converter Case [C]
Place an oil pan beneath the drive shaft of the transmis-

sion case.
Avoid the brake hose bracket [A] and remove the torque
converter case [B] while pushing down the leaf spring rear
end.
Torque Converter Case Installation

Be sure to install the following on the drive shaft and trans-
mission case.
Collar [A]
O-ring [B]
Confirm the engine and transmission case position (see
Engine Installation in the Engine Removal/Installation
chapter).
Torque Converter
Replace the nut [B] with a new one.

Torque Converter Case [A]
Install:
Nut and Washer [C]

Apply a non-permanent locking agent to the following
bolts and install them.
Converter Case Bolts (L = 55 mm (2.17 in.)) [D]
Converter Case Bolts (L = 28 mm (1.10 in.)) [E]
Tighten:
Torque - Converter Case Bolts (L = 55 mm): 27 Nm (2.8
kgfm, 20 ftlb)
Converter Case Bolts (L = 28 mm): 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Tighten the damper bracket nuts in the order as shown in

the figure.
Front [A]
Outside [B]
Torque - Damper Bracket Nuts:
First: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Second: 44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Final: 59 Nm (6.0 kgfm, 44 ftlb)
Torque Converter Case Disassembly
Remove:
Torque Converter Case [A] (see Torque Converter Case
Removal)
Oil Seal [B]
Ball Bearing [C]
Trims [D] (if necessary)
Torque Converter Case Assembly

Apply transmission oil to the ball bearing.
Press the ball bearing [A] until it is bottomed.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129
Apply grease to the oil seal lip.
is flush [C]oilwith
Press the seal [B] in the case so that the oil seal surface
the case end.
When installing the trim, add the glue to the place be-
tween bolt hole and bolt hole.
Drive Belt
Drive Belt Removal
Remove:
Torque Converter Inner Cover (see Torque Converter In-
ner Cover Removal)
NOTE
Before removing the drive belt, observe the direction
of the belts printed information [A] (such as manufac-
turers name and arrow marks) is facing so that it may
be reinstalled on the pulleys to rotate in the same direc-
tion as originally installed.
Remove the drive belt [B].

Drive Belt Installation
NOTE
Be sure the printed information faces the same direc-
tion so the belt rotates in the same direction as origi-
nally installed. When installing a new belt, install it so
the printed information [A] can be read from beside the
vehicle.
Installation is basically the reverse of removal.

Install:
Loop the belt over the driven pulley.
ner Cover Installation)
Drive Pulley (see Drive Pulley Installation)
Put the transmission in neutral, and rotate the driven pul-

ley to allow the belt to return to the top [A] of the sheaves,
before measuring belt deflection.
Drive Belt Inspection

Refer to the Drive Belt Inspection in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
Drive Belt Deflection Inspection
Refer to the Drive Belt Deflection Inspection in the Peri-
Drive Belt Deflection Adjustment
Refer to the Drive Belt Deflection Adjustment in the Peri-
Drive Pulley
Drive Pulley Removal
Remove:
Torque Converter Outer Cover (see Torque Converter
Outer Cover Removal)
Fan Cover Bolts [A]
Fan Cover [B]
Install the drive pulley holder [A] and tighten it with the
three Allen bolts [B] as shown in the figure.
Special Tool - Drive Pulley Holder: 57001-1548
Remove the drive pulley bolt [C] and washers.
Using the drive pulley holder [A] and drive pulley puller
bolt [B], remove the drive pulley [C] from the crankshaft.
Special Tools - Drive Pulley Puller Bolt: 57001-1429
Drive Pulley Holder: 57001-1548
Drive Pulley Disassembly

Hold the drive pulley holder [A] and drive & driven pulley
holder [B] in a vise.
Special Tools - Drive & Driven Pulley Holder: 57001-1412
Drive & Driven Pulley Holder: 57001-1473
Set the pulley onto the pulley holder.

Remove:
Drive Pulley Cover Bolts [A]
Drive Pulley Cover [B]
Drive Pulley
Remove the spring [A].
Put the drive pulley wrench [A] on the spider [B] and
tighten the bolt [C].
Special Tool - Drive Pulley Wrench: 57001-1549
Remove the spider with the movable sheave.
Remove:
Spider [A]
Shoes [B]
Nuts [C]
Ramp Weight Pin [D]
Ramp Weight [E]
Movable Sheave [F]
Fixed Sheave [G]
Drive Pulley Inspection

If the sheave surfaces [A] appear damaged, replace the
sheaves.
Drive Pulley
Replace any sheave which has uneven wear on the belt

contacting surface.
Sheave Surfaces [A]
Straight Edge [B]
If the cover bushing is damaged or worn, replace the drive

pulley cover.
Cover Bushing Inside Diameter [A]
Standard: 27.655 27.955 mm (1.089 1.101 in.)
If the sheave bushing is damaged or worn, replace it.

Sheave Bushing Inside Diameter [A]
Standard: 38.055 38.155 mm (1.498 1.502 in.)
If the spider shoes [A] are damaged, replace them.

Check the spider shoe side clearance (see Spider Shoe
Side Clearance Adjustment).
If the ramp weights [A] are damaged or worn, replace

them.
If the pins [B] are damaged, replace them.
Drive Pulley
If the ramp weights are damaged or worn, replace them.
Rump Weight Bushing Inside Diameter [A]
Standard: 7.000 7.091 mm (0.276 0.280 in.)
If the rollers [A] are damaged or worn, replace the spider

[B].
If the washers [C] are damaged or worn, replace the spi-
der.
If the spring is damaged, replace the spring.

Spring Free Length [A]
Standard: 77 mm (3.03 in.)
Spider Shoe Side Clearance Adjustment

Remove:
Drive Pulley Cover and Spring (see Drive Pulley Disas-
sembly)
Set the drive pulley [A] without the spring onto the pulley
holders.
Install the following parts temporarily.
Dowel Pins
Drive Pulley Cover [B]
Two Bolts [C] (at Dowel Pins)
Drive Pulley
Turn the spider counterclockwise.

and the post
Measure the resulting clearance [A] between the shoe [B]
[C] on the movable sheave at four posts,
using a thickness gauge [D].
Shoe Side Clearance
Standard: 0.05 0.20 mm (0.0020 0.0079 in.)
If the clearance is not within the specified range, adjust it
according to following chart.
Present Shoes
Clearance Measurement
Part Number Thickness
7.2 mm
49048-1087
(0.283 in.)
7.3 mm
up to 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.) 49048-1088
(0.287 in.)
7.4 mm
49048-1089
(0.291 in.)
over 0.05 to 0.20 mm no change
(over 0.0020 to 0.0079 in.) (49048-1090) (7.5 mm)
(standard clearance) (0.295 in.)
7.6 mm
49048-1091
(0.299 in.)
7.7 mm
49048-1092
(0.303 in.)
7.8 mm
over 0.20 mm (0.0079 in.) 49048-1093
(0.307 in.)
7.9 mm
49048-1094
(0.311 in.)
8.0 mm
49048-1095
(0.315 in.)
Check that the movable sheave [A] moves smoothly, after

the shoe side clearance adjustment.
The movable sheave must move freely towards the fixed
sheave [B].
If the movable sheave does not move smoothly, readjust
the shoe side clearance.
Drive Pulley
Drive Pulley Assembly
Replace the ramp weight nuts [B] with new ones.
Install the ramp weight [A] as shown in the figure.
Tighten:
Torque - Ramp Weight Nuts: 6.9 Nm (0.70 kgfm, 61 inlb)
Check that the ramp weights swing smoothly.
Hold the fixed sheave [A] with the drive pulley holders [B]
in a vise.
Clean the threads of the fixed sheave and spider.

Movable Sheave
Install:
Spider [A] and Shoes [B]

Align the arrow [C] on the spider with the arrow [D] on the
movable sheave.
Insert the shoes so that the rubber side faces inward.
Put the drive pulley wrench [A] on the spider [B] and
tighten the bolt [C].
Special Tool - Drive Pulley Wrench: 57001-1549
Turn the wrench for tightening.
Torque - Spider: 275 Nm (28.0 kgfm, 203 ftlb)
Put the spring [A] in the groove of the spider.

Align the arrows [B] on the drive pulley cover and spider.
Dowel Pins [C]
Install:
Drive Pulley Cover [D]

Tighten:
Torque - Drive Pulley Cover Bolts: 13 Nm (1.3 kgfm, 115
inlb)
Clean
fluid.
the surface of the sheaves with an oil-less cleaning
Drive Pulley
Bushing Installation
Press the cover bushing [A] into the cover [B] using the
special tool so that the end of bushing is flush with the
shoulder [C] in the hole.
Press the sheave bushing [A] into the movable sheave [B]
using the special tool so that the end of bushing is flush
with the shoulder [C] in the hole.
Drive Pulley Installation

Clean the following portions with an oil-less cleaning fluid
such as trichloroethylene or acetone, and wipe off any oil
with a clean cloth from the tapers.
Fixed Sheave Tapered Portion [A]
Crankshaft Tapered Portion [B]
WARNING
These cleaning fluids are usually highly flammable
and harmful if breathed for prolonged periods. Be
sure to heed the fluid manufacturers warnings.
Install the drive pulley, and screw in the drive pulley bolt
with the stepped collar [A] and washers [B] as shown in
the figure.
Bolt Head [C]
Hold the drive pulley with the drive pulley holder [A].
Special Tool - Drive Pulley Holder: 57001-1548
Tighten:
Torque - Drive Pulley Bolt [B]: 93 Nm (9.5 kgfm, 69 ftlb)
Drive Pulley
Press the ramp weight bushing [B] from the arrow side [A]
into the ramp weight [C] using the special tool so that the
end of bushing is flush with the shoulder [D] in the hole.
Install the fan cover.

Torque - Fan Cover Bolts: 8.8 Nm (0.90 kgfm, 78 inlb)
Install the torque converter outer cover (see Torque Con-
verter Outer Cover Installation).
Driven Pulley
Driven Pulley Removal
Remove:
ner Cover Removal)
Drive Belt (see Drive Belt Removal)
Using a flywheel & pulley holder [A], remove the driven
pulley bolt [B] and stepped collar.
Remove the driven pulley.
Driven Pulley Disassembly
Hold the drive & driven pulley holder [A] in a vise.
Special Tool - Drive & Driven Pulley Holder: 57001-1412
Screw
holder.
the guide bar [B] of the driven pulley holder into the
Special Tool - Driven Pulley Holder: 57001-1465

Put the driven pulley [C] on the guide bar.
spring holder
Tighten the nut [D], and compress the spring with the
[E] of the driven pulley holder.
Special Tool - Driven Pulley Holder: 57001-1465
Remove the circlip [A] with circlip pliers [B].

Remove the nut and spring holder [C].
Driven Pulley
Remove:
Circlip [A]
Washer [B]
Ramp [C]
Spring [D]
Movable Sheave [E]
Spacer [F]
Fixed Sheave with Shaft [G]
Remove:
Wear Shoe Mounting Screws [A]
Wear Shoes [B]
Driven Pulley Inspection

If the sheave surfaces [A] appear damaged, replace the
sheaves.
Replace any sheave which has uneven wear on the belt
contacting surface.
Straight Edge [B]
If the guide bushings [A] are damaged or worn, replace

the movable sheave.
Sheave Bushing Inside Diameter
Standard: 39.655 39.965 mm (1.561 1.573 in.)
Service Limit: 40 mm (1.57 in.)
Driven Pulley
If the splines [A] of the fixed sheave and ramp are dam-
aged or worn, replace them.
If the spring is damaged, replace the spring.

Spring Free Length [A]
If the tabs on the spring are misaligned or the spring coils
are distorted, replace the spring.
One side end [B] of the spring must be maintained to 10
from other side end.
Converter Driven Pulley Shoe Inspection

Refer to the Converter Driven Pulley Shoe Inspection in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Driven Pulley
Driven Pulley Assembly
Install the wear shoes [A] on the movable sheave [B] as
shown in the figure.
The wear shoe shall be installed so that the mark [C] on
the shoe faces outward.
Apply a non-permanent locking agent to the wear shoe
mounting screws.
Tighten:
Torque - Wear Shoe Mounting Screws: 1.1 Nm (0.11 kgfm,
10 inlb)
Hold the fixed sheave with the drive & driven pulley holder
and driven pulley holder in a vise.
Driven Pulley Holder: 57001-1465
Install the spacer(s) [A] on the fixed sheave [B].
Install:
Movable Sheave [A]
Spring [B]
Insert the spring end into the hole [C] on the movable
sheave.
Install the ramp [A] on the fixed sheave shaft.

Put the washer
Insert the spring end [B] into the hole 1 on the ramp.
The washer shall[C]beand circlip [D] on the ramp.
installed so that the recess of it faces
outward.
Install the spring holder [A].

ramp, andflatpush
Align the portions [B] of spline of the fixed sheave and
down the ramp halfway by tightening the
flange nut [C].
Hold the movable sheave [D] by turning it counterclock-
wise 120 and tighten the flange nut until the bottom of
ramp hits the movable sheave.
Install the washer and new circlip.
Release the movable sheave slowly until it stops naturally.
Driven Pulley
Driven Pulley Installation
Clean the transmission driven shaft [A], and apply molyb-
denum disulfide grease width the specified range on it.
20 25 mm (0.79 0.98 in.) [B]
5 10 mm (0.20 0.39 in.) [C]
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease thinly in the area [C].
Install the driven pulley [D].
Install
figure.
the stepped collar [A] on the pulley as shown in the
Bolt Head [B]

the driven pulley bolt.
Using a flywheel & pulley holder [A], tighten the driven
pulley bolt [B].
Torque - Driven Pulley Bolt: 93 Nm (9.5 kgfm, 69 ftlb)
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM 7-1

Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 7-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 7-4
Special Tools and Sealant ...................................................................................................... 7-5
Engine Oil Flow Chart............................................................................................................. 7-6
Engine Oil and Oil Filter.......................................................................................................... 7-7
Oil Level Inspection........................................................................................................... 7-7
Engine Oil and/or Oil Filter Change .................................................................................. 7-8
Oil Filter Removal ............................................................................................................. 7-8
Oil Filter Installation .......................................................................................................... 7-8
Oil Pan and Oil Strainer.......................................................................................................... 7-9
Oil Pan and Oil Strainer Removal ..................................................................................... 7-9
Oil Pan and Oil Strainer Installation .................................................................................. 7-9
Oil Strainer Cleaning/Inspection ....................................................................................... 7-9 7
Oil Pump................................................................................................................................. 7-10
Oil Pump Removal ............................................................................................................ 7-10
Oil Pump Installation ......................................................................................................... 7-10
Oil Pump Inspection.......................................................................................................... 7-10
Relief Valve............................................................................................................................. 7-11
Relief Valve Removal........................................................................................................ 7-11
Relief Valve Installation..................................................................................................... 7-11
Relief Valve Inspection...................................................................................................... 7-11
Oil Pressure Measurement..................................................................................................... 7-12
Oil Pressure Measurement ............................................................................................... 7-12
Oil Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................ 7-13
Oil Pressure Switch Removal ........................................................................................... 7-13
Oil Pressure Switch Installation ........................................................................................ 7-13
Oil Nozzle ............................................................................................................................... 7-14
Oil Nozzle Installation ....................................................................................................... 7-14
7-2 ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Exploded View
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Engine Oil Drain Plugs 34 3.5 25
2 Oil Filter Stud Bolt 44 4.5 32
3 Oil Nozzle 14 1.4 10
4 Oil Pan Bolts and Nuts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
5 Oil Pressure Switch 14 1.4 10 SS
6 Oil Pump Drive Gear Bolt 20 2.0 15
7 Oil Strainer Mounting Bolt and Nuts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
8 Relief Valve Bolt 39 4.0 29
G: Apply grease.
LG: Apply liquid gasket.
Specifications

Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Engine Oil:
(When filter is not removed)
3.3 L (3.5 US qt)
(When filter is removed)
Level Between F and L marks on dipstick
Oil Pump
Oil Pump Side Clearance 0.030 0.096 mm (0.0012 0.0038 in.) 0.15 mm
(0.0059 in.)
Oil Pump Housing Depth 12.63 12.67 mm (0.4972 0.4988 in.) 12.72 mm
(0.5008 in.)
Relief Valve
Relief Valve Spring Free Length 34.5 36.5 mm (1.358 1.437 in.)
Oil Pressure Measurement
Oil Pressure 196 490 kPa (2.0 5.0 kgf/cm,
28 71 psi) at 3 000 r/min (rpm), Oil
temperature 55 65C (131 149F)
Special Tools and Sealant
Oil Pressure Gauge, 10 kgf/cm: Liquid Gasket, TB1211:
57001-164 56019-120
Oil Pressure Gauge Adapter, PT 1/8:

57001-1033
Engine Oil Flow Chart
This engine has a full pressure lubrication system with an oil filter. The gear driven oil pump draws
oil from a screened oil pickup in the oil pan and pumps the oil through the oil filter.
The filtered oil flows through oil galleries in the crankcase and is distributed to the main bearings,
connecting rod bearings, camshaft bearings and rocker arm shaft.
A pressure relief valve limits the maximum oil pressure in the system.
WARNING
Vehicle operation with insufficient, deteriorated,
or contaminated engine oil will cause accelerated
wear and may result in engine seizure, accident,
and injury. Check the oil level before each use and
change the oil and filter according to the periodic
maintenance chart.
Oil Level Inspection

NOTE
If the vehicle has just been used, wait several minutes
for all the oil to drain down.
If the oil has just been changed, start the engine and
run it for several minutes at idle speed. This fills the oil
filter with oil. Stop the engine, then wait several minutes
until the oil settles.
NOTICE
Racing the engine before the oil reaches every part
can cause engine seizure.
Park the vehicle on level ground, and tilt up the seat.

and inserttheitdipstick
Pull out [A] out of the dipstick tube, wipe it dry,
into the tube securely.
Pull out the dipstick and check the oil level. The oil level
should be between the upper (F) and lower (L) level marks
[A].
If the oil level is too high, remove the excess oil. Remove
the dipstick pipe, and using a syringe or some other suit-
able device through the opening, or removing the engine
oil drain plug, drain the excess oil.
If the oil level is too low, add the correct amount of oil
through the oil filler opening. Use the same type and
make of oil that is already in the engine.
Oil Filler Cap [A]
NOTE
If the engine oil type and make are unknown, use any
brand of the specified oil to top up the level in preference
to running the engine with the oil level low. Then at your
earliest convenience, change the oil completely.
NOTICE
To avoid the engine damage, do not fill the engine
oil above the full level.
Engine Oil and/or Oil Filter Change
Refer to the Engine Oil and/or Oil Filter Change in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Oil Filter Removal
Refer to the Oil Filter Removal in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
Oil Filter Installation
Refer to the Oil Filter Installation in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
Oil Pan and Oil Strainer
Oil Pan and Oil Strainer Removal
Remove:
stallation chapter)
Flywheel and End Plate (see End Plate Removal in the
Oil Pan Bolts [A] and Nuts [B]
Remove the oil pan [C] straight so that the baffle plate in
the oil pan does not to hitch the oil strainer.
Remove:
Oil Strainer Mounting Bolt [A] and Nuts [B]
Oil Strainer [C]
Oil Pan and Oil Strainer Installation

Clean the oil pan and oil strainer thoroughly whenever
they are removed.
Replace the oil strainer gasket [A] with a new one.
Tighten:
Torque - Oil Strainer Mounting Bolt and Nuts: 7.8 Nm (0.80
kgfm, 69 inlb)
Apply liquid gasket [A] to the mating surface as shown in

the figure.
Sealant - Three Bond: 1207F
Install the oil pan [B] so that the baffle plate [C] does not
hitch the oil strainer.
Tighten:
Torque - Oil Pan Bolts and Nuts: 7.8 Nm (0.80 kgfm, 69
inlb)
Oil Strainer Cleaning/Inspection

Clean
it.
the oil strainer, and remove any particles stuck to
NOTE
While cleaning the strainer, check for any metal parti-
cles that might indicate internal engine damage.
Check the screen [A] carefully for any damage: holes and
broken wire.
If the screen is damaged, replace the oil strainer.
Oil Pump
Oil Pump Removal
Remove:
Timing Gear Case (see Timing Gear Case Removal in
the Crankshaft/Crankcase chapter)
Oil Pump Outer Rotor [A]
Oil Pump Installation

Clean and lubricate the oil pump outer rotor [A] with en-
gine oil.
Apply engine oil to the oil pump outer rotor.
facing the
Install oil pump outer rotor with the punch mark [B]
inside.
Install the timing gear case (see Timing Gear Case Instal-
lation in the Crankshaft/Crankcase chapter).
Oil Pump Inspection

Remove the timing gear case cover (see Timing Gear
Case Removal in the Crankshaft/Crankcase chapter).
Set up a dial gauge [A] against the oil pump gear [B] as
shown in the figure and measure the oil pump side clear-
ance.
Oil Pump Side Clearance
Standard: 0.030 0.096 mm (0.0012 0.0038 in.)
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to next pro-
cedure.
Remove the oil pump outer rotor (see Oil Pump Removal).
[A] with athe
Measure depth of the pump housing in the crankcase
depth micrometer [B] at several points.
Oil Pump Housing Depth
Standard: 12.63 12.67 mm (0.4972 0.4988 in.)
If the depth exceeds the service limit, replace the
crankcase.
If the depth within the service limit, replace the timing gear
case.
Visually
[B].
inspect the oil pump inner rotor [A] and outer rotor
If there is any damage or uneven wear, replace the timing

gear case [C].
Relief Valve
Relief Valve Removal
Drain the engine oil (see Engine Oil and/or Oil Filter
Remove:
Relief Valve Bolt [A] and Washer
Relief Valve Spring
Relief Valve Plunger
Relief Valve Installation

Install:
Relief Valve Plunger [A]
Relief Valve Spring [B]
Washer [C] and Relief Valve Bolt [D]
Tighten:
Torque - Relief Valve Bolt: 39 Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29 ftlb)
Relief Valve Inspection

Visually inspect the relief valve spring [A] and plunger [B].
If any nicks or burrs are found during the above inspec-
tion, replace the parts.
Measure the relief valve spring free length.
If the spring is shorter than the standard, replace the
spring.
Relief Valve Spring Free Length
Standard: 34.5 36.5 mm (1.358 1.437 in.)
Remove
Removal).
the oil pressure switch (see Oil Pressure Switch
Attach the adapter [A] and gauge [B] to the hole.

Special Tools - Oil Pressure Gauge,10kgf/cm: 57001-164
Oil Pressure Gauge Adapter, PT 1/8: 57001
-1033
Start the engine and warm up the engine.

pressureengine
Run the
gauge.
at the specified speed, and read the oil
Oil Pressure
Standard: 196 490 kPa (2.0 5.0 kgf/cm, 28
71 psi) at 3 000 r/min (rpm), oil
temperature 55 65C (131 149F)
Stop the engine.

Remove the oil pressure gauge and adapter.
WARNING
Hot oil can cause severe burns. Beware of hot en-
gine oil that will drain through the oil passage when
the gauge adapter is removed.
Install the oil pressure switch (see Oil Pressure Switch

Installation).
Troubleshooting Guide
Low Oil Pressure High Oil Pressure
Engine RPM too low Wrong viscosity oil
Wrong viscosity or diluted oil Plugged oil galleries
Low oil level
Broken relief valve spring
Missing relief valve plunger
Worn bearings
Damaged or defective oil pump
Oil Pressure Switch
Oil Pressure Switch Removal
Drain the engine oil (see Engine Oil and/or Oil Filter
Remove:
Fuel Injection Pipes (see Fuel Injection Pipe Removal in
Oil Level Gauge Pipe [A] (see End Plate Removal in the
Bolt [B]
Plate [C]
Switch Connector [D]
Oil Pressure Switch [E]
Oil Pressure Switch Installation
Apply silicone sealant to the threads of the oil pressure
switch and tighten it.
Sealant - Liquid Gasket, TB1211: 56019-120
Torque - Oil Pressure Switch: 14 Nm (1.4 kgfm, 10 ftlb)
Oil Nozzle
Oil Nozzle Installation
Refer to the Timing Gear Case Installation in the Crank-
shaft/Crankcase chapter.
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 8-1
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 8-2
Special Tool ............................................................................................................................ 8-4
Engine Removal/Installation ................................................................................................... 8-5
Engine Removal................................................................................................................ 8-5
Engine Installation............................................................................................................. 8-7
8
8-2 ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Exploded View
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Engine Mounting Bolts 44 4.5 32
2 Stay Rod Rear Nut 88 9.0 65
Special Tool
Assembly Jig:
57001-1566
Engine Removal
Disconnect the battery cables (see Battery Removal in the
Electrical System chapter).
Drain:
Engine Oil (see Engine Oil and/or Oil Filter Change in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter)
Coolant (see Coolant Change in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter)
Drain the coolant from the cylinder head if necessary (see
Cylinder Head Removal in the Engine Top End chapter).
Remove:
Cargo Bed (see Cargo Bed Removal in the Frame chap-
ter)
Disconnect:
Oil Pressure Switch Lead Connector [A]
Glow Plug Lead [B]
Coolant Temperature Switch Lead Connector [C]
Remove:
Water Hose [D]
Fuel Hoses [E]
Air Duct [F] (see Fuel Pipe Removal in the Fuel System
chapter)
Remove:
Bracket Bolts [A]
Throttle Cable End Rod [C]
Fuel Cut Solenoid Lead Connector [D]
Remove:
Water Hose [A]
Alternator Lead Connector [B]
Alternator Cable [C]
Remove:
Starter Motor Lead Connector [A]
Starter Motor Cable [B]
Engine Ground Cable [C]
Remove the engine mounting bolts [A] and washers.
Remove the engine [A].
Remove:
Engine Bracket Bolts [A] (Both Sides)
Engine Bracket [B]
Engine Installation
Install the engine on the bracket.
the engine bracket bolts and tighten them.
Adjust the engine mounting position for alignment of the
torque converter.
Mount the engine and install the engine mounting bolts
loosely.
Install the assembly jig [A] onto the transmission driven
shaft and crankshaft as shown in the figure.
Special Tool - Assembly Jig: 57001-1566
Screw in the bolt [B] until the assembly jig is fitted to the
transmission driven shaft. The length [C] between the jig
and the end of coupling is 5 mm (0.20 in.).
Tighten:
Torque - Engine Mounting Bolts: 44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Remove the assembly jig.
Tighten:
Torque - Stay Rod Rear Nut: 88 Nm (9.0 kgfm, 65 ftlb)
Adjust:
Engine Oil (see Engine Oil and/or Oil Filter Change in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter)
Coolant (see Coolant Change in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter)
CRANKSHAFT/CRANKCASE 9-1
Crankshaft/Crankcase
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 9-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 9-4
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 9-6
Timing Gear Case .................................................................................................................. 9-8
Timing Gear Case Removal.............................................................................................. 9-8
Timing Gear Case Installation........................................................................................... 9-9
Timing Gear Case Cover Oil Seal Replacement .............................................................. 9-12
Timing Gear Inspection ..................................................................................................... 9-13
Camshaft ................................................................................................................................ 9-15
Camshaft Removal ........................................................................................................... 9-15
Camshaft Installation ........................................................................................................ 9-16
Camshaft Inspection ......................................................................................................... 9-17
Crankshaft and Connecting Rods........................................................................................... 9-18
Connecting Rod Removal ................................................................................................. 9-18
Connecting Rod Installation .............................................................................................. 9-18
Crankshaft Removal ......................................................................................................... 9-19
Crankshaft Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-19
Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance ......................................................................... 9-20
9
Connecting Rod Inspection............................................................................................... 9-21
Crankshaft Inspection ....................................................................................................... 9-21
Crankshaft Side Clearance ............................................................................................... 9-23
Connecting Rod Big End Bearing Insert/Crankpin Wear .................................................. 9-23
Crankshaft Main Bearing Insert/Journal Wear .................................................................. 9-24
End Plate ................................................................................................................................ 9-25
End Plate Removal ........................................................................................................... 9-25
End Plate Installation ........................................................................................................ 9-25
Oil Seal Retainer .................................................................................................................... 9-27
Oil Seal Replacement ....................................................................................................... 9-27
Pistons and Crankcase........................................................................................................... 9-28
Piston Removal................................................................................................................. 9-28
Piston Installation.............................................................................................................. 9-28
Crankcase Removal.......................................................................................................... 9-29
Crankcase Warp ............................................................................................................... 9-29
Crankcase Wear ............................................................................................................... 9-30
Piston Diameter ................................................................................................................ 9-30
Piston/Cylinder Clearance ................................................................................................ 9-31
Cylinder Boring, Honing .................................................................................................... 9-31
Camshaft Bearing Replacement ....................................................................................... 9-31
Camshaft Plug Replacement ............................................................................................ 9-32
Piston Ring and Ring Groove Wear.................................................................................. 9-32
Piston Ring End Gap ........................................................................................................ 9-33
Piston Ring Thickness ...................................................................................................... 9-33
Piston and Piston Pin Wear .............................................................................................. 9-33
9-2 CRANKSHAFT/CRANKCASE
Exploded View
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Camshaft Drive Gear Bolt 43 4.4 32
2 Camshaft Retainer Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
3 Connecting Rod Cap Nuts 36 3.7 27
4 Coolant Drain Plug 25 2.5 18 L
5 Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap Bolts 59 6.0 44
6 Crankshaft Pulley Bolt 98 10.0 72.3 EO
7 End Plate Bolts 39 4.0 29
8 Flywheel Mounting Bolts 44 4.5 32 L, S
9 Fuel Injection Pump Drive Gear Nut 64 6.5 47
10 Idle Gear Bolts 25 2.5 18
11 Oil Nozzle 14 1.4 10
12 Oil Pump Drive Gear Bolt 20 2.0 15
13 Oil Seal Retainer Bolts 5.4 0.55 48 inlb
14 Timing Gear Case Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
15 Timing Gear Case Cover Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
G: Apply grease.
HG: Apply high-temperature grease.
Specifications

Timing Gear Case
Timing Gear Backlash 0.2 mm
(0.008 in.)
Idle Gear Inside Diameter 34.17 mm
(1.3453 in.)
Idle Gear Shaft Outside Diameter 33.91 mm
(1.3350 in.)
Camshaft
Cam Height:
Inlet 30.065 30.135 mm 29.965 mm
(1.1837 1.1864 in.) (1.1797 in.)
Exhaust 30.065 30.135 mm 29.965 mm
(1.1837 1.1864 in.) (1.1797 in.)
Camshaft Journal Diameter:
Right Side 35.959 35.975 mm 35.89 mm
(1.4157 1.4163 in.) (1.413 in.)
Center 35.910 35.955 mm 35.84 mm
(1.4138 1.4155 in.) (1.411 in.)
Left Side 35.910 35.955 mm 35.84 mm
(1.4138 1.4155 in.) (1.411 in.)
Camshaft Runout 0.03 mm
(0.0012 in.)
Crankshaft and Connecting Rods
Connecting Rod Big End Side 0.15 0.28 mm 0.3 mm
Clearance (0.0059 0.0110 in.) (0.0118 in.)
Connecting Rod Small End:
Inside Diameter 18.03 mm (0.7098 in.)
Connecting Rod Big End:
Out of Round 0.02 mm
(0.0008 in.)
Connecting Rod Thrust Faces:
Distortion 0.05 mm
(0.0020 in.)
Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter 41.976 42.000 mm
(1.6526 1.6535 in.)
Crankshaft Crankpin Diameter 36.976 37.000 mm
(1.4557 1.4567 in.)
Crankshaft Out of Round and Taper 0.02 mm
(0.0008 in.)
Undersize Crankshaft Main 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) Undersize
Bearing Inserts
Crankshaft #3 Main Journal Runout 0.06 mm
(0.0024 in.)
Crankshaft Side Clearance 0.02 0.24 mm 0.30 mm
(0.0008 0.0094 in.) (0.0118 in.)
Oversize Thrust Washers 0.12 mm (0.0047 in.)
Oversize
Specifications

Crankshaft #3 Main Journal Width 22.00 22.07 mm
(0.8661 0.8689 in.)
Connecting Rod Big End Bearing 0.020 0.044 mm 0.07 mm
Insert/Crankpin Clearance (0.0008 0.0017 in.) (0.0028 in.)
Crankshaft Main Bearing 0.020 0.044 mm 0.07 mm
Insert/Journal Clearance (0.0008 0.0017 in.) (0.0028 in.)
Pistons and Crankcase
Crankcase Warp 0.08 mm (0.0031 in.)
Crankcase Height 238.70 239.30 mm 238.60 mm
(9.3976 9.4212 in.) (9.3937 in.)
Cylinder Inside Diameter 72.00 72.03 mm 72.105 mm
(2.8346 2.8358 in.) (2.8388 in.)
or more than
0.035 mm
(0.0014 in.)
difference between any
two measurements
Valve Lifter Bore Inside Diameter 18.018 mm (0.7094 in.) 18.05 mm (0.7106 in.)
Camshaft Bearing Inside Diameter 36.06 mm (1.4197 in.)
Piston Diameter 71.93 71.96 mm
(2.8319 2.8331 in.)
Piston/Cylinder Clearance 0.06 0.08 mm 0.12 mm
(0.0024 0.0031 in.) (0.0047 in.)
Oversize Piston and Rings 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) Oversize
Piston Ring/Groove Clearance less than 0.12 mm
(Top, Second and Oil Ring) (0.0047 in.)
Piston Ring End Gap 0.70 mm (0.0276 in.)
(Top, Second and Oil Ring)
Piston Ring Thickness:
Top 1.445 1.465 mm
(0.0569 0.0577 in.)
Second 1.470 1.490 mm
(0.0579 0.0587 in.)
Oil 2.970 2.990 mm
(0.1169 0.1177 in.)
Piston Pin Bore Diameter 18.03 mm (0.7098 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter 17.98 mm (0.7079 in.)
Special Tools
Bearing Puller Adapter: Crankcase Splitting Tool Assembly:
57001-136 57001-1098
Inside Circlip Pliers: Camshaft Bearing Driver:

57001-143 57001-1434
Piston Pin Puller Assembly: Camshaft Bearing Remover:

57001-910 57001-1435
Piston Ring Compressor Grip: Timing Gear Cover Oil Seal Driver:
57001-1095 57001-1436
Piston Ring Compressor Belt, 50 67: Retainer Oil Seal Driver:

57001-1096 57001-1437
Special Tools
Flywheel Holder:
57001-1438
Timing Gear Case
Timing Gear Case Removal
Remove:
stallation chapter)
Fan Belt (see Alternator Removal in the Electrical Sys-
tem chapter)
Using the flywheel holder [A], hold the crankshaft.
Special Tool - Flywheel Holder: 57001-1438
Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt [A].
Remove the crankshaft pulley [A].

Special Tools - Crankcase Splitting Tool Assembly [B]:
57001-1098
Bearing Puller Adapter [C]: 57001-136
Remove:
Oil Pan and Oil Strainer (see Oil Pan and Oil Strainer
Removal in the Engine Lubrication System chapter)
Timing Gear Case Cover Bolts [A]
Timing Gear Case Cover [B]
Bracket [C]
Temporary, install the flywheel for the crankshaft holding.

Using the flywheel holder [A], hold the crankshaft.
Timing Gear Case
Remove:
Gear Nut [A]
Gear Bolts [B]
Oil Pump Drive Gear [C]
Camshaft Drive Gear [D]
Position the flywheel holder to the opposite side.
Remove:
Idle Gear Bolts [E]
Thrust Plate [F]
Idle Gear [G]
Remove the idle gear shaft [A].

tion pump drive gear
Using a suitable bearing puller [B], remove the fuel injec-
[C].
Pump Removal in the Fuel pump
Remove the fuel injection [D] (see Fuel Injection
System chapter).
Remove:
Camshaft Retainer Bolts [A]
Camshaft Retainer [B]
Timing Gear Case Bolts [C]
Timing Gear Case [D]
Remove the oil pump outer rotor [A].
Timing Gear Case Installation

Clean and lubricate the oil pump outer rotor [A] with en-
gine oil.
Install the oil pump outer rotor with the punch mark [B]
facing inside.
Timing Gear Case
Install:
Dowel Pins [A]
New Timing Gear Case Gasket [B]
Timing Gear Case
Rotate the oil pump shaft to engage oil pump rotors.
Install the camshaft retainer [A].

Tighten:
Torque - Camshaft Retainer Bolts: 7.8 Nm (0.80 kgfm, 69
inlb)
Timing Gear Case Bolts: 7.8 Nm (0.80 kgfm, 69
inlb)
28 mm (1.10 in.) [B]
18 mm (0.71 in.) [C]
16 mm (0.63 in.) [D]
Install the fuel injection pump temporarily.

gear case.marks [A] on the injection pump and the timing
Align the
Install:
Fuel Injection Pump Drive Gear and Nut [A]
Camshaft Drive Gear and Bolt
Face the timing marks [B] on the gears upward.
Install the idle gear shaft [C] with the arrow [D] facing the
engine top.
Position the crankshaft key [E] upward (top position).
Install the idle gear so that the timing marks on the gears
are positioned as shown in the figure.
[1] Idle Gear (AA) (A) Crankshaft Gear
[2] Idle Gear (C) (CC) or (C) Fuel Injection Pump Drive
Gear
[3] Idle Gear (BB) (B) Camshaft Drive Gear
Install the oil pump drive gear [A] and bolt.
Timing Gear Case
Temporarily install the flywheel [A] to hold the crankshaft.

Using the flywheel holder [B] angled toward the rear of
the engine, hold the crankshaft.
Install the thrust plate [A].

Tighten:
Torque - Idle Gear Bolts [B]: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18 ftlb)
Position
gine.
the flywheel holder to the forward side of the en-
Tighten:
Torque - Fuel Injection Pump Drive Gear Nut [C]: 64 Nm
(6.5 kgfm, 47 ftlb)
Camshaft Drive Gear Bolt [D]: 43 Nm (4.4 kgfm,
32 ftlb)
Oil Pump Drive Gear Bolt [E]: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm,
15 ftlb)
Install:
New Timing Gear Case Cover Gasket
Dowel Pins [F]
Confirm the small hole in the oil nozzle [A] faces the en-
gagement of the idle gear and camshaft drive gear.
Tighten:
Torque - Oil Nozzle: 14 Nm (1.4 kgfm, 10 ftlb)
Install:
Timing Gear Case Cover
Bracket [A]
Tighten:
Torque - Timing Gear Case Cover Bolts: 7.8 Nm (0.80
kgfm, 69 inlb)
55 mm (2.17 in.) [B]
45 mm (1.77 in.) [C]
30 mm (1.18 in.) [D]
Timing Gear Case
Position the flywheel holder [A] back to the rear side of

the engine as shown in the figure.
Wipe off the excessive oil stuck on the tapered areas of

the pulley and its engaging area with a ragged cloth be-
fore installation.
Install the crankshaft pulley [A] and bolt.
Fit the hole [B] in the crankshaft pulley on the pin [C] in
the crankshaft gear.
Apply thin coat of engine oil to the threads of tightening
bolt. Do not apply excessive oil to its threads.
Tighten:
Torque - Crankshaft Pulley Bolt: 98 Nm (10.0 kgfm, 72.3
ftlb)
Pump Timing
Adjust the fuel injection pump timing (see Fuel Injection
Inspection in the Fuel System chapter)
Timing Gear Case Cover Oil Seal Replacement
Remove:
Timing Gear Case Cover (see Timing Gear Case Re-
moval)
Oil Seal [A]
Replace the oil seal with new one.

Press in the oiltoseal
Apply grease the new oil seal.
out. with the manufacturers marks facing
Special Tool - Timing Gear Cover Oil Seal Driver [A]: 57001
-1436
Timing Gear Case
Timing Gear Inspection
Inspect the timing gears using the following sequence.
Check the timing gear backlash between the idle gear [A]
and crankshaft gear [B].
Remove:
Camshaft Drive Gear (see Timing Gear Case Removal)
Fuel Injection Pump Drive Gear (see Timing Gear Case
Removal)
Oil Pump Drive Gear (see Timing Gear Case Removal)
the tip of the dial gauge [C] on the idle gear tooth.
Set
Hold the crankshaft.
Move the idle gear back and forth noting indicator reading.
Timing Gear Backlash
If the backlash exceeds the service limit, check the idle

gear bearing and shaft for wear.
Idle Gear Inside Diameter [A]
Idle Gear Shaft Outside Diameter [B]

If the idle gear bearing and shaft are within the service
limit, replace the idle gear and recheck the backlash.
If the backlash exceeds the service limit with a new idle
gear, crankshaft gear is worn.
If the crankshaft gear is worn, replace the crankshaft.
Check the timing gear backlash between the camshaft

drive gear [A] and idle gear [B].
Set the tip of the dial gauge [C] on the camshaft drive gear
tooth.
Hold the idle gear.
Move the camshaft drive gear back and forth noting indi-
cator reading.
If the backlash exceeds the service limit, replace the
camshaft drive gear.
Check the timing gear backlash between the fuel injection

pump drive gear [A] and idle gear [B].
Set the tip of the dial gauge [C] on the fuel injection pump
drive gear tooth.
Hold the idle gear.
Move the fuel injection pump drive gear back and forth
noting indicator reading.
If the backlash exceeds the service limit, replace the fuel
injection pump drive gear.
Timing Gear Case
Visually inspect the oil pump drive gear teeth [A] for wear
and damage.
If the teeth are damaged or worn, replace the oil pump
drive gear.
Camshaft
Camshaft Removal
Remove:
stallation chapter)
Cylinder Head (see Cylinder Head Removal in the En-
gine Top End chapter)
Valve Lifters (see Valve Lifter Removal in the Engine Top
End chapter)
Oil Pan (see Oil Pan and Oil Strainer Removal in the
Engine Lubrication System chapter)
Timing Gear Case Cover (see Timing Gear Case Re-
moval)
Temporarily, install the flywheel to hold the crankshaft.
Using the flywheel holder [A] angled toward the rear of

the engine, hold the crankshaft.
Remove:
Camshaft Drive Gear Bolt [A]
Camshaft Drive Gear [B]
Mark the positions [A] of the camshaft drive gear [B] and
idle gear [C] so that the camshaft drive gear can be in-
stalled later in the same position.
Do not turn the idle gear while the camshaft drive gear is
removed.
Camshaft
Remove:
Camshaft Retainer Bolts [A]
Camshaft Retainer [B]
Camshaft [C]
Use care when removing the camshaft to prevent damag-
ing the cam bearings, journals and lobes.
Camshaft Installation
Apply engine oil to all cam parts and journals.
Install the camshaft [A].
Take care when installing the camshaft to prevent dam-
aging the cam bearings, journals and lobes.
Install:
Camshaft Retainer
Camshaft Retainer Bolts
Torque - Camshaft Retainer Bolts: 7.8 Nm (0.80 kgfm, 69
inlb)
Install the camshaft drive gear [A].

Fit the groove [B] in the camshaft drive gear onto the key
on the camshaft.
Align the marks [C] on the camshaft drive gear and idle
gear marked when removing.
If the idle gear is turned, set the timing gears to the original
positions (see Timing Gear Case Installation).
Move the flywheel holder [A] to the forward side of the

engine to hold the crankshaft.
Tighten:
Torque - Camshaft Drive Gear Bolt [A]: 43 Nm (4.4 kgfm,
32 ftlb)
Camshaft
Camshaft Inspection
Measure the overall height [A] of each cam.
If any cam has worn past the service limit, replace the
camshaft.
Cam Height
Standard:
Inlet 30.065 30.135 mm (1.1837 1.1864 in.)
Exhaust 30.065 30.135 mm (1.1837 1.1864 in.)
Service Limit:
Inlet 29.965 mm (1.1797 in.)
Exhaust 29.965 mm (1.1797 in.)
Measure the diameter of the camshaft journals.

If any journals has worn past the service limit, replace the
camshaft.
Camshaft Journal Diameter
Standard:
Right Side [A] 35.959 35.975 mm
(1.4157 1.4163 in.)
Center [B] 35.910 35.955 mm
(1.4138 1.4155 in.)
Left Side [C] 35.910 35.955 mm
(1.4138 1.4155 in.)
Service Limit:
Right Side [A] 35.89 mm (1.413 in.)
Center [B] 35.84 mm (1.411 in.)
Left Side [C] 35.84 mm (1.411 in.)
Measure the camshaft runout.

If the measurement exceeds the service limit, replace the
camshaft.
Camshaft Runout
Connecting Rod Removal
Remove:
stallation chapter)
Cylinder Head (see Cylinder Head Removal in the En-
gine Top End chapter)
Valve Lifters (see Valve Lifter Removal in the Engine Top
End chapter)
Oil Pan (see Oil Pan and Oil Strainer Removal in the
Engine Lubrication System chapter)
Remove the carbon to prevent damaging the piston rings
or piston.
NOTE
Number the connecting rod/piston assemblies before
removing.
Remove:
Connecting Rod Cap Nuts [A]
Connecting Rod Cap [B]
Push the connecting rod end into the cylinder, and pull the
piston and connecting rod out of the cylinder.
Reassemble the connecting rod cap to the connecting rod
to prevent interchanging components.
Connecting Rod Installation
Install the connecting rod bearing inserts.
Be sure tang [A] on the bearing inserts are seated in the
notches in the connecting rod and cap.
Install a piece of vinyl tubing [B] over each connecting
rod threads to prevent damage to the threads or crankpin
when installing the connecting rod.
Apply engine oil to the following parts.

Cylinder Bores
Pistons and Piston Rings
Bearing Inserts and Crankpins
Rotate the crankshaft so that the crankpin is at bottom of
the stroke.
Insert the piston and connecting rod with the arrow [A] on
the piston facing right side (timing gears side).
Using the piston ring compressor grip [B] and the belt [C],
lightly tap the top of the piston with a plastic mallet to insert
the piston and connecting rod into the cylinder.
Special Tools - Piston Ring Compressor Grip: 57001-1095
Piston Ring Compressor Belt, 50 67:
57001-1096
Apply engine oil to the threads of the connecting rod bolt.

right side
Install the connecting rod caps with ID mark [A] facing
(timing gears side).
Tighten:
Torque - Connecting Rod Cap Nuts: 36 Nm (3.7 kgfm, 27
ftlb)
After tightening the cap nuts, make sure the crankshaft
rotates freely.
Crankshaft Removal
Remove:
Camshaft (see Camshaft Removal)
Timing Gear Case (see Timing Gear Case Removal)
Connecting Rods (see Connecting Rod Removal)
Oil Seal Retainer Bolts [A]
Oil Seal Retainer [B] and Gasket
Remove:
Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap Bolts [A]
Crankshaft Main Bearing Caps [B]
Crankshaft [C]
Thrust Washers (#3 Main Bearing)
Remove the upper main bearing inserts from saddles and
place with the respective bearing caps.
Crankshaft Installation
Install the upper main bearing inserts in the crankcase.
NOTE
Upper main bearing inserts have an oil groove [A] and
oil hole [B].
Be sure the bearing inserts are seated in the saddles,
and the tangs in the bearing inserts are aligned with the
notches in the saddles.
Install the lower main bearing inserts [A] in the bearing

caps [B].
Be sure the bearing inserts are seated in the bearing
caps, and the tangs [C] in the bearing inserts are aligned
with the notches [D] in the bearing caps.
Apply engine oil to the main bearing inserts.
Install the thrust washers [A] at #3 main bearing with

grooves [B] facing out.
Install the crankshaft with the gear facing the right side
(timing gears side).
Take care not to damage the journals or bearing inserts.
Apply engine oil to the crankshaft main journals.
Install the main bearing caps in their respective positions

with the arrows [A] facing the right side (timing gear side).
Tighten
4].
the cap bolts following the tightening sequence [1
Torque - Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap Bolts: 59 Nm (6.0

kgfm, 44 ftlb)
After tightening the cap bolts, make sure the crankshaft
rotates freely.
Install:
New Oil Seal Retainer Gasket [A]
Dowel Pins [B]
Oil Seal Retainer
Tighten:
Torque - Oil Seal Retainer Bolts: 5.4 Nm (0.55 kgfm, 48
inlb)
Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance

Measure connecting rod big end side clearance.
Insert a thickness gauge between the connecting rod big
end [A] and either crank web [B] to determine clearance.
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the con-
necting rod with a new one and then check clearance
again. If the clearance is too large after connecting rod
replacement, the crankshaft also must be replaced.
Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance
Standard: 0.15 0.28 mm (0.0059 0.0110 in.)
Connecting Rod Inspection
Measure the inside diameter [A] of the connecting rod
small end.
If the connecting rod small end bore has worn past the
service limit, replace the connecting rod.
Connecting Rod Small End
Service Limit
Inside Diameter: 18.03 mm (0.7098 in.)
Measure
end.
the inside diameter [A] of the connecting rod big
With bearings removed, install the connecting rod cap.

Tighten:
Torque - Connecting Rod Cap Nuts: 36 Nm (3.7 kgfm, 27
ftlb)
If the connecting rod big end out of round exceeds the
service limit, replace the connecting rod.
Connecting Rod Big End
Service Limit
Out of Round: 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)
Check for a bent or twisted connecting rod.

NOTE
The thrust faces must be free of any burrs or nicks, or
the connecting rod will not lay flat on a surface plate.
Put the connecting rod on a surface plate. Any distortion
will be evident by a rocking motion.
If a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.) thickness gauge can be inserted
at the connecting rod small end, replace the connecting
rod.
Connecting Rod Thrust Faces
Service Limit
Distortion: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
Crankshaft Inspection
Visually inspect the crankshaft main
crankpins for grooves or signs of scoring.
journals and
If any damage is found, the crankshaft must be re-ground

or replaced.
Check the crankshaft main journals and crankpins for

wear and taper.
Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter [A]
Standard: 41.976 42.000 mm (1.6526 1.6535 in.)
Crankshaft Crankpin Diameter [B]

Standard: 36.976 37.000 mm (1.4557 1.4567 in.)
Crankshaft Out of Round and Taper

If the crankshaft main journals are not within specification,
the crankshaft may be re-ground and undersize bearing
inserts installed.
Undersize Crankshaft Main Bearing Inserts
0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) Undersize
The final finishing dimensions should be as shown in the

table.
Finishing Dimensional Specifications
[A] 41.726 41.750 mm (1.6428 1.6437 in.)
[B] 36.726 36.750 mm (1.4459 1.4468 in.)
[C] R 2.5 mm (0.0984 in.)
[D] R 2.1 mm (0.0827 in.)
Measure the crankshaft runout at #3 main journal.

If the measurement exceeds the service limit, replace the
crankshaft.
Crankshaft #3 Main Journal Runout
Visually inspect the crankshaft gear teeth [A].

Do the timing gear inspection procedure (see Timing Gear
Inspection).
If the crankshaft gear teeth are damaged or worn, replace
the crankshaft.
Crankshaft Side Clearance
Insert a thickness gauge [A] between the thrust washer
and the crank web at the #3 main journal to determine
clearance.
Crankshaft Side Clearance
Standard: 0.02 0.24 mm (0.0008 0.0094 in.)
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, the crankshaft
may be re-ground and oversize thrust washers installed.
Oversize Thrust Washers
0.12 mm (0.0047 in.) Oversize
The final finishing dimensions should be as shown in the

table.
Finishing Dimensional Specifications
[A] 22.25 22.32 mm (0.8760 0.8787 in.)
[B] R 2.5 mm (0.0984 in.)
Crankshaft #3 Main Journal Width

Standard: 22.00 22.07 mm (0.8661 0.8689 in.)
Connecting Rod Big End Bearing Insert/Crankpin

Wear
Using plastigage (press gauge) [A], measure the bearing
insert/crankpin clearance.
NOTE
Tighten the connecting rod big end nuts to the specified
torque (see Connecting Rod Installation).
Do not move the connecting rod and crankshaft during
clearance measurement.
Connecting Rod Big End Bearing Insert/Crankpin

Clearance
Standard: 0.020 0.044 mm (0.0008 0.0017 in.)
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the
bearing insert.
Repeat the procedure for the other connecting rods.
Crankshaft Main Bearing Insert/Journal Wear
Using plastigage (press gauge) [A], measure the bearing
insert/journal clearance.
NOTE
Tighten the crankshaft main bearing cap bolts to the
specified torque (see Crankshaft Installation).
Do not turn the crankshaft during clearance measure-
ment.
Crankshaft Main Bearing Insert/Journal Clearance

Standard: 0.020 0.044 mm (0.0008 0.0017 in.)
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the
bearing insert.
Repeat the procedure for the other main bearings.
End Plate
End Plate Removal
Remove:
Stud Bolt [A]
Using the flywheel holder [A], hold the flywheel.

Remove:
Flywheel Mounting Bolts [B]
Coupling [C]
Flywheel [D]
Remove:
Bolts [A]
Bolts [C]
Oil Level Gauge Pipe [D]
Bolt [E]
Remove:
End Plate Seal Cover [A]
End Plate Bolts [B]
Plate [C]
Starter Motor Mounting Bolts [D]
End Plate [E]
End Plate Installation

Remove the old sealant, and clean around the oil seal
retainer and crankshaft end.
the figure.
When the starter motor install, refer to the Starter Motor
Installation in the Electrical System chapter.
Install the end plate.
Tighten:
Torque - End Plate Bolts: 39 Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29 ftlb)
End Plate

the figure.
Install the flywheel [A] and coupling.

the flywheel
mounting bolts.
Using the flywheel holder [B], hold the flywheel.
Tighten the flywheel mounting bolts following the tighten-
ing sequence as shown in the figure.
Torque - Flywheel Mounting Bolts:
First 32 Nm (3.3 kgfm, 24 ftlb)
Final 44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Oil Seal Retainer
Oil Seal Replacement
Remove:
Oil Seal Retainer [A] (see Crankshaft Removal)
Oil Seal [B]
Replace the oil seal with new one.

Press in a newoil oilto the
Apply engine outside of the oil seal.
with the end of the seal hole.
so that the seal surface is flush
Special Tool - Retainer Oil Seal Driver [A]: 57001-1437

Apply high-temperature grease to the oil seal lips.
Piston Removal
Remove:
Connecting Rod (see Connecting Rod Removal)
Snap Rings [A]
Remove the piston pin.

Special Tool - Piston Pin Puller Assembly [A]: 57001-910
Remove the piston.
Carefully spread the ring opening with your thumbs and

then push up on the opposite side of the ring [A] to remove
it.
Remove the 3-piece oil ring with your thumbs in the same
manner.
Piston Installation
Apply engine oil to the piston pin.
connectingarrow
Align the
rod.
[A] on the piston and ID mark [B] on the
Install:
Piston Pin
New Snap Rings
Install the oil ring coil expander making sure the wire is
completely inserted into the coil expander.
Install:
Oil Ring Coil Expander
Oil Ring [A]
Second Ring [B]
Top Ring [C]
second and top rings must be installed with the T
The
mark [D] facing up.
Position each piston ring end gap as shown in the figure.

Arrow [A]
Top Ring End Gap [B]
Second Ring End Gap [C]
Oil Ring End Gap [D]
Crankcase Removal
Remove:
Connecting Rods (see Connecting Rod Removal)
Crankshaft (see Crankshaft Removal)
Crankcase [A]
Crankcase Warp
Clean the crankcase.
crankcase
Lay a straightedge [A] across the upper surface of the
at several different points, and measure the
warp by inserting a thickness gauge [B] between the
straightedge and the crankcase.
Crankcase Warp
If the warp exceeds the service limit, the crankcase may

be resurfaced to the service limit of the crankcase height
[A].
Crankcase Height
Standard: 238.70 239.30 mm (9.3976 9.4212 in.)
If the height is less than the service limit, replace the
crankcase.
Crankcase Wear
Cylinder Bore
Take a side-to-side and a front-to-back measurement at
each of the 3 locations (total of 6 measurements) shown
in the figure.
If any of the measurements exceeds the service limit, the
cylinder will have to be bored to oversize and then honed.
10 mm (0.39 in.) [A]
45 mm (1.77 in.) [B]
20 mm (0.79 in.) [C]
Cylinder Inside Diameter
Standard: 72.00 72.03 mm (2.8346 2.8358 in.)
Service Limit: 72.105 mm (2.8388 in.) or more than
0.035 mm (0.0014 in.) difference
between any two measurements
Valve Lifter Bore

Valve Lifter Bore Inside Diameter
Standard: 18.018 mm (0.7094 in.)
Camshaft Bearing
Camshaft Bearing Inside Diameter
If the diameter exceeds the service limit, replace the
camshaft bearing.
Piston Diameter
Measure the piston diameter [A] at the point shown with
a micrometer.
Piston Diameter
Standard: 71.93 71.96 mm (2.8319 2.8331 in.)
NOTE
If the cylinder has been bored oversize, use the over-
size piston diameter.
Piston/Cylinder Clearance
Subtract the piston diameter from the cylinder inside di-
ameter to get the piston/cylinder clearance.
Piston/Cylinder Clearance
Standard: 0.06 0.08 mm (0.0024 0.0031 in.)
If the piston/cylinder clearance is greater than the service
limit, and the cylinder inside diameter is not more than the
service limit, replace the piston.
If only a piston is replaced, the clearance may exceed the
standard slightly, but it must not be less than the minimum
in order to avoid piston seizure.
Cylinder Boring, Honing
When boring and honing a cylinder, note the following.
Oversize pistons require oversize rings.
Oversize Piston and Rings
0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) Oversize
Before boring a cylinder, first measure the exact diam-
eter of the oversize piston, and then, according to the
standard clearance in the specifications, determine the
rebore diameter. However, if the amount of boring nec-
essary would increase the inside diameter by more than
0.25 mm (0.0098 in.), the crankcase must be replaced.
Cylinder inside diameter must not vary more than 0.01
mm (0.00039 in.) at any point.
Be wary of measurements taken immediately after boring
since the heat affects cylinder diameter.
In the case of a rebored cylinder and oversize piston, the
service limit for the cylinder is the diameter that the cylin-
der was bored to plus 0.1 mm (0.0039 in.) and the service
limit for the piston is the oversize piston original diameter
minus 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.). If the exact figure for the re-
bored diameter is unknown, it can be roughly determined
by measuring the diameter at the base of the cylinder.
Camshaft Bearing Replacement
Remove
moval).
the timing gear case (see Timing Gear Case Re-
Using the camshaft bearing remover [A], remove the

camshaft bearing.
Special Tool - Camshaft Bearing Remover: 57001-1435
Install the new camshaft bearing [A].

Face the notch [B] in the bearing to the outside, and align
the oil holes [C] in the bearing and crankcase.
Using the camshaft bearing driver [A], install the camshaft

bearing.
Special Tool - Camshaft Bearing Driver: 57001-1434
Camshaft Plug Replacement

Remove:
Timing Gear Case (see Timing Gear Case Removal)
Camshaft Plug [A]
Use a wooden dowel or brass rod to prevent damage to
the camshaft bearing.
Using the camshaft

camshaft plug.
bearing driver [A], install a new
Special Tool - Camshaft Bearing Driver: 57001-1434
Piston Ring and Ring Groove Wear

Check
ing.
for uneven groove wear by inspecting the ring seat-
The rings should fit perfectly parallel to the groove sur-

faces. If not, replace the piston and all the piston rings.
With new piston rings in their grooves, make several mea-
surements with a thickness gauge [A] to determine piston
ring/groove clearance.
Piston Ring/Groove Clearance (Top, Second and Oil Ring)
Service Limit: less than 0.12 mm (0.0047 in.)
If the piston ring/groove clearance is greater than the ser-
vice limit, replace the piston.
Piston Ring End Gap
Clean the carbon from the ends of the rings.
Place the piston ring inside the cylinder, using the piston
to locate the ring squarely in place. Set it close to the
bottom of the cylinder, where cylinder wear is low.
Measure the gap between the ends of the ring with a thick-
ness gauge.
Piston Ring End Gap (Top, Second and Oil Ring)
If the gap is wider than the service limit, the ring is over-
worn and must be replaced.
NOTE
When using new rings in a used piston, check for un-
even groove wear. The rings should fit perfectly parallel
to the groove sides. If not, replace the piston.
Piston Ring Thickness
Measure the piston ring thickness [A].
Use a micrometer to measure at several points around
the ring.
Piston Ring Thickness
Standard:
Top 1.445 1.465 mm (0.0569 0.0577 in.)
Second 1.470 1.490 mm (0.0579 0.0587 in.)
Oil 2.970 2.990 mm (0.1169 0.1177 in.)
Piston and Piston Pin Wear

Measure the inside diameter of the piston pin bore.
If the inside diameter exceeds the service limit, replace
the piston.
Piston Pin Bore Diameter
Measure the outside diameter of the piston pin.

If the outside diameter is less than the service limit, re-
place the piston pin.
Piston Pin Diameter
TRANSMISSION 10-1
Transmission
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 10-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 10-8
Special Tools and Sealant ...................................................................................................... 10-9
Transmission Oil ..................................................................................................................... 10-10
Transmission Oil Level Inspection .................................................................................... 10-10
Transmission Oil Change.................................................................................................. 10-10
Transmission Case................................................................................................................. 10-11
Transmission Case Removal ............................................................................................ 10-11
Transmission Case Installation ......................................................................................... 10-12
Transmission Case Splitting ............................................................................................. 10-13
Transmission Case Assembly........................................................................................... 10-13
Transmission and Shift Mechanism........................................................................................ 10-14
Transmission and Hi/Low Shift Cables Installation ........................................................... 10-14
Shift Lever Position Inspection.......................................................................................... 10-17
Shift Lever Position Adjustment ........................................................................................ 10-17
Transmission Shift Cable Inspection................................................................................. 10-18
Transmission Removal ..................................................................................................... 10-18
Transmission Installation .................................................................................................. 10-19
Transmission and Shift Mechanism Inspection................................................................. 10-20
Hi/Low Gears and Shift Mechanism ....................................................................................... 10-21 10
Hi/Low Shift Cable Installation .......................................................................................... 10-21
Hi/Low Shift Cable Inspection ........................................................................................... 10-21
Hi/Low Gear and Shift Mechanism Removal .................................................................... 10-21
Hi/Low Gear and Shift Mechanism Installation ................................................................. 10-22
Hi/Low Gear and Shift Mechanism Inspection .................................................................. 10-24
2WD/4WD Shift Mechanism ................................................................................................... 10-25
2WD/4WD Shift Cable Adjustment ................................................................................... 10-25
2WD/4WD Shift Cable Lubrication.................................................................................... 10-25
2WD/4WD Shift Cable Inspection ..................................................................................... 10-26
2WD/4WD Shift Mechanism Removal .............................................................................. 10-26
2WD/4WD Shift Mechanism Installation ........................................................................... 10-26
2WD/4WD Shift Mechanism Inspection ............................................................................ 10-28
Differential Gears and Shift Mechanism ................................................................................. 10-29
Differential Shift Cable Adjustment ................................................................................... 10-29
Differential Shift Cable Lubrication.................................................................................... 10-29
Differential Shift Cable Inspection..................................................................................... 10-29
Differential Shift Mechanism Removal .............................................................................. 10-29
Differential Shift Mechanism Installation ........................................................................... 10-30
Differential Shift Mechanism Inspection............................................................................ 10-30
Differential Gear Removal................................................................................................. 10-31
Differential Gear Installation.............................................................................................. 10-32
Differential Gear Inspection .............................................................................................. 10-32
Bearings and Oil Seal............................................................................................................. 10-33
Bearing Replacement ....................................................................................................... 10-33
Ball Bearing Inspection ..................................................................................................... 10-33
Needle Bearing Inspection................................................................................................ 10-33
Oil Seal Inspection ............................................................................................................ 10-33
Transmission Sectional Figure ............................................................................................... 10-34
10-2 TRANSMISSION
Exploded View
TRANSMISSION 10-3
Exploded View
1. 2WD/4WD Shift Cable
2. Differential Shift Cable
3. White Tape
G: Apply grease.
10-4 TRANSMISSION
Exploded View
TRANSMISSION 10-5
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Differential Gear Housing Bolts 57 5.8 42 L
2 Shift Arm Positioning Bolt 37 3.8 27
3 Shift Shaft Stop Bolts 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
G: Apply grease.
10-6 TRANSMISSION
Exploded View
TRANSMISSION 10-7
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Bearing Holder 118 12.0 87.0 MO
2 Hi/Low Gear Case Bolts 20 2.0 15
3 Neutral Switch 15 1.5 11
4 Transmission Case Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
5 Transmission Case Mounting Nuts 44 4.5 32 R
6 Transmission Oil Drain Plug 15 1.5 11
G: Apply grease.
MO: Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution.
(mixture of the engine oil and molybdenum disulfide grease in a weight ratio 10 : 1).
10-8 TRANSMISSION
Specifications

Transmission Oil
Oil Level Between H and L level lines on
dipstick
Transmission and Shift Mechanism
Shift Arm Pin Diameter 7.95 8.00 mm (0.313 0.315 in.) 7.8 mm (0.307 in.)
Shifter Block Inside Diameter 8.05 8.10 mm (0.317 0.319 in.) 8.2 mm (0.323 in.)
Shifter Block Outside Diameter 13.95 14.00 mm (0.549 0.551 in.) 13.8 mm (0.543 in.)
Shifter Groove Width 14.0 14.2 mm (0.551 0.559 in.) 14.3 mm (0.563 in.)
Drive Chain 20-Link Length 158.76 159.18 mm 161.1 mm (6.343 in.)
(6.250 6.267 in.)
Hi/Low Gears and Shift Mechanism
2WD/4WD Shift Mechanism
Differential Gears and Shift
Mechanism
Shift Arm Pin Diameter 8.4 8.6 mm (0.331 0.339 in.) 8.3 mm (0.327 in.)
TRANSMISSION 10-9
Special Tools and Sealant
Outside Circlip Pliers: Hexagon Wrench, Hex 32:
57001-144 57001-1194
Oil Seal & Bearing Remover: Liquid Gasket, TB1105B:

57001-1058 92104-002
Bearing Driver Set:

57001-1129
10-10 TRANSMISSION
Transmission Oil
NOTICE
Vehicle operation with insufficient, deteriorated or
contaminated transmission oil will cause acceler-
ated wear and may result in transmission failure.
Transmission Oil Level Inspection

NOTE
If the vehicle has just been used wait several minutes
for all the oil to settle down.
Park the vehicle on level ground, and tilt up the cargo bed.
insert it intothetheoil filler
Unscrew filler cap [A], wipe its dipstick [B] dry, and
opening but DO NOT SCREW IT IN.
Pull out the dipstick and check the oil level. The oil level
should be between the upper (H) and lower (L) level lines
[C].
If the oil level is too high, remove the excess oil, using a
syringe or some other suitable device, through the oil filler
opening.
If the oil level is too low, add the necessary amount of
oil through the oil filler opening. Use the same type and
make of oil that is already in the transmission.
NOTE
If the transmission oil type and make are unknown, use
any brand of the specified oil to top up the level in pref-
erence to running the transmission with the oil level low.
Then, at your earliest convenience, change the oil com-
pletely.
Transmission Oil Change
Refer to the Transmission Oil Change in the Periodic
TRANSMISSION 10-11
Transmission Case
Transmission Case Removal
Drain the transmission oil (see Transmission Oil Change
in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Remove:
ter)
Propeller Shaft (see Propeller Shaft Removal in the Final
Drive chapter)
Rear Drive Shafts and Axles (see Rear Drive Shaft and
Axle Removal in the Final Drive chapter)
Muffler (see Muffler Removal in the Engine Top End
chapter)
Remove:
Neutral Switch Terminal Lead [A]
Speed Sensor Lead Connector [B]
2WD/4WD Shift Cable Lower End [C]
Differential Shift Cable Lower End [D]
Remove:
Transmission Shift Cable Lower End Lever [A]
Hi/Low Shift Cable Lower End Lever [B]
Bolts [C] and Collars
Injection Pump Cover [D]
Remove:
Bolts and Nuts [A]
10-12 TRANSMISSION
Transmission Case
Remove:
Bolt [A]
Thick Holder [B]
Thin Holder [C]
Speedometer Cable Lower End [D]
Remove:
Transmission Case Mounting Bolts and Nuts [A]
Transmission Case [B]
Transmission Case Installation

Adjust the transmission case mounting position (see En-
gine Installation in the Engine Removal/Installation chap-
ter).
Tighten:
Torque - Transmission Case Mounting Nuts: 44 Nm (4.5
kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Install:
Speedometer Gear [A]
Washer [B]
New O-ring [C]
Bushing [D]
Oil Seal [E]
Thick Holder [F]
Thin Holder [G]
Bolt [H]
Adjust:
Transmission Oil (see Transmission Oil Change in the
Transmission Shift Cable (see Shift Lever Position Ad-
justment)
Differential Shift Cable (see Differential Shift Cable Ad-
justment)
Hi/Low Shift Cable (see Shift Lever Position Adjustment)
2WD/4WD Shift Cable (see 2WD/4WD Shift Cable Ad-
justment)
TRANSMISSION 10-13
Transmission Case
Transmission Case Splitting
Remove:
Transmission Case (see Transmission Case Removal)
Bevel Gear Case (see Bevel Gear Case Removal in the
Hi/Low Gear Case (see Hi/Low Gear and Shift Mecha-
nism Removal)
Cable Bracket [A]
Bolts [B]
Left Transmission Case [C]
Transmission Case Assembly

Check to see that the transmission case dowel pins [A]
are in place. If any one of them has been removed, re-
place it with a new one.
Apply liquid gasket to the transmission case mating sur-
face.
Sealant - Liquid Gasket, TB1105B: 92104-002
Apply grease to the oil seal lips
Tighten:
Torque - Transmission Case Bolts: 8.8 Nm (0.90 kgfm, 78
inlb)
10-14 TRANSMISSION
Transmission and Hi/Low Shift Cables Installation
Remove one side of the spring [A] from the shift shaft lever
assembly.
Put the shift lever [A] in the L (LOW) position.
Using the shift shaft lever [A] temporarily set the shift arm
[B] in forward or reverse position as shown in the figure.
Put the differential shift lever [A] in LOCK position.
Turn the hi/low shift shaft lever [A] clockwise while turning
the drive shafts (wheels) until the lever engages low gear.
TRANSMISSION 10-15
Screw the joint [A] of the shift shaft lever [B] fully into the
hi/low shift cable [C] end, and install the cable onto the
bracket [D].
Line up the punch mark [A] on the shift arm, projection

[B] on the transmission case and slit opening in the shift
shaft lever [C].
Tighten:
Shift Shaft Lever Nut [D]
Shift Shaft Lever Clamp Bolt [E]
Hold the shift shaft lever [A] in the low range position
turning fully clockwise, and then push the outer cable [B]
lightly rearward to remove the cable free play.
Tighten:
Hi/Low Shift Cable Adjuster Nut [C]
Hi/Low Shift Cable Adjuster Nut [D]
Put the shift lever [A] in the center of right and left at N
(NEUTRAL) position, and hold it at the location [B].
Install suitable plates [C] between the shift lever and lower
and upper side of the gate in order to fix the shift lever.
Using the shift shaft lever [A] temporarily set the shift arm
[B] in neutral position as shown in the figure.
10-16 TRANSMISSION
Screw the joint [A] of the shift shaft lever [B] fully into the
transmission shift cable [C] end, and install the cable onto
the bracket [D].
Line up the punch mark [A] on the shift arm, projection

[B] on the transmission case and slit opening in the shift
shaft lever [C].
Tighten:
Shift Shaft Lever Nut [D]
Shift Shaft Lever Clamp Bolt [E]
Hold the shift shaft lever [A] in the neutral position, and
then pull the outer cable [B] lightly forward to remove the
cable free play.
NOTE
If the cable cannot be adjusted, move the slit opening in
the shift shaft lever one notch to right side of the punch
mark on the shift arm.
Tighten:
Transmission Shift Cable Adjuster Nut [C]
Transmission Shift Cable Adjuster Nut [D]
Install
bly.
the spring [A] back onto the shift shaft lever assem-
Check the shift lever position (see Shift Lever Position

Inspection).
TRANSMISSION 10-17
Shift Lever Position Inspection
Start the engine and put the shift lever in N (NEUTRAL)
or L (LOW) position.
Move the shift lever [A] slowly to the direction of the arrow
on the figure. At this time, increase the engine speed
slightly.
Check the grinding noise at the specified positions [B] and
[C].
If the position of the grinding noise is far from the specified
position, adjust the shift lever position (see Shift Lever
Position Adjustment).
Shift Lever Position Adjustment
Loosen the hi/low shift cable adjuster nuts [A] and [B].
Adjust the hi/low shift cable and set the transmission shift
lever [A] in the correct position as follows.
The gap [B] between the shift lever and panel is approxi-
mate 1.5 mm (0.06 in.).
When the outer cable moving forward, the shift lever
moves left side.
When the outer cable moving rearward, the shift lever
moves right side.
Tighten the hi/low shift cable adjuster nuts.
Loosen
[B].
the transmission shift cable adjuster nuts [A] and
Adjust the transmission shift cable and set the transmis-

sion shift lever [A] in the correct position as follows.
When the shift lever moving to right and left, the gaps
between [B] and [C] are same.
When the outer cable moving forward, the shift lever
moves upward.
When the outer cable moving rearward, the shift lever
moves downward.
Tighten the transmission shift cable adjuster nuts.
10-18 TRANSMISSION
Transmission Shift Cable Inspection
With the cable disconnected at both ends,
should move freely within the cable housing.
the cable
If the cable movement is not free, if the cable is frayed, or

if the housing is kinked, replace the cable.
Transmission Removal
Remove:
Transmission Case (see Transmission Case Removal)
Hi/Low Shift Gear (see Hi/Low Gear and Shift Mecha-
nism Removal)
Speedometer Gear (see 2WD/4WD Shift Mechanism
Removal)
Split the transmission case (see Transmission Case Split-
ting)
Remove:
Differential Gear Assembly (see Differential Gear Re-
moval)
Drive Shaft [A]
Washers [B]
Drive Shaft Reverse Sprocket [C]
Drive Chains [D]
Remove:
Shift Arm Positioning Bolt Assembly [A]
Retaining Pin [B]
Lift the shift arm [C] and remove the shifter [D].
Remove:
Drive Shaft (Outer) [A] and Drive Shaft Forward Gear [B]
Shifter Block [C]
Shift Arm [D]
TRANSMISSION 10-19
Remove the driven shaft assembly [A].
Remove:
Circlips [A]
Driven Shaft Reverse Sprocket [B]
Driven Shaft Forward Gear [C]
Driven Shaft [D]
Transmission Installation
Replace all circlips that were removed with new ones.
NOTE
Always install the circlips [A] so that the opening [B] is
aligned with a spline groove. To install a circlip without
damage, first fit the circlip onto the shaft [C] and then
expand it just enough to install. Hence, use a suitable
gear to push the circlip into place.
Apply transmission oil to the following parts.

Drive and Driven Shafts
Forward Gears
Reverse Sprockets
Drive Chains
Apply grease to the following parts.
Oil Seal Lips
Shift Arm Positioning Ball and Spring
Install the shifter [A] so that the groove [B] is away from
the forward gear [C].
Tighten:
Torque - Shift Arm Positioning Bolt: 37 Nm (3.8 kgfm, 27
ftlb)
10-20 TRANSMISSION
Transmission and Shift Mechanism Inspection
Visually inspect the forward gears, reverse sprockets,
gear and shaft bushings [A], drive chains, and shifter.
If they are damaged or worn excessively, replace them.
Replace parts worn beyond the service limit.

Shift Arm Pin Diameter [A]
Standard: 7.95 8.00 mm (0.313 0.315 in.)
Shifter Block Inside Diameter [B]

Standard: 8.05 8.10 mm (0.317 0.319 in.)
Shifter Block Outside Diameter [C]

Standard: 13.95 14.00 mm (0.549 0.551 in.)
Shifter Groove Width [D]

Standard: 14.0 14.2 mm (0.551 0.559 in.)
Drive Chain 20-Link Length [B]

Standard: 158.76 159.18 mm (6.250 6.267 in.)
Force [A]
1st Pin [C]
2nd Pin [D]
21th Pin [E]
TRANSMISSION 10-21
Hi/Low Shift Cable Installation
Refer
lation.
to the Transmission and Hi/Low Shift Cables Instal-
Hi/Low Shift Cable Inspection

With the cable disconnected at both ends,
should move freely within the cable housing.
the cable

Hi/Low Gear and Shift Mechanism Removal

Remove:
Bevel Gear Case (see Bevel Gear Case Removal in the
Hi/Low Shift Shaft Lever [A]
2WD/4WD Shift Cable Lower End [B]
Cable Bracket [C]
Remove:
Hi/Low Gear Case Bolts [A]
Hi/Low Gear Case [B]
Remove:
Washer [A]
High Gear [B]
Washer
Shifter [C]
Reduction Gear [D]
10-22 TRANSMISSION
Remove:
Circlip [A]
Washer [B]
Low Gear [C]
Collar
Remove:
Bolt [A]
Holder [B]
Remove:
Retaining Pin [A]
Shift Shaft and Arm [B]
Hi/Low Gear and Shift Mechanism Installation

Hi/Low Gears
Shifter
Apply grease to the oil seal lips.
Replace the circlip that was removed with a new one.

NOTE
Always install the circlip [A] so that the opening [B] is
TRANSMISSION 10-23
Install the shifter [A] so that the large dogs [B] face to the
low gear [C].
Install:
Reduction Gear
Washer [A]
Install the high gear [B] so that the small gear side [C]
faces shifter side.
Replace the hi/low gear case gasket [A] with a new one.
Washer [B]
Install:
Shifter [C]
Check to see that the hi/low gear case dowel pins [D] are
in place on the transmission case.
Insert the shift shaft [A] in the gear case [B].

Touch [C] the lever [D] of the shift shaft to lib [E].
Fit the shift arm pins [A] into the shifter grooves [B] and
install the hi/low gear case.
Tighten:
Torque - Hi/Low Gear Case Bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 15
ftlb)
10-24 TRANSMISSION
Install the retaining pin [A].

Apply grease
Replace the O-ring [B] with a new one.
Tighten the boltto the new O-ring and install the holder [C].
Check that each gear and shifter spins or slides freely on
[D].
its shaft without binding after assembly.
Hi/Low Gear and Shift Mechanism Inspection

Visually inspect the hi/low gears, shifter, and low gear
bushing [A].

Shifter Block Outside Diameter [A]
Standard: 13.95 14.00 mm (0.549 0.551 in.)
Shifter Groove Width [B]

Standard: 14.05 14.15 mm (0.553 0.557 in.)
TRANSMISSION 10-25
2WD/4WD Shift Cable Adjustment
Put the shift lever [A] in the 2WD position.
Install the 2WD/4WD shift cable [A] to the shift shaft lever
[B] and cable bracket [C].
Put the shift lever [A] in the 4WD position.
Turn the shift shaft lever [A] counterclockwise until the

lever is stopped by engaging the shifter with the drive
bevel gear shaft.
Screw in the upper adjuster nut [B] by hand until the inner
cable [C] has no slack while holding the shift lever in the
4WD position.
Tighten the lower adjuster nut [D] securely.
2WD/4WD Shift Cable Lubrication

Whenever the shift cable is removed, lubricate the cable
as follows.
Apply a thin coating of grease to the cable ends.
through the pressure cable luber.
10-26 TRANSMISSION
2WD/4WD Shift Cable Inspection
With the cable disconnected at both ends, the cable
should move freely [A] within the cable housing.
2WD/4WD Shift Mechanism Removal

Remove:
Hi/Low Gear Case (see Hi/Low Gear and Shift Mecha-
nism Removal)
Shift Shaft Stop Bolt [A] and Washer
Remove:
Shift Shaft Lever Mounting Nut [A]
Shift Shaft Lever [B]
Spring [C]
Remove:
O-ring [A]
Shift Shaft [B]
Remove:
Shifter [A]
Circlip [B]
Speedometer Gear [C]
Collar
2WD/4WD Shift Mechanism Installation

Speedometer Gear
Shifter
TRANSMISSION 10-27
Replace the circlip that was removed with a new one.

NOTE
Always install the circlip [A] so that the opening [B] is
Install the collar [A].

[C] faces tospeedometer
Install the
the inside.
gear [B] so that the stepped side
Install the new circlip.

Install the shifter so that the dogs [A] face to the outside.
Insert the shift shaft [A] in the gear case.

Replace the O-ring [B] with a new one.
grease to it.new O-ring and apply molybdenum disulfide
Install the
When the hi/low gear case installing, refer to the Hi/Low

Gear and Shift Mechanism Installation.
10-28 TRANSMISSION
Push the shift shaft [A] as shown in the figure.

Washer [B]
Install:
Shift Shaft Stop Bolt [C]

Tighten:
Torque - Shift Shaft Stop Bolts: 7.8 Nm (0.80 kgfm, 69
inlb)
Wipe off any protruding grease.
Install the spring [A].

hold it. shift shaft [B] counterclockwise until it is stop and
Turn the
Install the shift shaft lever [C] on the shift shaft so that the
center of the lever hole aligns with the mark [D] as shown
in the figure.
Tighten the shift shaft lever mounting nut [E].
Hook the spring end.
Check that each gear and shifter spins or slides freely on
its shaft without binding after assembly.
2WD/4WD Shift Mechanism Inspection
Visually inspect the following parts.
Dogs on Shifter [A]
Shifter Groove [B]
Dogs on Drive Bevel Gear Shaft [C]
Shifter Block [D]
Shifter Block Outside Diameter
Standard: 13.95 14.00 mm (0.549 0.551 in.)
Shifter Groove Width

Standard: 14.0 14.2 mm (0.551 0.559 in.)
TRANSMISSION 10-29
Differential Gears and Shift Mechanism
Differential Shift Cable Adjustment
Put the shift lever [A] in the UNLOCK position.
Set the shift shaft lever [A] in the UNLOCK position.

loosened.the adjuster nut [B] until the inner cable is slightly
Loosen
Tighten the adjuster nut [C] securely.
Differential Shift Cable Lubrication

Whenever the shift cable is removed, lubricate the cable
as follows.
Apply a thin coating of grease to the cable ends.
through the pressure cable luber.
Differential Shift Cable Inspection

With the cable disconnected at both ends, the cable
should move freely [A] within the cable housing.
Differential Shift Mechanism Removal

Remove:
Drive Shafts and Axles (see Rear Drive Shaft and Axle
Removal in the Final Drive chapter)
Shift Shaft Stop Bolt [A]
Shift Shaft Lever Mounting Nut [B]
Shift Shaft Lever [C]
Spring [D]
Shift Shaft and Arm [E]
10-30 TRANSMISSION
Differential Shift Mechanism Installation
Insert the shift shaft [A] in the gear case [B].
Replace the O-ring [C] with a new one.
grease to it.new O-ring and apply molybdenum disulfide
Install the
Push the shift shaft [A] as shown in the figure.

Washer [B]
Install:
Shift Shaft Stop Bolt [C]

Tighten:
Torque - Shift Shaft Stop Bolts: 7.8 Nm (0.80 kgfm, 69
inlb)
Wipe off any protruding grease.
Install the spring [A].
Install theshift
Turn the shaft [B] clockwise until stop and hold it.
lever is position
shift shaft lever [C] on the shift shaft so that the
like the figure.
Hook the spring end
Tighten the shift shaft lever mounting nut [D].
[E] as shown in the figure.
Differential Shift Mechanism Inspection

Visually inspect the following parts.
Splines on Drive Shaft [A]
Splines on Shifter [B]
Dogs [C] on Shifter
Shifter Groove [D]
Visually inspect the following parts

Shift Arm Pin [A]
Dogs [B] on Differential Gear Housing
TRANSMISSION 10-31

Shift Arm Pin Diameter [A]
Standard: 8.4 8.6 mm (0.331 0.339 in.)
Shifter Groove Width [B]

Standard: 9.0 9.1 mm (0.354 0.358 in.)
Differential Gear Removal

Split the transmission gear case (see Transmission Gear
Case Splitting).
Remove the differential gear [A].
Remove:
Differential Gear Housing Bolts [A]
Final Gear [B]
Remove:
Housing Cover [A]
Dowel Pin [B]
Side Gear [C]
Spacer [D]
Remove:
Dowel Pins [A]
Retaining Pin [B]
Pinion Gear Shaft [C]
Pinion Gears [D]
Spacers
Side Gear [E]
Spacer
10-32 TRANSMISSION
Differential Gear Installation
Side Gears
Pinion Gears
the differential gear housing bolts and tighten them.
Torque - Differential Gear Housing Bolts: 57 Nm (5.8
kgfm, 42 ftlb)
If the backlash of the differential gears cannot keep, re-

place the spacers [A] to thinner spacers.
Spacers
Thickness Part Number
1.2 mm (0.047 in.) 92200-0021
1.0 mm (0.039 in.) 92200-1044
NOTE
Use the spacers of the same thickness as a set.
Do not use the spacers of 1.2 mm (0.047 in.) and 1.0
mm (0.039 in.) thickness at the same time.
Differential Gear Inspection
Visually inspect the differential gears [A].
Replace the gears as a set if either gear is damaged.
TRANSMISSION 10-33
Bearings and Oil Seal
Bearing Replacement
Using a press, a puller, the oil seal & bearing remover, or
the bearing driver set, remove the bearings.
Special Tools - Oil Seal & Bearing Remover: 57001-1058
Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129
Using the hexagon wrench [A], remove the bearing holder
[B] and remove the drive bevel gear shaft bearing.
Special Tool - Hexagon Wrench, Hex 32: 57001-1194
Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution to the threads of

the drive bevel gear shaft bearing holder [A].
Install the bearing holder so that the projections [B] face
to outside.
Tighten:
Torque - Bearing Holder: 118 Nm (12.0 kgfm, 87.0 ftlb)
Using a press and the bearing driver set, install the new
bearings and/or new oil seals.
Ball Bearing Inspection

Turn each bearing back and forth [A] while checking for
roughness or binding.
If roughness or binding is found, replace the bearing.
Examine the bearing seal [B] for tears or leakage.
If the seal is torn or is leaking, replace the bearing.
Needle Bearing Inspection

Check the needle bearing.
The rollers in a needle bearing normally wear very little,
and wear is difficult to measure. Instead of measuring,
inspect the bearing for abrasion, color change, or other
damage.
If there is any doubt as to the condition of a needle bear-
ing, replace it.
Oil Seal Inspection
Visually inspect the oil seal.
Replace it if the lips are misshapen, discolored (indicat-
ing that the rubber has deteriorated), hardened, or been
otherwise damaged.
10-34 TRANSMISSION
Transmission Sectional Figure
TRANSMISSION 10-35
Transmission Sectional Figure
WHEELS/TIRES 11-1
Wheels/Tires
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 11-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 11-4
Wheel Alignment .................................................................................................................... 11-5
Toe-in Adjustment ............................................................................................................. 11-5
Wheels (Rims) ........................................................................................................................ 11-7
Wheel Removal................................................................................................................. 11-7
Wheel Installation.............................................................................................................. 11-7
Wheel (Rim) Inspection..................................................................................................... 11-7
Wheel (Rim) Replacement................................................................................................ 11-7
Tires ....................................................................................................................................... 11-9
Tire Removal..................................................................................................................... 11-9
Tire Installation.................................................................................................................. 11-9
Tire Inspection .................................................................................................................. 11-10
11
11-2 WHEELS/TIRES
Exploded View
WHEELS/TIRES 11-3
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Wheel Nuts 137 14.0 101
11-4 WHEELS/TIRES
Specifications

Wheel Alignment
Caster 7.5 (non-adjustable)
Camber 0.8 (non-adjustable)
Toe-in 0 20 mm (0 0.79 in.) at 1G
Wheels (Rims)
Rim Size:
Front and Rear 10 8.5 AT
Tires
Standard Tire:
Front and Rear 23 11.00-10
DUNLOP KT869, Tubeless
DURO DK-968, Tubeless
Tire Air Pressure (when Cold):
Front 97 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm, 14 psi)
Rear 167 kPa (1.7 kgf/cm, 24 psi)
Maximum Tire Air Pressure (to 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm, 36 psi)
seat beads, when cold)
Tire Tread Depth 13.2 mm (0.52 in.) 3 mm (0.12 in.)
WHEELS/TIRES 11-5
Wheel Alignment
Toe-in is the amount that the front wheels are closer to-
gether in front than at the rear at the axle height. When
there is toe-in, the distance A (rear) is greater than B (front)
as shown in the figure. The purpose of toe-in is to prevent
the front wheels from getting out of parallel at any time, and
to prevent any slipping or scuffing action between the tires
and the ground. If toe-in is incorrect, the front wheels will be
dragged along the ground, scuffing and wearing the tread
knobs.
Caster and camber are built-in and require no adjustment.
A (Rear) - B (Front) = Amount of Toe-in
(Distance A and B are measured at hub height)
Toe-in Adjustment
Lift the front wheels off the ground.
Apply
tires.
a heavy coat of chalk near the center of the front
Using a needle nose scriber, make a thin mark near the

center of the chalk coating while turning the wheel.
Set the wheels so that the marks on the tires are at the
front side and at the level of the axle height.
Ground the front wheels.
At the level of thewheel
Set the steering straight ahead.
tween the scribed lines
axle height, measure the distance be-
with a measure.
tires are at the rear side and atuntilthethe
Move the vehicle rearward marks on the front
same level as the axle.
Measure the distance between the scribed lines.
ment of the rear
Subtract the measurement of the front from the measure-
to get the toe-in.
Toe-in of Front Wheels
Standard: 0 20 mm (0 0.79 in.) at 1G
If the toe-in is not the specified value, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
Loosen the locknuts [A] on each tie-rod and turn the ad-
justing rods [B] the same number of turns and the same
direction on both sides to achieve the specified toe-in.
11-6 WHEELS/TIRES
Wheel Alignment
NOTE
The toe-in will be near the specified range, if the length
of the tie-rod distance between the dust boot end [A] of
steering gear assembly and the locknut [B] is 43.5 mm
(1.71 in.) [C] on both the left and right tie-rods.
Tighten:
Torque - Tie-Rod End Locknuts: 44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Check the toe-in again.
Test drive the vehicle.
WHEELS/TIRES 11-7
Wheels (Rims)
Wheel Removal
Loosen the wheel nuts [A].
Do not remove the wheel nuts.
Lift the wheel(s) off the ground.
Wheel Nuts
Remove:
Wheel(s)
Wheel Installation
Position the wheel so that the valve stem [A] is toward the
outside of the vehicle.
Tighten:
Torque - Wheel Nuts: 137 Nm (14.0 kgfm, 101 ftlb)
Tighten the wheel nuts in a criss-cross pattern.
Wheel (Rim) Inspection

Examine both sides of the rim for dents [A].
If the rim is dented, replace it.
If the tire is removed, inspect the air sealing surfaces [A]

of the rim for scratches or nicks. Smooth the sealing sur-
faces with fine emery cloth if necessary.
Wheel (Rim) Replacement

Remove the wheel (see Wheel Removal).
Remove the valve
Disassemble the tire from the rim.
stem and discard it.
NOTICE
Replace the air valve whenever the tire is replaced.
Do not reuse the air valve.
Plastic Cap [A]
Valve Core [B]
Stem Seal [C]
Valve Stem [D]
Valve Seat [E]
Valve Opened [F]
11-8 WHEELS/TIRES
Wheels (Rims)
Install a new air valve in the new rim.

Remove the valve cap, lubricate the stem with a soap and
water solution, and pull [A] the stem through the rim from
the inside out until it snaps into place.
NOTICE
Do not use engine oil or petroleum distillates to lu-
bricate the stem because they will deteriorate the
rubber.
Mount the tire on the new rim.

Install the wheel (see Wheel Installation).
WHEELS/TIRES 11-9
Tires
Tire Removal
Remove:
Wheel (see Wheel Removal)
Valve Core (Let out the air)
Lubricate the tire beads and rim flanges on both sides of
the wheel with a soap and water solution, or water [A].
This helps the tire beads slip off the rim flanges.
NOTICE
Do not lubricate the tire beads and rim flanges with
engine oil or petroleum distillates because they will
deteriorate the tire.
Remove the tire from the rim using a suitable commer-

cially available tire changer.
NOTE
The tires cannot be removed with hand tools because
they fit the rims tightly.
Tire Installation
Inspect the rim.
Replace thetireairforvalve
Check the wear and damage.
with a new one.
NOTICE
Replace the air valve whenever the tire is replaced.
Do not reuse the air valve.
Lubricate the tire beads and rim flanges with a soap and
water solution, or water.
WARNING
Do not use any lubricant other than a water and
soap solution, or water to lubricate the tire beads
and rim because it may cause tire separation, and
a hazardous condition may result.
Install the tire on the rim using a suitable commercially

available tire changer.
Lubricate
rim.
the tire beads again and center the tire on the
Support the wheel rim [A] on a suitable stand [B] to pre-

vent the tire from slipping off.
Inflate the tire until the tire beads seat on the rim.
Maximum Tire Air Pressure (to seat beads, when cold)
Front and Rear: 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm, 36 psi)
WARNING
Overinflating a tire can cause it to explode, causing
serious injury or death. Be sure to install the valve
core whenever inflating the tire, and do not inflate
the tire to more than maximum pressure.
11-10 WHEELS/TIRES
Tires
Check to see that the rim lines [A] on both sides of the tire
are parallel with the rim flanges [B].
If the rim lines and the rim flanges are not parallel, deflate
the tire, lubricate the sealing surfaces again, and reinflate
the tire.
After the beads are properly seated, check for air leaks.
Apply a soap and water solution around the tire bead and
check for bubbles.
Check the tire pressure using an air pressure gauge.
Tire Air Pressure (when Cold)
Front: 97 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm, 14 psi)
Rear: 167 kPa (1.7 kgf/cm, 24 psi)
Install the wheel (see Wheel Installation).

and dry the
Wipe off the soap and water solution, or water on the tire,
tire before operation.
WARNING
Water or soap solution on the tire bead can cause
tire separation and an accident resulting in serious
injury or death. Do not operate the vehicle until any
water or soap solution applied to the bead has com-
pletely dried.
Tire Inspection
Refer to the Tire Wear Inspection in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
FINAL DRIVE 12-1
Final Drive
Table of Contents
Exploded View................................... 12-2 Bevel Gear Case Installation ....... 12-22
Specifications .................................... 12-6 Bevel Gear Case Disassembly .... 12-22
Special Tools ..................................... 12-7 Bevel Gear Case Assembly ......... 12-23
Front Final Gear Case ....................... 12-8 Drive Bevel Gear Removal .......... 12-24
Front Final Gear Case Oil Level Drive Bevel Gear Installation ....... 12-24
Inspection.................................. 12-8 Bevel Gear Adjustment ................ 12-25
Front Final Gear Case Oil Backlash Adjustment ................... 12-25
Change...................................... 12-8 Tooth Contact Adjustment............ 12-27
Front Final Gear Case Removal .. 12-9 Bevel Gear Inspection.................. 12-29
Front Final Gear Case Installation 12-9 Ball Bearing Inspection ................ 12-29
Front Final Gear Case Oil Seal Inspection ....................... 12-29
Disassembly.............................. 12-10 Damper Inspection....................... 12-29
Front Final Gear Case Assembly. 12-10 Propeller Shafts ................................. 12-30
Differential Unit and Ring Gear Propeller Shaft Removal .............. 12-30
Disassembly.............................. 12-11 Propeller Shaft Installation ........... 12-31
Differential Unit and Ring Gear Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing
Assembly................................... 12-11 Removal .................................... 12-32
LSD Clutch Torque Inspection ..... 12-12 Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing
LSD Clutch Plate Inspection ........ 12-13 Installation ................................. 12-33
Pinion Gear Unit Disassembly ..... 12-13 Propeller Shaft Inspection............ 12-33
Pinion Gear Unit Assembly .......... 12-13 Drive Shaft and Axles ........................ 12-34
Front Final Bevel Gear Front Axle Removal ..................... 12-34
Adjustment ................................ 12-14 Front Axle Installation .................. 12-34
Backlash Adjustment ................... 12-17 Rear Drive Shaft and Axle 12
Tooth Contact Adjustment............ 12-18 Removal .................................... 12-34
Bevel Gear Inspection.................. 12-21 Rear Drive Shaft and Axle
Differential Gear Inspection ......... 12-21 Installation ................................. 12-35
Tapered Roller Bearing Drive Shaft and Axle Inspection... 12-35
Inspection.................................. 12-21 Dust Boot Inspection.................... 12-36
Ball Bearing Inspection ................ 12-21 Front Axle Joint Boot
Oil Seal Inspection ....................... 12-21 Replacement ............................. 12-36
Bevel Gear Case ............................... 12-22 Ball Bearing Inspection ................ 12-42
Bevel Gear Case Removal .......... 12-22 Grease Seal Inspection................ 12-43
12-2 FINAL DRIVE
Exploded View
FINAL DRIVE 12-3
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Differential Case Cap Bolts 32 3.3 24 L
2 Front Axle Cap Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
3 Gear Case Bracket Bolts 44 4.5 32
4 Gear Case Mounting Nuts 44 4.5 32 R
5 Oil Drain Plug 20 2.0 15
6 Oil Filler Cap 29 3.0 21
7 Pinion Gear Bearing Housing Nuts 25 2.5 18
8 Pinion Gear Slotted Nut 118 12.0 87.0 MO
9 Ring Gear Bolts 82 8.4 61 L
10 Ring Gear Cover Bolts (M10) 47 4.8 35
11 Ring Gear Cover Bolts (M8) 25 2.5 18
G: Apply grease.
HO: Apply hypoid gear oil.
12-4 FINAL DRIVE
Exploded View
FINAL DRIVE 12-5
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Bearing Holder 118 12.0 87.0 L
2 Bevel Gear Case Bolts 22 2.2 16
3 Bevel Gear Case Holder Nuts 25 2.5 18
4 Drive Gear Nut 118 12.0 87.0 MO
5 Drive Shaft Cap Bolts 20 2.0 15
6 Driven Gear Shaft Nut 108 11.0 79.7 L
7 Grease Nipple 2.3 0.23 20 inlb G
8 Housing Locknut 118 12.0 87.0 L
9 Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Cover Bolts 3.4 0.35 30 inlb
10 Speed Sensor Bolt 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
11. KAF950G9 GC/HA
12. EUR Model
G: Apply grease.
12-6 FINAL DRIVE
Specifications

Front Final Gear Case
Gear Case Oil:
Type Hypoid gear oil for LSD
(Limited Slip Differential gears)
Oil Level Filler opening level
LSD Clutch Torque 7.8 13 Nm
(0.8 1.3 kgfm, 69 115 inlb)
Outside Friction Plate 2.3 2.4 mm (0.091 0.094 in.) 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
Thickness
Inside Friction Plate Thickness 2.7 2.8 mm (0.106 0.110 in.) 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
Pinion Gear Bearing Preload 1.5 3.0 N (0.15 0.31 kgf, 0.34 0.67 lb)
Pinion Gear Bearing Preload 0.3 0.6 Nm (0.03 0.06 kgfm, 2.6 5.2
Torque inlb)
Bevel Gear Backlash 0.14 0.69 mm (0.0055 0.0271 in.)
(at ditch portion of the pinion gear slotted
nut)
Bevel Gear Case
Bevel Gear Backlash 0.07 0.15 mm (0.0028 0.0059 in.)
(at middle of gear dog side on drive gear
shaft)
FINAL DRIVE 12-7
Special Tools
Bearing Puller: Socket Wrench:
57001-135 57001-1283
Outside Circlip Pliers: Pinion Gear Holder, m1.0:

57001-144 57001-1285
Oil Seal & Bearing Remover: Hexagon Wrench, Hex 40:

57001-1058 57001-1324
Bearing Driver Set: Socket Wrench:

57001-1129 57001-1363
Pinion Gear Holder: Transmission Gear Holder:

57001-1281 57001-1676
12-8 FINAL DRIVE
Front Final Gear Case Oil Level Inspection
Park the vehicle so that it is level, both side-to-side and
front-to-rear.
Remove:
Front Final Gear Case Skid Plate Nuts and Bolts [A]
Front Final Gear Case Skid Plate [B]
Remove the filler cap [A].

NOTICE
Be careful not to allow any dirt or foreign materials
to enter the gear case.
Check the oil level. The oil level should come to the bot-
tom of the filler opening [A].
If it is insufficient, first check the front final gear case for
oil leakage, remedy it if necessary, and add oil through
the filler opening. Use the same type and brand of oil that
is already in the final gear case.
Be sure the O-ring [B] is in place, and tighten the filler cap.
Torque - Oil Filler Cap: 29 Nm (3.0 kgfm, 21 ftlb)
Replace the front final gear case skid plate nuts with new
ones and install the skid plate.
Front Final Gear Case Oil Change
Refer to the Front Final Gear Case Oil Change in the Pe-
riodic Maintenance chapter.
FINAL DRIVE 12-9
Front Final Gear Case Removal
Drain the front final gear case oil (see Front Final Gear
Case Oil Change in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Remove:
Radiator (see Radiator Removal in the Cooling System
chapter)
Propeller Shafts (see Propeller Shaft Removal)
Front Axles (see Front Axle Removal)
Vent Hose [A]
Front Final Gear Case Mounting Bolts and Nuts [B]
Collar [C]
Remove:
Front Final Gear Case Bracket Bolts [A]
Front Final Gear Case Bracket [B]
Remove the front final gear case [A] upward, together with
the mounting bolt [B].
Front Final Gear Case Installation

Run the gear case vent hose correctly (see Cable, Wire,
and Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter).
Replace the gear case mounting nuts with new ones.
Tighten:
Torque - Gear Case Bracket Bolts: 44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 32
ftlb)
Gear Case Mounting Nuts: 44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 32
ftlb)
Adjust the front final gear case oil (see Front Final Gear
Case Oil Change in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
12-10 FINAL DRIVE
Front Final Gear Case Disassembly
Remove:
Front Final Gear Case (see Front Final Gear Case Re-
moval)
Bearing Housing Nuts [A]
Pinion Gear Unit [B]
Remove the spacers [A] on both sides.

bolts [B]. ring gear cover bolts, starting with the smaller
Remove the
Larger Bolts [C]

Ring Gear Cover [D]
Remove
[B].
the ring gear [A] together with the differential unit
Front Final Gear Case Assembly

Visually check the pinion gear and ring gear for scoring,
chipping, or other damage.
Replace the bevel gears as a set if either gear is damaged
since they are lapped as a set in the factory to get the best
tooth contact.
Install:
Differential Unit and Ring Gear
Ring Gear Shim [B]
Ring Gear Cover
First tighten the 10 mm (0.39 in.) bolts, then tighten the 8
mm (0.31 in.) bolts.
Torque - Ring Gear Cover Bolts (M10): 47 Nm (4.8 kgfm,
35 ftlb)
Ring Gear Cover Bolts (M8): 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18
ftlb)
FINAL DRIVE 12-11
Install the pinion gear unit with the ring gear side of the
case facing down.
Align the air vent
Tighten: passage [B] with the hose nipple [C].
Torque - Pinion Gear Bearing Housing Nuts: 25 Nm (2.5

kgfm, 18 ftlb)
Adjust:
Front Final Gear Backlash (see Backlash Adjustment)
Front Final Gear Tooth Contact (see Tooth Contact Ad-
justment)
Differential Unit and Ring Gear Disassembly
Remove the differential unit and ring gear (see Front Final
Gear Case Disassembly).
NOTICE
Do not interchange the right and left side parts in
the differential unit.
Remove
unit.
the following parts to disassemble the differential
Differential Case Cap Bolts [A]

Differential Case Cap [B]
clutch plates, springs, spring shims and side gears
The
come out.
Differential Unit and Ring Gear Assembly
Inspect the clutch plates (see LSD Clutch Plate Inspec-
tion) and the other differential unit parts. Replace any
damaged parts.
Measure and record the thickness of the original clutch
spring shim.
Apply specified gear oil to the differential unit parts.
Note direction and position of the friction plate and the
clutch spring.
Clutch Spring Shim [A]
Clutch Spring [B]
Outside Friction Plate [C]
Steel Plate [D]
Inside Friction Plate [E]
Be sure to assemble the differential unit and inspect the

clutch torque (see LSD Clutch Torque Inspection).
Tighten:
Torque - Differential Case Cap Bolts: 32 Nm (3.3 kgfm, 24
ftlb)
12-12 FINAL DRIVE
If the ring gear is removed, install it as follows.
Insert the pin [A] to the hole of the ring gear [B] and dif-
ferential case [C].
the ring gear bolts.
Tighten:
Torque - Ring Gear Bolts: 82 Nm (8.4 kgfm, 61 ftlb)
LSD Clutch Torque Inspection

After assembling the differential unit and ring gear, check
the LSD clutch torque.
Insert both front axles [A] in the differential unit [B].
Install thelefthubfront
Hold the axles (ring gear side) with a vise.
Measure the clutchontorque
nut the other axle.
Turn the wrench at 180 degree/5 using a torque wrench [C]
seconds of rotation
speed.
LSD Clutch Torque
Standard: 7.8 13 Nm (0.8 1.3 kgfm, 69 115
inlb)
If the clutch torque is out of the specified range, disas-
semble the differential unit (see Differential Unit and Ring
Gear Disassembly) and replace either of the clutch spring
shim.
Also, check the clutch plates and replace them as neces-
sary (see LSD Clutch Plate Inspection).
To increase clutch torque, increase the thickness of the
shim.
Change the thickness a little at a time.
Recheck the clutch torque and readjust as necessary.
1.2 mm (0.047 in.) 92180-1374
1.3 mm (0.051 in.) 92180-0293
1.4 mm (0.055 in.) 92180-1375
1.5 mm (0.059 in.) 92180-0294
1.6 mm (0.063 in.) 92180-1376
1.7 mm (0.067 in.) 92180-0295
1.8 mm (0.071 in.) 92180-1377
1.9 mm (0.075 in.) 92180-0296
2.0 mm (0.079 in.) 92180-0275
FINAL DRIVE 12-13
LSD Clutch Plate Inspection
Visually inspect the friction plates and steel plates to see
if they show any signs of seizure, overheating, or uneven
wear.
If any plates show signs of damage, or if the friction plates
have worn past the service limit, replace the friction plates
and steel plates as a set.
Outside Friction Plate [A]
Inside Friction Plate [B]
Outside Friction Plate Thickness
Standard: 2.3 2.4 mm (0.091 0.094 in.)
Inside Friction Plate Thickness

Standard: 2.7 2.8 mm (0.106 0.110 in.)
Pinion Gear Unit Disassembly

Remove the pinion gear unit (see Front Final Gear Case
Disassembly).
Pry open the toothed washer tab [A] on the pinion gear
slotted nut [B].
Unscrew the pinion gear slotted nut.

Special Tools - Pinion Gear Holder [A]: 57001-1281
Socket Wrench [B]: 57001-1283
Remove the slotted nut, flat washer and toothed washer.
Remove the tapered
Pull the pinion gear out of the bearing housing.
sary. roller bearing inner race as neces-
Special Tool - Bearing Puller: 57001-135
Pinion Gear Unit Assembly

The pinion gear and ring gear are lapped as a set in the
factory to get the best tooth contact. They must be re-
placed as a set.
Visually inspect the tapered roller bearings for abrasion,
color change, or other damage.
If there is any doubt as to the condition of a bearing, re-
place the bearing housing and the bearings as a set.
Be sure to check and adjust the pinion gear bearing
preload and the bevel gear backlash and tooth contact,
when any of the backlash-related parts are replaced (see
Front Final Bevel Gear Adjustment).
When the pinion gear slotted nut is loosened, even if the
purpose is not to replace the parts, check and adjust the
bearing preload.
12-14 FINAL DRIVE
Fit the toothed washer claw [A] into the shaft.

and seating
Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution to the threads
surface of the pinion gear slotted nut, and
tighten it.
Torque - Pinion Gear Slotted Nut: 118 Nm (12.0 kgfm, 87.0
ftlb)
If none of the toothed washer tabs [B] align, tighten the
nut further just enough to align one of the tabs with a slot
[C] in the nut.
Bend the tab over the nut.
Front Final Bevel Gear Adjustment
In order to prevent one gear from moving away from the
other gear under load, the tapered roller bearings must be
properly preloaded. Also the backlash (distance one gear
will move back and forth without moving the other gear) and
tooth contact pattern of the bevel gears must be correct to
prevent the gears from making noise and being damaged.
Above three adjustments are of critical importance and
must be carried out following the correct sequence and
method.
When any one of the backlash-related parts are replaced
or the pinion gear nut is loosened; even if the purpose
is not to replace the parts, check and adjust the bearing
preload, the bevel gear backlash, and tooth contact by
replacing shims.
The amount of backlash is influenced by the ring gear
position more than by the pinion gear position.
Tooth contact location is influenced by pinion gear posi-
tion more than by ring gear position.
FINAL DRIVE 12-15
Bearing Preload Adjustment
Check and adjust the bearing preload in the following
cases.
When any of the parts listed below are replaced with new
ones.
Pinion Gear
Collar
Shim
Tapered Roller Bearings
Pinion Gear Bearing Housing [A]
Oil Seal Collar
When the pinion gear slotted nut [B] is loosened; even if
the nut is not removed.
Install the pinion gear bearing housing and tighten the
pinion gear slotted nut to the specified torque (see Pinion
Gear Unit Assembly).
Do not install the oil seal and O-rings, and do not lock the
washer until the correct bearing preload is obtained.
NOTICE
To start with, choose a shim or collar so that the
bearings are just SNUG with NO play but also with
NO preload.
An over-preload on the bearings could damage the
bearings.
Apply specified gear oil to the bearings, and turn the gears
more than 5 turns to allow the bearings to seat.
Measure the bearing preload. Bearing preload is the force
or torque which is needed to start the gear shaft turning.
NOTE
Preload can be measured either with a spring scale or
a beam-type torque wrench. When measured with a
spring scale, the preload is designated by force (N, kgf,
lb), and when measured with a torque wrench, it is des-
ignated by torque (Nm, kgfm, inlb).
12-16 FINAL DRIVE
FINAL DRIVE 12-17
If the preload is out of the specified range, replace the
collar and/or shim(s).
To increase preload, decrease the size of the shim(s)
or collar. To decrease preload, increase the size of the
shim(s) or collar.
Recheck the bearing preload, and readjust as necessary.
Measure the bearing preload using a spring scale.

Using Spring Scale
Pinion Gear Bearing Preload:
1.5 3.0 N (0.15 0.31 kgf, 0.34 0.67 lb)
Hook the spring scale [A] on the handle at a point 200
mm (7.87 in.) [B] apart from the center of the gear shaft.
Hold the bearing housing in a vise so that the gear shaft
is vertical.
Apply force to the handle horizontally and at a right angle
to it.
Special Tool - Pinion Gear Holder [C]: 57001-1281
Measure the bearing preload using a torque wrench [A].

Using Torque Wrench
Pinion Gear Bearing Preload Torque:
0.3 0.6 Nm (0.03 0.06 kgfm, 2.6 5.2 inlb)
Special Tool - Pinion Gear Holder [B]: 57001-1281
Backlash Adjustment
Check and adjust the gear backlash when any of the
backlash-related parts are replaced with new ones.
Clean any dirt and oil off the bevel gear teeth.
Case Assembly).
Assemble the front final gear case (see Front Final Gear
Do not install the O-rings during adjust-
ment.
Check the backlash during tightening of the ring gear
cover bolts and stop tightening them immediately if the
backlash disappears. Then, change the ring gear shim
to a thinner one.
Set up a dial gauge against the ditch portion [A] of the

pinion gear slotted nut [B] to check gear backlash shown.
To measure the backlash, move the pinion gear back
and forth while holding the left front axle (ring gear side)
steady. The difference between the highest and the low-
est gauge reading is the amount of backlash.
Measure the backlash at four locations of the nut.
12-18 FINAL DRIVE
If the backlash is not within the limit, replace the ring gear
shims. To increase backlash, decrease the thickness of
the shim(s). To decrease backlash, increase the thick-
ness of the shim(s).
Recheck the backlash, and readjust as necessary.
Move the pinion gear [A] back and forth.

Dial Gauge [B]
Bevel Gear Backlash
Standard: 0.14 0.69 mm (0.0055 0.0271 in.) (at
ditch portion of the pinion gear slotted
nut)
Tooth Contact Adjustment

gear.
Apply checking compound to 4 or 5 teeth on the pinion
NOTE
Apply checking compound to the teeth in a thin, even
coat with a fairly stiff paint brush. If painted too thickly,
the exact tooth pattern may not appear.
The checking compound must be smooth and firm, with
the consistency of tooth paste.
Special compounds are available from automotive sup-
ply stores for the purpose of checking differential gear
tooth patterns and contact. Use one of these for check-
ing the bevel gears.
FINAL DRIVE 12-19
Assemble the front final gear case (see Front Final Gear
Case Assembly). Do not install the O-rings during adjust-
ment.
Turn the pinion gear shaft for one revolution in the drive
and reverse (coast) direction, while creating a drag on the
ring gear.
Use the pinion gear holder [A] and the left front axle.
Special Tool - Pinion Gear Holder: 57001-1281
Remove the ring gear and pinion gear unit to check the
drive pattern and coast pattern of the bevel gear teeth.
The tooth contact patterns of both (drive and coast) sides
should be centrally located between the top and bottom
of the tooth. The drive pattern can be a little closer to the
toe and the coast pattern can be a somewhat longer and
closer to the toe.
If the tooth contact pattern is incorrect, replace the pinion
gear shim(s), following the examples shown.
Then erase the tooth contact patterns and check them
again. Also check the backlash every time the shim(s)
are replaced. Repeat the shim change procedure as nec-
essary.
NOTE
If the backlash is out of the standard range after
changing the pinion gear shim(s), change the ring gear
shim(s) to correct the backlash before checking the
tooth contact pattern.
12-20 FINAL DRIVE
FINAL DRIVE 12-21
Bevel Gear Inspection
Visually check the bevel gears [A] for scoring, chipping,
or other damage.
Replace the bevel gears as a set if either gear is dam-
aged.
Differential Gear Inspection

Visually check the differential gears [A] for scoring, chip-
ping, or other damage.
Also, inspect the differential pinion gear shaft [B] and gear
housing [C] where the differential gears rub.
If they are scored, discolored, or otherwise damaged, re-
place them as a set.
Tapered Roller Bearing Inspection

Visually inspect the bearings
change, or other damage.
[A] for abrasion, color
If there is any doubt as to the condition of a bearing, re-

place it.

Since the ball bearings are made to extremely close toler-
ances, the wear must be judged by feel rather than mea-
surement. Clean each bearing in a high flash-point sol-
vent, dry it (do not spin the bearing while it is dry), and oil
it with engine oil.
Spin [A] the bearing by hand to check its condition.
If the bearing [B] is noisy, does not spin smoothly, or has
any rough spots, replace it.
Oil Seal Inspection

Visually inspect the oil seal.
otherwise damaged.
12-22 FINAL DRIVE
Bevel Gear Case
Bevel Gear Case Removal
Remove:
ter)
Propeller Shaft (see Propeller Shaft Removal)
Right Rear Wheel (see Wheel Removal in the
Wheels/Tires chapter)
Speed Sensor Lead Connector [A]
Bevel Gear Case Bolts [B]
Bevel Gear Case [C]
Bevel Gear Case Installation
Check and adjust the bevel gear backlash and tooth con-
tact when any of the backlash-related parts are replaced
(see Bevel Gear Adjustment).
Replace the bevel gear case gasket [A] with a new one.
Check to see that the bevel gear case dowel pin [B] is in
place.
Tighten:
Torque - Bevel Gear Case Bolts: 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16 ftlb)
Bevel Gear Case Disassembly

Remove:
Speed Sensor (see Speed Sensor Removal in the Elec-
trical System chapter)
Holder Nuts [A]
Covers [B]
Holder [C]
If the driven gear assembly is to be disassembled, loosen

the housing locknut [A].
Special Tools - Pinion Gear Holder [B]: 57001-1281
Socket Wrench [C]: 57001-1363
FINAL DRIVE 12-23
Bevel Gear Case
Remove:
Driven Gear Assembly [A]
Driven Gear Shim(s) [B]
Remove:
Housing Locknut
Bearing Housing [A]
Special Tools - Pinion Gear Holder [B]: 57001-1281
Socket Wrench [C]: 57001-1363
Remove the driven gear shaft nut [A].

Special Tool - Pinion Gear Holder [B]: 57001-1281
Pressing the spring seat [C], remove the driven gear shaft
nut.
Remove the bearing holder [A].

Special Tool - Hexagon Wrench, Hex 40 [B]: 57001-1324
Remove the ball bearings.
Special Tools - Oil Seal & Bearing Remover: 57001-1058
Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129
Bevel Gear Case Assembly

Install the housing locknut [A] so that the chamfered side
[B] faces to the bearing.
the following parts.
Driven Gear Shaft Nut
Bearing Holder
Housing Locknut
Tighten:
Torque - Driven Gear Shaft Nut: 108 Nm (11.0 kgfm, 79.7
ftlb)
Bearing Holder: 118 Nm (12.0 kgfm, 87.0 ftlb)
Housing Locknut: 118 Nm (12.0 kgfm, 87.0 ftlb)
12-24 FINAL DRIVE
Bevel Gear Case
Apply grease to the oil seal lips [A].

Tighten:
Torque - Bevel Gear Case Holder Nuts: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm,
18 ftlb)
Drive Bevel Gear Removal

Remove the hi/low gear case (see Hi/Low Gear and Shift
Mechanism Removal in the Transmission chapter).
Hold the transmission gear holder [A] in a vise.
Special Tool - Transmission Gear Holder: 57001-1676
Set the hi/low gear case [A] onto the gear holder.
Remove the drive gear nut [B].
Remove:
Drive Gear [A]
Drive Gear Shim(s) [B]
Drive Gear Shaft [C]
Drive Bevel Gear Installation

Check and adjust the bevel gear backlash and tooth con-
tact when any of the backlash-related parts are replaced
(see Bevel Gear Adjustment).
Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution to the seating sur-
face of the drive gear nut.
Tighten:
Torque - Drive Gear Nut: 118 Nm (12.0 kgfm, 87.0 ftlb)
FINAL DRIVE 12-25
Bevel Gear Case
Bevel Gear Adjustment
In order to prevent one gear from moving away from the
other gear under load, the backlash and tooth contact
pattern of the bevel gears must be correct to prevent the
gears from making noise and being damaged.
When replacing any one of the backlash-related parts, be
sure to check and adjust the backlash and tooth contact.
First adjust the backlash, and then tooth contact by replac-
ing shims.
These two adjustments are of critical importance and
must be carried out in the correct sequence, using the
procedures shown.
Backlash Adjustment
Check and adjust the gear backlash when any of the
backlash-related parts are replaced with new ones.
Install the drive gear with the primary shim and assemble
the driven gear with the primary shim. Do not install the
bevel gear case holder during adjustment.
Install the bevel gear case and tighten the case bolts.
Check the backlash while tightening the case bolts. Stop
tightening them immediately if the backlash disappears
and change the shim to a thinner one.
Hold the driven gear shaft [A] with a vice.

Protect the driven gear shaft with aluminum plates [B].
Set up a dial gauge [C] against the middle point [D] of the
gear dog side [E].
The middle point is position at about 23.5 mm (0.925 in.)
[F] from center.
Gear Dog [G]
To measure the backlash, turn the shaft clockwise and
counterclockwise. The distance between the highest and
lowest gauge reading is the amount of backlash.
If the backlash is not within the limit, replace the shim(s)
at the drive and/or driven gear. To increase backlash, de-
crease the thickness of the shim(s). To decrease back-
lash, increase the thickness of the shim(s).
Recheck the backlash, and readjust as necessary.
Bevel Gear Backlash
Standard: 0.15 0.59 mm (0.0059 0.0232 in.) (at
middle of gear dog side on drive gear
shaft)
12-26 FINAL DRIVE
Bevel Gear Case
Bevel Gear Case (Backlash-Related Parts)
1. Driven Gear Shim(s) 7. Driven Bevel Gear

2. Drive Gear Shim(s) 8. Hi/Low Gear Case
3. Driven Gear Shaft 9. Drive Gear Shaft
4. Bearing Housing 10. Ball Bearing
5. Bevel Gear Case 11. Gasket
6. Ball Bearing 12. Drive Bevel Gear
1. Driven Gear Shims

0.1 mm (0.004 in.) 92025-1859
0.15 mm (0.006 in.) 92025-1860
0.5 mm (0.020 in.) 92025-1861
0.8 mm (0.031 in.) 92025-1862
1.0 mm (0.039 in.) (primary) 92025-1858
1.2 mm (0.047 in.) 92025-1863
FINAL DRIVE 12-27
Bevel Gear Case
2. Drive Gear Shims
0.15 mm (0.006 in.) 92025-1573
0.2 mm (0.008 in.) 92025-1574
0.7 mm (0.028 in.) 92025-1534
0.8 mm (0.031 in.) 92180-0288
0.9 mm (0.035 in.) 92180-0289
1.0 mm (0.039 in.) (primary) 92180-0290
1.1 mm (0.043 in.) 92025-1575
1.2 mm (0.047 in.) 92180-0291
1.3 mm (0.051 in.) 92025-1533
Tooth Contact Adjustment
bevel gear. compound to 4 or 5 teeth on the driven
Apply checking
NOTE
Apply checking compound to the teeth in a thin, even
coat with a fairly stiff paint brush. If painted too thickly,
the exact tooth pattern may not appear.
The checking compound must be smooth and firm with
the consistency of tooth paste.
Special compounds are available from automotive sup-
ply stores for the purpose of checking differential gear
tooth patterns and contact. Use this for checking the
bevel gears.
Turn the driven bevel gear for 3 or 4 turns in the drive and
reverse (coast) directions, while creating a drag on the
drive bevel gear.
Check the drive pattern and coast pattern of the bevel
gear teeth. The tooth contact patterns of both drive and
coast sides should be centrally located between the top
and bottom of the tooth, and a little closer to the toe of the
tooth.
If the tooth contact pattern is incorrect, replace the shim(s)
at the drive bevel gear and shim(s) at the driven bevel
gear, following the examples shown. Then erase the tooth
contact patterns, and check them again. Also check the
backlash every time the shims are replaced. Repeat the
shim change procedure as necessary.
NOTE
If the backlash is out of the standard range after chang-
ing shims, correct the backlash before checking the
tooth contact pattern.
Drive Bevel Gear [A]
Driven Bevel Gear [B]
Bottom [C]
Top [D]
Heel [E]
Toe [F]
12-28 FINAL DRIVE
Bevel Gear Case
Incorrect Tooth Contact Patterns
Example 1: Increase the thickness of the drive bevel gear
shim(s) by 0.05 mm (0.002 in.), and/or increase the thick-
ness of the driven bevel gear shim(s) by 0.05 mm (0.002
in.) to correct the pattern shown below. Repeat in 0.05 mm
(0.002 in.) steps if necessary.
Bottom [C]
Top [D]
Heel [E]
Toe [F]
Example 2: Decrease the thickness of the drive bevel gear

shim(s) by 0.05 mm (0.002 in.), and/or decrease the thick-
ness of the driven bevel gear shim(s) by 0.05 mm (0.002
in.) to correct the pattern shown below. Repeat in 0.05 mm
(0.002 in.) steps if necessary.
Bottom [C]
Top [D]
Heel [E]
Toe [F]
FINAL DRIVE 12-29
Bevel Gear Case
Bevel Gear Inspection
Visually check the bevel gears [A] for scoring, chipping,
or other damage.
Replace the bevel gears as a set if either gear is dam-
aged.

it with engine oil.
Oil Seal Inspection

Inspect the oil seals.
otherwise damaged.
Damper Inspection
Visually inspect the driven bevel gear [A], cam follower
[B], spring [C] and shaft [D].
Replace any part that appears damaged.
12-30 FINAL DRIVE
Propeller Shafts
Propeller Shaft Removal
Remove:
Fuel Tank (see Fuel Tank Removal in the Fuel System
chapter)
Tapping Screws [A]
Plate [B]
Remove the tapping screws [A].
Remove the water pipe bracket bolts [A].
Remove the water pipe bracket bolt [A].
Remove:
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Mounting Bolts [A] and
Nuts
Washers
Collars
FINAL DRIVE 12-31
Propeller Shafts
Move the water pipe [A] and the propeller shaft bearing
housing [B] to the outside [C].
Remove:
Rear Propeller Shaft [D]
Front Propeller Shaft
Propeller Shaft Installation

Wipe the old grease off the splines of the propeller shafts,
and grease to them.
Inspect
tion).
the propeller shafts (see Propeller Shaft Inspec-

Apply grease to the new O-ring on the front pinion gear.
Put thethepropeller
Install front propeller shaft yoke [B] on the pinion gear.
position. shaft bearing housing [C] at fully outside
Install the rear propeller shaft yoke [D] on the rear driven
gear shaft so that the thin side [E] of the propeller shaft
positions to the rearward.
Install the rear propeller shaft yoke [F] on the front pro-
peller shaft rear end [G], aligning the yoke angles [H] of
the front and rear propeller shafts.
Parallel [I] the propeller shaft bearing housing [J] with the
mounting bracket [K].
Make the 3 mm (0.12 in.) clearance [L] between the yoke
[B] of the front propeller shaft and the front pinion gear nut
[M].
Replace the propeller shaft bearing housing nuts [Q] with
new ones.
Install:
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Bolts [N]
Washers [O]
Collars [P]
Nuts
12-32 FINAL DRIVE
Propeller Shafts
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Removal

Remove:
Front Propeller Shaft (see Propeller Shaft Removal)
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Cover Bolts [A] (Both
Sides)
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Covers [B] (Both Sides)
Wipe off the grease.

Remove:
Stop Screws [A]
Front Propeller Shaft [B]
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing [C]
FINAL DRIVE 12-33
Propeller Shafts
Wipe off the grease.

Remove the circlip [A].
Remove the propeller shaft bearing housing cover [B].
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Installation

Clean the front propeller shaft by wiping off the used
grease on it.
Install:
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Cover [A]
New Circlip
Insert the front propeller shaft in the propeller shaft bear-
ing housing [B].
Tighten:
Torque - Stop Screws: 3.9 Nm (0.40 kgfm, 35 inlb)
Apply grease about 8 g (0.28 oz) [C] into each cover.
Install:
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Covers [A]
Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Cover Bolts [B] (Both
Sides)
Tighten:
Torque - Propeller Shaft Bearing Housing Cover Bolts: 3.4
Nm (0.35 kgfm, 30 inlb)
Propeller Shaft Inspection

Visually inspect the splines of the propeller shafts.
If they are twisted, badly worn, or chipped, replace the
shafts.
Check that the universal joint works smoothly without rat-
tling or sticking.
If it does not, the bearings of the joint are damaged. Re-
place the propeller shaft with a new one.
12-34 FINAL DRIVE
Drive Shaft and Axles
Front Axle Removal
Remove:
Steering Knuckle (see Steering Knuckle Removal in the
Steering chapter)
Front Axle Cap Bolts [A]
Front Axle [B]
Front Axle Installation

Wipe the old grease off the splines of the axle and cap oil
seal, and grease them.
Inspect the axle (see Drive Shaft and Axle Inspection).
cess of the
Be sure to install the spacer [A] and O-ring [B] in the re-
front final gear case.
Tighten:
Torque - Front Axle Cap Bolts: 8.8 Nm (0.90 kgfm, 78 inlb)
Rear Drive Shaft and Axle Removal

Remove:
Rear Wheels (see Wheel Removal in the Wheels/Tires
chapter)
Rear Brake Drums (see Brake Drum Removal in the
Brakes chapter)
Rear Brake Panel Assemblies (with Brake Pipes and
Hoses)
Leaf Springs (see Leaf Spring Removal in the Suspen-
sion chapter)
Rubber Bands [A]
Axles [B] and Axle Bracket [C]
Slide the dust boots [D] from the drive shafts [E], and pull
the one of the axles from the drive shaft, and then the
other axle from the shaft.
Tap [A] the outside of the rear axle [B], and pull it out from
the inside.
FINAL DRIVE 12-35
Remove:
Drive Shaft Cap Bolts [A]
Drive Shaft [B] and Cap [C]
Set the differential shift lever into the UN-LOCK position.
Rear Drive Shaft and Axle Installation

Wipe the old grease off the splines [A] of the drive shafts,
axles, and cap oil seals, and grease them.
Inspect the drive shafts and axles (see Drive Shaft and
Axle Inspection).
Align the yoke angles of the drive shaft and axle.
Replace the drive shaft cap gasket with a new one.
If the dust boot was removed, install it on the axle so that

the small hole [A] in the boot is toward the axle side.
Adjust the transmission oil (see Transmission Oil Change
Drive Shaft and Axle Inspection

Visually inspect the splines of the drive shaft and axle.
If they are twisted, badly worn, or chipped, replace the
drive shaft and/or axle with a new one.
Check that the universal joint and/or ball joint works
smoothly without rattling or sticking.
If it does not, the bearings of the joint are damaged. Re-
place the drive shaft and/or axle with a new one.
12-36 FINAL DRIVE
Dust Boot Inspection
Visually inspect the boots [A] in accordance with the Peri-
odic Maintenance Chart or if the drive shafts or axles are
noisy during operation.
If the dust boot is torn, worn, deteriorated, or leaks
grease, replace it.
Front Axle Joint Boot Replacement

Outboard Joint Boot Removal
Remove:
Front Axle (see Front Axle Removal)
Tap the joint portion of the bands [A] with a suitable tool.
Scrap the removed boot bands.
Slide the joint boot [B] toward the inboard joint.
Tap the bearing housing [A] straight [B] with a plastic ham-
mer to separate it from the shaft.
NOTICE
Do not tap on the cage. Be careful not get hurt when
the housing comes out. If the splined portion of
shaft cracked or damaged during disassembling of
outboard joint, do not reuse the shaft.
Remove:
Circlip [A]
Boot [B]
FINAL DRIVE 12-37
Outboard Joint Boot Installation
Clean the axle shaft by wiping off the used grease on it.
Wind the tape on the splines of the axle shaft in order to
protect the joint boot.
Install:
New Small Band [A]
New Boot [B]
Apply the special grease slightly on the inside of the new
boot small diameter, and install the boot on the axle shaft.
NOTICE
Only the special grease that is included with the
boot kit can be applied to the boots.
Install:
New Circlip [C]
Place the special grease tube nozzle in the bore of the

housing and squeeze the tube [A] until the grease comes
out from the joint bearing.
Tap the shaft end [A] straight with a plastic hammer until
it is locked by the circlip.
Squeeze all of the special grease into the bearing housing

[A] and new boot [B].
12-38 FINAL DRIVE
Pinch the small boot band [A] with a suitable tool [B] to
install it.
Compress the axle assembly to the specified length while

relieving the air pressure inside the boot.
Hold the axle at this setting.
Standard Length of Assembling:
Outboard: 254.5 mm (10.020 in.) [A]
Slightly open [A] the larger diameter end of the joint boot
to equalize the air pressure inside the boot.
Pinch
it.
the boot bands [A] with a suitable tool [B] to install
Compress the suitable tool with a vice, if necessary.
Be sure outside diameter of the band [A] is less than the

maximum diameter.
Maximum Outside Diameter of Band: 75.9 mm (2.99 in.)
FINAL DRIVE 12-39
Inboard Joint Boot Removal
Remove:
Circlip [A]
Remove:
Collar [C]
Cap [D]
Remove:
Tap the joint portion of the bands [A] with a suitable tool.
Slide the
Scrap the removed boot bands.
joint boot [B] toward the outboard joint.
Remove the retaining ring [A].

Separate the bearing cup from the axle shaft.
Remove the steel balls [A].

Slide the cage [B] toward the outboard joint.
Remove:
Circlip [A]
12-40 FINAL DRIVE
Remove:
Inner Race [A]
Cage [B]
Inboard Joint Boot [C]
Inboard Joint Boot Installation

Install:
New Small Band [A]
New Inboard Joint Boot [B]
Cage [C]
Install the inner race [A] so that the flat serration side [B]
faces outboard joint.
Install:
Circlip [A]
Slide the cage [B] on the inner race and install the steel
balls [C].
Apply the special grease [A] to the steel balls and cage.
FINAL DRIVE 12-41
Squeeze about half a tube (30 grams) of the special

grease [A] into the bearing cup [B].
Insert the balls and cage assembly in the bearing cup
strongly.
Install the axle shaft [A] into the bearing cap [B].
Install the new retaining ring [A] so that the opening [B] is
aligned with one of the projections [C].
Squeeze the remaining special grease into the bearing

cup [A] and new joint boot [B].
Pinch the small boot band [A] with a suitable tool [B] to
install it.
12-42 FINAL DRIVE
Compress the axle assembly to the specified length while

relieving the air pressure inside the boot.
Hold the axle at this setting.
Standard Length of Assembling:
Outboard 210..3 mm (8.280 in.) [A]
Slightly open [A] the larger diameter end of the joint boot
to equalize the air pressure inside the boot.
Pinch
them.
the boot bands [A] with a suitable tool [B] to install
Compress the suitable tool with a vice, if necessary.
Be sure the outside diameter of the band [A] is less than

the maximum diameter.
Maximum Outside Diameter of Band: 68.9 mm (2.71 in.)

it with engine oil.
FINAL DRIVE 12-43
Grease Seal Inspection
Visually inspect the grease seals.
Replace if the lips are misshapen, discolored (indicating
that the rubber has deteriorated), hardened, or been oth-
erwise damage.
BRAKES 13-1
Brakes
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 13-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 13-6
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 13-7
Brake Fluid ............................................................................................................................. 13-8
Brake Fluid Recommendation........................................................................................... 13-8
Brake Fluid Level Inspection............................................................................................. 13-8
Brake Fluid Change .......................................................................................................... 13-8
Brake Line Air Bleeding .................................................................................................... 13-8
Brake Pedal and Master Cylinder........................................................................................... 13-10
Brake Pedal Play Inspection ............................................................................................. 13-10
Master Cylinder Removal.................................................................................................. 13-10
Master Cylinder Installation............................................................................................... 13-10
Master Cylinder Disassembly/Assembly........................................................................... 13-10
Master Cylinder Inspection ............................................................................................... 13-11
Brake Hoses and Pipes .......................................................................................................... 13-12
Brake Hose and Pipe Inspection....................................................................................... 13-12
Brake Hose and Pipe Replacement.................................................................................. 13-12
Brake Drums........................................................................................................................... 13-13
Brake Drum Removal........................................................................................................ 13-13
Brake Drum Installation..................................................................................................... 13-13
Brake Drum Wear ............................................................................................................. 13-14
Brake Panel Assemblies......................................................................................................... 13-15
Brake Panel Assy Removal .............................................................................................. 13-15
Brake Panel Assy Installation ........................................................................................... 13-16
Brake Panel Disassembly ................................................................................................. 13-16
Brake Panel Assembly...................................................................................................... 13-18 13
Wheel Cylinder Removal/Installation ................................................................................ 13-20
Wheel Cylinder Assembly ................................................................................................. 13-20
Wheel Cylinder Inspection ................................................................................................ 13-21
Brake Shoe Lining Wear ................................................................................................... 13-21
Brake Shoe Spring Inspection .......................................................................................... 13-21
Grease Seal Replacement................................................................................................ 13-22
Parking Brake Lever and Cables............................................................................................ 13-23
Parking Brake Lever Travel Adjustment ........................................................................... 13-23
Parking Brake Cable Lubrication/Inspection ..................................................................... 13-23
13-2 BRAKES
Exploded View
BRAKES 13-3
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Bleed Valves 5.4 0.55 48 inlb
2 Brake Hose Banjo Bolts 25 2.5 18
3 Brake Pipe Nipples 18 1.8 13 B
4 Front Axle Nuts 196 20.0 145
5 Front Brake Panel Mounting Bolts 44 4.5 32 L
6 Front Wheel Cylinder Mounting Bolts 10.3 1.1 91 inlb
7 Master Cylinder Reservoir Cap 3.4 0.35 30 inlb
8 Piston Stop Bolt 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
9 Push Rod Locknut 17.2 1.8 13
10 Reservoir Clamp Bolt 6.1 0.62 54 inlb
11. Brake Master Cylinder
12. Brake Pedal
13. Left Front Brake Drum
14. Right Front Brake Drum
15. Bands for Breather Tube of Early Model for KAF950G9
16. Breather Tube (Early Model for KAF950G9: L = 1 480 mm (58.3 in.)
Late Model for KAF950G9 and Later Model: L = 1 100 mm (43.3 in.))
AG: Apply lithium grease (NLGI Grade No.2).
G: Apply grease.
Si: Apply silicone grease.
WL: Apply soap and water solution or rubber lubricant.
13-4 BRAKES
Exploded View
BRAKES 13-5
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Bleed Valves 5.4 0.55 48 inlb
2 Brake Pipe Nipples 18 1.8 13 B
3 Rear Axle Nuts 304 31.0 224
4 Rear Brake Panel Mounting Bolts 44 4.5 32 L
5 Rear Wheel Cylinder Mounting Nuts 7.4 0.75 65 inlb
6. Left Parking Brake Lever Linkage
7. Left Rear Brake Drum
8. Parking Brake Lever
9. Right Parking Brake Lever Linkage
10. Right Rear Brake Drum
11. White Mark
12. Yellow Mark
AG: Apply lithium grease (NLGI Grade No.2).
G: Apply grease.
13-6 BRAKES
Specifications

Brake Fluid
Type DOT3
Fluid Level Between upper and lower level lines
Brake Pedal
Brake Pedal Free Play 2 10 mm (0.08 0.39 in.)
Brake Drums
Brake Drum Inside Diameter 180.000 180.160 mm (7.0866 7.0929 in.) 180.75 mm
(7.116 in.)
Brake Panel Assemblies
Brake Shoe Lining Thickness 4.5 mm (0.18 in.) 1.0 mm
(0.04 in.)
Parking Brake Lever and Cables
Parking Brake Lever Travel 8 12 notches (clicks) at 200 N (20 kgf, 44 lb)
BRAKES 13-7
Special Tools
Clutch Spring Compressor: Brake Drum Holder:
57001-1162 57001-1325
Rotor Puller, M16/M18/M20/M22 1.5: Brake Drum Remover Nuts:

57001-1216 57001-1326
Brake Drum Remover: Grease Seal Driver Set:

57001-1260 57001-1629
Brake Drum Pusher, M18 1.5:

57001-1261
13-8 BRAKES
Brake Fluid
Brake Fluid Recommendation
Use extra heavy-duty brake fluid only from a container
marked DOT3.
Recommended Brake Fluid
Type: DOT3
WARNING
Brake fluid that is contaminated by moisture or dirt,
mixed or contains air has a lower boiling point and
can cause the brake to be ineffective or fail, and it
may cause rubber parts to deterioate, resulting in
an accident causing injury or death. Never reuse
old brake fluid. Do not use fluid from a container
that has been left unsealed or that has been open
for a long time. Do not mix two types and brands
of fluid for use in the brake. Dont leave the reser-
voir cap off for any length of time to avoid moisture
contamination of the fluid. Dont add or change the
fluid in the rain or when a strong wind is blowing.
If any of the brake line fittings or the bleed valve is
opened at any time, the AIR MUST BE BLED FROM
THE BRAKE LINE.
NOTICE
diately.
Brake Fluid Level Inspection

Refer to the Brake Fluid Level Inspection in the Periodic
Brake Fluid Change
Refer to the Brake Fluid Change in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
Brake Line Air Bleeding
Tilt up the front cargo hood and remove the maintenance
cover [A].
Level the reservoir [B] and check that there is plenty of
fluid in the reservoir.
NOTE
The fluid level must be checked several times during the
bleeding operation and replenished as necessary. If the
fluid in the reservoir runs completely out any time dur-
ing bleeding, the bleeding operation must be done over
again from the beginning since air will have entered the
line.
With the reservoir cap off, slowly pump the brake pedal
several times until no air bubbles can be seen rising up
through the fluid from the holes at the bottom of the reser-
voir. This bleeds the air from the master cylinder end of
the line.
BRAKES 13-9
Brake Fluid
Remove the wheel for extra clearance (see Wheel Re-

moval in the Wheels/Tires chapter).
Connect a clear plastic hose [A] to the bleed valve at the
wheel cylinder, and run the other end of the hose into a
container.
Brake Panel [B]
NOTE
Start with the rear left or right wheel and finish with the
front left or right wheel.
Bleed the brake line and the caliper as follows.

Repeat this operation until no more air can be seen com-
ing out into the plastic hose.
1. Pump the brake pedal [A] until it becomes hard, and
apply the brake pedal and hold it.
2. Quickly open and close the bleed valve while holding the
brake pedal applied.
3. Release the brake pedal.
Tighten:
Torque - Bleed Valves: 5.4 Nm (0.55 kgfm, 48 inlb)
Repeat the previous step for each wheel.
level in thebleeding
When air is finished, add fluid up to the upper
reservoir.
Apply the brake forcefully for a few seconds, and check
for fluid leakage around the fittings.
Torque - Master Cylinder Reservoir Cap: 3.4 Nm (0.35
kgfm, 30 inlb)
13-10 BRAKES
Brake Pedal and Master Cylinder
Brake Pedal Play Inspection
Refer to the Brake Pedal Play Inspection in the Periodic
Master Cylinder Removal
Remove:
Front Cargo Compartment (see Front Cargo Compart-
ment Removal in the Frame chapter)
Brake Hose Banjo Bolts [A]
Brake Pipe Nipple [B] (Unscrew)
NOTICE
diately.
Remove:
Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts [C]
Master Cylinder [D]
Master Cylinder Installation
Use a new flat washer on each side of the brake hose
fitting.
Apply brake fluid to the threads of the brake pipe nipple.
Tighten:
Torque - Brake Hose Banjo Bolts: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18
ftlb)
Brake Pipe Nipples: 18 Nm (1.8 kgfm, 13 ftlb)
Bleed the brake line after master cylinder installation.
Adjust the brake pedal play (see Brake Pedal Play Inspec-
Check that the brake line has proper fluid pressure and
no fluid leakage.
Master Cylinder Disassembly/Assembly
Refer to the Brake Master Cylinder Cup and Dust Seal
Replacement in the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
BRAKES 13-11
Brake Pedal and Master Cylinder
Master Cylinder Inspection
Disassemble the master cylinder (see Brake Master
Cylinder Cup and Dust Seal Replacement in the Periodic
Check that there are no scratches, rust or pitting on the
inside of the cylinder [A] and on the outside of the pistons
[B].
If the cylinder or piston shows any damage, replace them.
Inspect the primary cups [C] and secondary cups [D].
If a cup is worn, damaged, softened (rotted), or swollen,
replace it.
If fluid leakage is noted at the brake push rod, the sec-
ondary cup of the rear piston should be replaced.
Check the dust cover [E] for damage.
If it is damaged, replace it.
Check that the relief [F] and supply [G] ports are not
plugged.
If the small relief port becomes plugged, the brake shoes
will drag on the drum. Blow the ports clean with com-
pressed air.
Check the piston return springs [H] for any damage.
If the spring is damaged, replace it.
13-12 BRAKES
Brake Hoses and Pipes
Brake Hose and Pipe Inspection
Refer to the Brake Hose and Pipe Inspection in the Peri-
Brake Hose and Pipe Replacement
Refer to the Brake Hose and Pipe Replacement in the
BRAKES 13-13
Brake Drums
Brake Drum Removal
Remove:
Wheel (see Wheel Removal in the Wheels/Tires chapter)
Cotter Pin [A]
Axle Nut [B]
Loosen the axle nut, while applying the brake, and release
the brake.
You can also loosen the axle nut, using the brake drum
holder (special tool).
Special Tool - Brake Drum Holder: 57001-1325
Be sure to release the parking brake when removing the
rear brake drum.
The brake drums are press-fitted on the axles. Use the

brake drum remover set and rotor puller (special tools) to
remove the drums.
Mount the brake drum remover on the drum studs with
the remover nuts and washers (parts in the remover set).
Special Tools - Rotor Puller, M16/M18/M20/M22 1.5 [A]:
57001-1216
Brake Drum Remover [B]: 57001-1260
Brake Drum Remover Nuts [C]: 57001-1326
Washers [D] (57001-1260)
Do not remove the drum bolts. If a drum bolt is damaged,
replace the drum.
Brake Drum Installation
Apply lithium grease (NLGI Grade No.2) to the brake drum
grease seal lips [A] and inside [B] of the drum as shown
in the figure.
Grease Seal [C]
Brake Drum [D]
Do not allow grease to come in contact with the sliding
area of the brake shoes and brake drum.
Wipe off any excess grease.
Install:
Collar [A] (Rear Brake only)
Brake Drum
13-14 BRAKES
Brake Drums
Mount the brake drum holder [A] securely on the drum

studs with the wheel nuts.
Special Tool - Brake Drum Holder: 57001-1325
Using the brake drum pusher [B], and tighten it until the
pusher stops.
Special Tool - Brake Drum Pusher, M18 1.5: 57001-1261
And
nut.
then remove the pusher, install the washer and axle
Tighten:
Torque - Front Axle Nuts: 196 Nm (20.0 kgfm, 145 ftlb)
Rear Axle Nuts: 304 Nm (31.0 kgfm, 224 ftlb)
Insert a new cotter pin [A].

NOTE
When inserting the cotter pin, if the slots in the nut do
not align with the cotter pin hole in the axle shaft, tighten
the nut clockwise [B] up to next alignment.
It should be within 30.
Loosen once and tighten again when the slot goes past
the nearest hole.
Bend the cotter pin [A] over the nut [B].

WARNING
A loose axle nut can lead to an accident resulting in
serious injury or death. Tighten the axle nut to the
proper torque and install a new cotter pin.
Brake Drum Wear

Refer to the Brake Wear Inspection in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
BRAKES 13-15
Brake Panel Assy Removal
(Front Brake Panel)
Remove:
Front Brake Drum (see Brake Drum Removal)
Brake Hose Retainer
Breather Hose [A]
Brake Pipe Nipple [B]
Front [C]
NOTICE
diately.
Remove the brake panel mounting bolts [A], and then re-
move the brake panel assy [B].
(Rear Brake Panel)

Remove:
Rear Brake Drum [A] (see Brake Drum Removal)
Brake Hose Retainer
Breather Hose [B]
Cotter Pin and Joint Pin [C]
Brake Pipe Nipple [D] (Unscrew)
NOTICE
diately.
Remove the brake panel mounting bolts [A] and collar [B],
and then remove the brake panel assy [C].
13-16 BRAKES
Brake Panel Assy Installation
Apply lithium grease (NLGI Grade No.2) to the following
portion.
Brake Panel Seating Surface (Between Axle and Panel)
Install the brake panel assy.
the brake panel mounting bolts.
Torque - Front/Rear Brake Panel Mounting Bolts: 44 Nm
(4.5 kgfm, 32 ftlb)
and tighten it.
Install the brake hose retainer.

Brake Line
Bleed the brake line after brake drum installation (see
Air Bleeding).
power, no brake
drag, and no fluid leakage.
WARNING
Inspect the parking brake lever inspection (see Parking

Brake Lever Inspection in the Periodic Maintenance chap-
ter).
Brake Panel Disassembly
(Front Brake Panel)
Remove:
Front Brake Drum (see Brake Drum Removal)
Brake Pipe Nipple and Vent Hose (see Brake Panel Assy
Removal)
Remove the brake shoe springs [A].
While pushing the shoe hold-down spring [B], turn the pin
[C] 90 and remove the shoes [D] individually.
NOTE
Remove the brake panel mounting bolts [E], and then re-
move the brake panel [F].
Front [G]
BRAKES 13-17
(Rear Brake Panel)
Remove:
Rear Brake Drum (see Brake Drum Removal)
Vent Hose [A]
Grommet [B] of Parking Brake Lever Linkage
Brake Pipe Nipple [C] (Unscrew)
Front [D]
NOTICE
diately.
Remove the brake shoe springs [A].

[C] 90 and remove
While pushing the shoe hold-down spring [B], turn the pin
the shoes [D] individually.
NOTE
To prevent the rear pin [E] from dropping into the rear axle
bracket, tape the pin onto the brake panel.
Remove the collar [F] on the rear brake panel.
Front [G]
Remove the following for rear brake panel removal.

Cotter Pin [A]
Joint Pin [B]
Parking Brake Lever Linkage [C]
Remove:
Brake Panel Mounting Bolts [A]
Rear Brake Panel [B]
13-18 BRAKES
Brake Panel Assembly
(Front Brake Panel)
portion.
Install the brake panel and wheel cylinder.
Tighten:
Torque - Front Brake Panel Mounting Bolts: 44 Nm (4.5
kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Front Wheel Cylinder Mounting Bolts: 10.3 Nm
(1.1 kgfm, 91 inlb)
Apply grease to the following portions.

Contact Points [A] of Brake Panel and Brake Shoes
Wheel Cylinder Piston Ends [B]
Brake Shoe Anchor Ends [C]
and tighten it.
The wheel cylinder has a brake shoe clearance adjuster.

Turn [A] either end of the cylinder fully while holding the
other end [B]. Both ends are put into the cylinder.
Check that there is no grease or any oil on the brake shoe.
If there is grease or any oil on the brake shoe, clean off
them with a high flash-point solvent.
Install the brake shoe springs on the original positions
(see Brake Shoe Spring Inspection).
(Rear Brake Panel)

portion.
Install the brake panel and wheel cylinder.
Apply grease to the shoe clearance adjuster pivots [A].
Tighten:
Torque - Rear Brake Panel Mounting Bolts: 44 Nm (4.5
kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Rear Wheel Cylinder Mounting Nuts: 7.4 Nm (0.75
kgfm, 65 inlb)
Apply brake fluid to the thread of the brake pipe nipple
and tighten it.
Apply grease to the following portions (refer to front brake
above).
Contact Points of Brake Panel and Brake Shoes
Wheel Cylinder Piston Ends
Brake Shoe Anchor Ends
BRAKES 13-19
Install the parking brake lever linkage [A] and the grommet
[B] with the tabs [C] up.
FitBrake
the lips [D] of the grommet as shown in the figure.
Panel [E] (top view of the left rear)
Check that there is no grease or any oil on the brake shoe.
If there is grease or any oil on the brake shoe, clean off
them with a high flash-point solvent.
The parking brake lever linkage has a brake shoe clear-

ance adjuster.
Push the ratchet [A] forward and then in to reset the shoe
clearance adjuster from the protruding position to its orig-
inal position. The stop [B] sets the position.

Ratchet [B]
Protruding Position [C]
Front [F]

Ratchet [B]
Original Position [D]
Front [F]
Pack gaps [A] with grease sparingly.

13-20 BRAKES
(Front and Rear Brake Panels)
Bleed the brake line after drum installation (see Brake
Line Air Bleeding).
power, no brake drag and no fluid leakage.
WARNING
Inspect the parking brake lever inspection (see Parking

Brake Lever Inspection in the Periodic Maintenance chap-
ter).
Wheel Cylinder Removal/Installation
Refer to the Brake Wheel Cylinder Assembly Replace-
ment in the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Wheel Cylinder Assembly
Before assembly, clean all parts including the wheel cylin-
der with brake fluid or alcohol, and apply brake fluid to the
removed parts and the inner wall of the cylinder.
NOTICE
Use only brake fluid, isopropyl alcohol, or ethyl al-
cohol for cleaning brake parts. Do not use any other
fluid for cleaning these parts. Gasoline, motor oil,
or any other petroleum distillate will cause deterio-
ration of the rubber parts. Oil spilled on any part will
be difficult to wash off completely, and will eventu-
ally deteriorate the rubber used in the brake.
BRAKES 13-21
Wheel Cylinder Inspection
Remove the wheel cylinder (see Brake Wheel Cylinder
Assembly Replacement in the Periodic Maintenance
chapter).
Disassemble the wheel cylinder.
Check that there are no scratches, rust or pitting on the
inside of the cylinder and on the outside of the piston.
If the cylinder or piston shows any damage, replace the
cylinder.
Inspect the cups.
If a cup is worn, damaged, softened (rotted) or swollen,
replace the cylinder.
If fluid leakage is noted at the dust seals, the cylinder
should be replaced to renew the cup.
Check the dust seals for damage.
If they are damaged, replace the cylinder.
Check the spring for any damage.
If the spring is damaged, replace the cylinder.
Check the brake shoe clearance adjuster for damage
(front brake only).
If it shows any damage, replace the cylinder.
Dust Seal [A]
Piston [B]
Cup [C]
Shoe Clearance Adjuster (Front) [D]
Spring (Rear) [E]
Brake Shoe Lining Wear
Refer to the Brake Wear Inspection in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
Brake Shoe Spring Inspection
Visually inspect the brake shoe springs [A] for breaks or
distortion.
If the springs are damaged in any way, replace them.
(Front Brake Panel)
Install the upper shoe spring in the original position
shown, noting the hook direction.
Install the lower spring inside the plate of the shoe.
(Rear Brake Panel)

Install the upper shoe springs in the original position
shown, noting the relative position of the coil to the
parking brake lever linkage.
Install the lower spring inside the plate of the shoe.
13-22 BRAKES
Grease Seal Replacement
Remove:
Brake Panel Assy (see Brake Panel Assy Removal)
Grease Seal [A]
NOTICE
Be careful not to damage the brake panel when re-
moving the grease seal.
Install the grease seal [A] to specified position as shown

in the figure.
Top Surface of Grease Seal [B]
Center Bottom of Brake Panel [C]
11.2 12.0 mm (0.44 0.47 in.) [D]
NOTE
If the following special tool (Grease Seal Driver Set) is
used, the position will be secured.
Apply soapsuds to inside area of the new grease seal.

bleed valve
Put the brake panel on a suitable flat plate [A] so that the
fitting [B], boss [C] and parking brake lever
linkage [D] (rear only) are not contact to the plate.
Put the guide [E] in the panel so that the UP mark [F] faces
upward.
Special Tool - Grease Seal Driver Set: 57001-1629
Put the grease seal [G] on the brake panel evenly.
Put the grease seal driver [A] on the grease seal evenly.
Special Tool - Grease Seal Driver Set: 57001-1629
Put the compressor [B] to center on the grease seal driver.
Special Tool - Clutch Spring Compressor: 57001-1162
Using a press install the grease seal.
lips (see Brake
Pack lithium grease (NLGI Grade No.2) to the grease seal
Drum Installation).
BRAKES 13-23
Parking Brake Lever and Cables
Parking Brake Lever Travel Adjustment
Refer to the Parking Brake Lever Inspection in the Peri-
Parking Brake Cable Lubrication/Inspection
Refer to the General Lubrication in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
SUSPENSION 14-1
Suspension
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 14-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 14-4
Special Tool ............................................................................................................................ 14-5
Struts and Rear Shock Absorbers .......................................................................................... 14-6
Strut (Front Shock Absorber) Removal............................................................................. 14-6
Strut (Front Shock Absorber) Installation.......................................................................... 14-6
Strut Spring Replacement................................................................................................. 14-7
Rear Shock Absorber Preload Adjustment ....................................................................... 14-9
Rear Shock Absorber Removal ........................................................................................ 14-9
Rear Shock Absorber Installation ..................................................................................... 14-9
Shock Absorber Inspection ............................................................................................... 14-10
Front Suspension Arms .......................................................................................................... 14-11
Front Suspension Arm Removal ....................................................................................... 14-11
Front Suspension Arm Installation .................................................................................... 14-11
Front Suspension Arm Inspection..................................................................................... 14-12
Leaf Springs and Dampers..................................................................................................... 14-13
Leaf Spring Removal ........................................................................................................ 14-13
Leaf Spring Installation ..................................................................................................... 14-14
Leaf Spring Inspection ...................................................................................................... 14-14
14
14-2 SUSPENSION
Exploded View
SUSPENSION 14-3
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Damper Bracket Mounting Nuts 59 6.0 44 R, S
2 Front Suspension Arm Joint Nuts 78 8.0 58
3 Front Suspension Arm Pivot Bolts 98 10.0 72.3 L
4 Leaf Spring Mounting Bolts (Front) 98 10.0 72.3
5 Leaf Spring Mounting Nuts (Rear) 59 6.0 44
6 Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Nuts 59 6.0 44 R
7 Strut Clamp Nuts 98 10.0 72.3
8 Strut Locknuts 49 5.0 36
9 Strut Mounting Locknuts 44 4.5 32 R
10 Tie-Rod End Nuts 34 3.5 25
G: Apply grease.
14-4 SUSPENSION
Specifications

Rear Shock Absorbers
Spring Preload Setting Position 1st position (Usable Range)
1 5 positions
SUSPENSION 14-5
Special Tool
Steering Stem Nut Wrench:
57001-1100
14-6 SUSPENSION
Struts and Rear Shock Absorbers
Strut (Front Shock Absorber) Removal
Remove:
Glove Compartment (see Glove Compartment Removal
in the Frame chapter)
Front Wheel (see Wheel Removal in the Wheels/Tires
chapter)
Brake Panel (see Brake Panel Assy Removal in the
Brakes chapter)
Brake Hose Retainer [A]
Brake Hose [B] (from Bracket)
Cotter Pin
Strut Clamp Bolt and Nut [C]
Remove the strut mounting locknuts [A].
Remove the strut [A] from the steering knuckle [B].

Front [C]
Strut (Front Shock Absorber) Installation

Insert the strut to the steering knuckle [A] while aligning
the notch [B] on the strut with the clamp bolt hole [C] on
the steering knuckle.
Replace the strut mounting locknuts with new ones.
Tighten:
Torque - Strut Mounting Locknuts: 44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 32
ftlb)
Strut Clamp Nuts: 98 Nm (10.0 kgfm, 72.3 ftlb)
SUSPENSION 14-7

NOTE
not align with the cotter pin hole in the axle, tighten the
nut clockwise [B] up to next alignment.
the nearest hole.
Strut Spring Replacement

In addition to the standard springs, hard springs are avail-
able.
The hard springs stiffen the strut action and accelerate
the rebound damping.
Remove the strut (see Strut (Front Shock Absorber) Re-
moval).
Hold the large washer [A] in a vise [B].
Remove:
Locknut [C] and Small Washer
Large Washer
Remove:
Holder [A]
Thrust Plate [B]
Dust Seal
Thrust Washer
Upper Spring Seat [C]
Dust Cover [D]
Spring [E]
Install the replaced spring.

Fit the spring end [A] to the bulge [B] in the lower spring
seat [C].
14-8 SUSPENSION
Install:
Dust Cover [A]
Upper Spring Seat [B]
Fit the spring end to the bulge [C] in the dust cover and
upper spring seat.
Apply grease to the upper and lower side on the following

parts, and install them.
Dust Seal [A]
Thrust Washer [B]
Face the projection on the thrust washer downward.
Install:
Holder [A]
Large Washer [B]
Small Washer [C]
Locknut [D]
Push down the holder, and tighten the locknut.
Torque - Strut Locknuts: 49 Nm (5.0 kgfm, 36 ftlb)
SUSPENSION 14-9
Rear Shock Absorber Preload Adjustment
The spring adjusting sleeve [A] on the rear shock ab-
sorbers have 5 positions so that the springs can be adjusted
for different terrain and loading conditions. If the spring ac-
tion feels too soft or too stiff, adjust it in accordance with the
following table.
Spring Action
Spring
Position Setting Load Terrain Speed
Force
1 (STD) Weak Soft Light Smooth Low
2
3
4
5 Strong Hard Heavy Rough High
Remove the rear wheel (see Wheel Removal in the

Wheels/Tires chapter).
Turn the adjusting sleeve on each rear shock absorber to
the desired position with the wrench [A].
Special Tool - Steering Stem Nut Wrench: 57001-1100
Both adjusting sleeves (left and right) must be turned to
the same relative position.
WARNING
If both adjusters are not adjusted equally, handling
may be impaired and a hazardous condition may
result. Be sure the adjusters are set equally.
Rear Shock Absorber Removal

Remove:
Rear Wheel (see Wheel Removal in the Wheels/Tires
chapter)
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolts and Nuts [A] (while
moving the frame up or down with a jack)
Rear Shock Absorber [B]
Rear Shock Absorber Installation

Install the rear wheel temporarily and ground it to load the
suspension.
Replace
ones.
the rear shock absorber mounting nuts with new
Tighten:
Torque - Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Nuts: 59 Nm (6.0
kgfm, 44 ftlb)
14-10 SUSPENSION
Shock Absorber Inspection
Visually
tion.
inspect the shock absorber for breaks or distor-
If the shock absorber is damaged in any way, replace it.

Check for oil leakage at the shock absorber damper unit.
If oil leakage is noted, the shock absorber should be re-
placed to renew the oil seal.
Visually inspect the rubber bushings in the upper and/or
lower mountings of the rear shock absorber.
If they are worn, cracked, hardened, or otherwise dam-
aged, replace them with new ones.
SUSPENSION 14-11
Front Suspension Arms
Front Suspension Arm Removal
Remove:
Front Wheel (see Wheel Removal in the Wheels/Tires
chapter)
Front Guard (see Front Guard Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Hold the front brake drum and panel assembly in position.
Remove the front suspension arm pivot bolts [A].
Remove:
Cotter Pin
Front Suspension Arm Joint Nut [A]
Front Suspension Arm Joint (from Steering Knuckle)
Remove the front suspension arm joint from the steering
knuckle, using a suitable joint remover (see Steering Gear
Assembly Removal in the Steering chapter).
Remove the front suspension arm [B].
Front Suspension Arm Installation

Clean the tapered portion of the front suspension arm joint
and the tapered hole of the suspension arm, or the tapers
will not fit snugly.
Apply grease to the sealing surface [A] of the front sus-
pension arm joint boot.
When the front suspension arm pivot bolts are tightened,
install the arm joint to the suspension arm to position the
arm within its operating angle.
the front suspension arm pivot bolts.
Tighten:
Torque - Front Suspension Arm Pivot Bolts: 98 Nm (10.0
kgfm, 72.3 ftlb)
Front Suspension Arm Joint Nut: 78 Nm (8.0
kgfm, 58 ftlb)

NOTE
the nearest hole.
14-12 SUSPENSION
Front Suspension Arms
Front Suspension Arm Inspection

Visually inspect the front suspension arm for breaks or
distortion.
If the front suspension arm is damaged in any way, re-
place it.
Check the rubber bushings in the pivots.
Replace any bushings that are worn, cracked, hardened,
or otherwise damaged.
SUSPENSION 14-13
Leaf Springs and Dampers
Leaf Spring Removal
Remove the rear wheel (see Wheel Removal in the
Wheels/Tires chapter).
Hold the rear brake drum and panel assembly in position.
Free the brake hose [A], pipe and cable from the leaf
spring.
NOTICE
diately.
Remove:
Rear Shock Absorber [B]
Damper Bracket Mounting Nuts [C] and Leaf Spring
Bracket
Damper and Bracket [D]
Remove:
Bolt [A]
Clamp [B]
Leaf Spring Mounting Bolt and Nut [C]
Remove:
Leaf Spring Mounting Nuts [A]
Leaf Spring [B]
14-14 SUSPENSION
Leaf Springs and Dampers
Leaf Spring Installation
When installing the rubber bushings to the leaf spring,
lubricate them with a soap and water solution.
NOTICE
Do not use engine oil or petroleum distillates to lu-
bricate the bushings because they will deteriorate
the rubber.
Install the rear wheel temporarily and ground it to load the

suspension during the mounting nut tightening.
Tighten:
Torque - Leaf Spring Mounting Bolts (Front): 98 Nm (10.0
kgfm, 72.3 ftlb)
Leaf Spring Mounting Nuts (Rear): 59 Nm (6.0
kgfm, 44 ftlb)
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Nuts: 59 Nm (6.0
kgfm, 44 ftlb)
Apply liquid gasket to the threads of the leaf

bracket.
spring
Sealant - Three Bond: 1364D
Replace
ones.
the damper bracket mounting nuts with new
Tighten the damper bracket mounting nuts in the order as

Front [A]
Outside [B]
Torque - Damper Bracket Mounting Nuts:
First: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Second: 44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Final: 59 Nm (6.0 kgfm, 44 ftlb)
Apply brake fluid to the brake pipe nipple threads.
Tighten:
Bleed the brake line (see Brake Line Air Bleeding in the
Brakes chapter).
Leaf Spring Inspection
Visually inspect the leaf spring for breaks or distortion.
If the leaf spring is damaged in any way, replace it.
Check the rubber bushings in the mounts and the damper.
Replace any bushings or damper that are worn, cracked,
hardened, or otherwise damaged.
STEERING 15-1
Steering
Table of Contents
Exploded View................................... 15-2 Service Code Erasing
Specifications .................................... 15-4 Procedures................................ 15-35
Special Tools ..................................... 15-5 EPS Neutral Position Registration 15-37
Steering Wheel and Main Shaft Power Supply Voltage Abnormal
Assembly ........................................ 15-6 (Service Code 11,12) ................ 15-40
Steering Wheel Position EPS Neutral Position
Adjustment ................................ 15-6 Unregistration (Service
Steering Wheel Free Play Code 31) ................................... 15-40
Inspection.................................. 15-6 Current Sensor Inspection
Steering Wheel Centering............ 15-6 (Service Code 32) ..................... 15-40
Steering Wheel and Steering FET (Field Effect Transistor)
Shaft Removal (KAF950G9 Inspection (Service Code 33).... 15-41
GC/HA)...................................... 15-7 Internal Relay Inspection (Service
Steering Wheel and Steering Code 34) ................................... 15-41
Shaft Installation (KAF950G9 CPU (Central Processing Unit)
GC/HA)...................................... 15-8 Inspection (Service Code 35).... 15-42
Steering Wheel and Steering Direction Distinction Circuit
Shaft Removal (KAF950GD)..... 15-10 Inspection (Service Code 36).... 15-42
Steering Wheel and Steering Boosting Transformer Circuit
Shaft Installation (KAF950GD).. 15-11 Inspection (Service Code 37).... 15-42
Steering Gear Assembly.................... 15-13 EPS Torque Sensor Inspection
Steering Gear Assembly (Service Code 51) ..................... 15-43
Removal .................................... 15-13 EPS Motor Inspection (Service
Steering Gear Assembly Code 61) ................................... 15-44
Installation ................................. 15-14 EPS Warning Indicator Light
Steering Gear Preload (LED) Removal.......................... 15-45
Adjustment ................................ 15-16 EPS Warning Indicator Light
Tie-Rod Length Adjustment ......... 15-16 (LED) Inspection ....................... 15-46
Steering Joint Dust Boot EPS ECU Removal ...................... 15-47
Inspection.................................. 15-16 EPS ECU Installation ................... 15-48 15
Steering Knuckles.............................. 15-17 EPS ECU Power Supply Voltage
Steering Knuckle Removal........... 15-17 Inspection.................................. 15-49
Steering Knuckle Installation........ 15-17 EPS Motor Removal .................... 15-50
Knuckle Bearing Removal............ 15-18 EPS Torque Sensor Removal ...... 15-51
Knuckle Bearing Installation......... 15-18 EPS Unit Removal ....................... 15-51
Knuckle Joint Removal ................ 15-19 EPS Unit Installation .................... 15-53
Knuckle Joint Installation ............. 15-19 Speed Sensor Removal/Installa-
EPS (Electric Power Steering) tion ............................................ 15-55
System............................................ 15-20 Speed Sensor Inspection............. 15-55
EPS System Servicing EPS ECU Relay Removal/Instal-
Precautions ............................... 15-25 lation.......................................... 15-56
EPS System Troubleshooting EPS ECU Relay Inspection.......... 15-56
Outline....................................... 15-26 Diodes Removal/Installation ........ 15-56
Inquiries to Rider.......................... 15-30 Diodes Inspection ........................ 15-57
Self-diagnosis Outline .................. 15-30 EPS Fuse 40 A Removal ............. 15-57
Self-diagnosis Procedure............. 15-31 EPS Fuse 7.5 A Removal ............ 15-58
Service Code Reading ................. 15-32 Fuse Installation........................... 15-58
Service Code Erasing .................. 15-32 Fuse Inspection............................ 15-58
15-2 STEERING
Exploded View
STEERING 15-3
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 EPS Unit Mounting Bolts 20 2.0 15
2 Rack Guide Spring Cap Locknut 39 4.0 29
3 Steering Gear Assembly Bracket Bolts 52 5.3 38 L
4 Self-lock Nut 52 5.3 38 R
5 Strut Clamp Nuts 98 10.0 72.3
6 Tie-Rod End Locknuts 44 4.5 32
7 Tie-Rod End Nuts 34 3.5 25
8 Universal Joint Clamp Bolts 20 2.0 15
9. KAF950G9 GC/HA
10. Apply grease on contact plate.
G: Apply grease.
15-4 STEERING
Specifications

Steering Wheel
Steering Wheel Free Play 0 20 mm (0 0.79 in.)
Steering Gear Assembly
Tie-Rod Length 43.5 mm (1.71 in.)
(distance between boot end and locknut)
STEERING 15-5
Special Tools
Outside Circlip Pliers: Knuckle Joint Remover:
57001-144 57001-1619
Bearing Driver Set: Knuckle Joint Driver:

57001-1129 57001-1640
Hand Tester:
57001-1394
15-6 STEERING
Steering Wheel and Main Shaft Assembly
Steering Wheel Position Adjustment
Loosen the steering shaft mounting nuts [A].
Adjust the steering wheel position.
Tighten the main shaft bracket mounting nuts securely.
Steering Wheel Free Play Inspection

Refer to the Steering Inspection in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
Steering Wheel Centering
Test ride the vehicle.
If the steering wheel is not straight when the vehicle is
traveling in a straight line, do the following.
Check the tie-rod length and adjust it if necessary.
Remove the wheel cap and horn switch (KAF950G9
GC/HA, see Steering Wheel and Steering Shaft Re-
moval).
Remove the wheel cover (KAF950GD, see Steering
Wheel and Steering Shaft Removal).
Loosen the self-lock nut [A].

stop it without
Push the vehicle in a straight line with no one aboard, and
turning the steering wheel.
Install:
Remount the steering wheel so that it is straight ahead.
Spring Washer [B] (KAF950G9 GC/HA)
Washer [C] (KAF950GD)
[D] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[E] KAF950GD
Tighten:
Torque - Self-lock Nut: 52 Nm (5.3 kgfm, 38 ftlb)
Install:
Horn Switch and Wheel Cap (KAF950G9 GC/HA, see
Steering Wheel and Steering Shaft Installation)
Wheel Cover (KAF950GD, see Steering Wheel and
Steering Shaft Installation)
Be sure to register the EPS neutral position (see EPS
Neutral Position Registration).
STEERING 15-7
Steering Wheel and Steering Shaft Removal
(KAF950G9 GC/HA)
Remove
follows.
the wheel cap together with the horn switch as
Insert a thin driver [A] into the hole [B], and unlock the
stopper.
Pry the one side part of the switch with a thin driver for
the stopper [A] is free.
Remove the wheel cap [B] together with the horn switch.
When removing the horn switch, unlock the stoppers [A].
Remove:
Self-lock Nut [A] and Spring Washer
Steering Wheel [B]
Cut the bands [A].

Disconnect the horn switch and connector [B].
15-8 STEERING
Remove:
Screws [A] and Holder
Horn Switch Contact [B]
Remove:
Universal Joint Clamp Bolt [A]
Remove:
Steering Shaft Mounting Bolts, Washers and Nuts [A]
Steering Shaft [B]
Steering Wheel and Steering Shaft Installation

(KAF950G9 GC/HA)
Apply grease to the dust cover lips [A].
Install
[B].
the steering shaft [A] to the upper universal joint
Install the universal joint clamp bolt [C] while aligning the
notch on the steering shaft with the clamp bolt hole on the
upper universal joint, and tighten it temporary.
Replace the steering shaft mounting nuts [F] with new
ones.
Install the steering shaft mounting bolts [D], washers [E]
and nuts.
Tighten the universal joint clamp bolt to the specified
torque.
Torque - Universal Joint Clamp Bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm,
15 ftlb)
STEERING 15-9
Install:
Horn Switch Contact [A]
Holder [B]
Screws [C]
Position the horn switch contact on the projection [D].
Connect the horn switch lead connector [A] and clamp the
bands [B].
Mount
ily.
the steering wheel on the steering shaft temporar-
Adjust the following items.

Steering Wheel Position (see Steering Wheel Position
Adjustment)
Steering Wheel Centering (see Steering Wheel Center-
ing)
Replace the self-locknut with a new one.
Tighten:
Torque - Self-lock Nut: 52 Nm (5.3 kgfm, 38 ftlb)
Install the horn switch [A] as follows.

Fit the front stoppers [B] in the recesses [C] of the steering
wheel.
Fit the rear stopper [A] in the recess of the steering wheel
and push the rear part until sound click.
15-10 STEERING
Install the wheel cap [A] so that the arrow mark [B] faces
front and the stoppers [C] fit the recesses [D] of the horn
switch.
Steering Wheel and Steering Shaft Removal

(KAF950GD)
Clear the hook portions [A] from the steering wheel to
remove the wheel cover [B].
Remove the wheel cover.
Remove:
Steering Wheel Mounting Nut [A] and Washer [B]
Steering Wheel
Remove the washer [A].
Remove:
STEERING 15-11
Remove:
Steering Shaft Mounting Bolts, Washers and Nuts [A]
Steering Shaft [B]
Remove:
Clamp Bolt [A]
Intermediate Shaft [B]
Steering Wheel and Steering Shaft Installation

(KAF950GD)
Apply grease to the dust cover lips [A].
Install
[B].
the steering shaft [A] to the upper universal joint
Install the universal joint clamp bolt [C] while aligning the
notch on the steering shaft with the clamp bolt hole on the
upper universal joint, and tighten it temporary.
Replace the steering shaft mounting nuts [F] with new
ones.
Install the steering shaft mounting bolts [D], washers [E]
and nuts.
Tighten:
15 ftlb)
15-12 STEERING
Install the washer [A].
Mount
ily.

Adjustment)
ing)
Replace the steering wheel mounting nut with a new one.
Tighten:
Torque - Steering Wheel Mounting Nut: 52 Nm (5.3 kgfm,
38 ftlb)
Insert the hook portions [A] into the holes [B] of the steer-
ing wheel.
STEERING 15-13
Steering Gear Assembly Removal
Remove:
Front Wheels (see Wheel Removal in the Wheels/Tires
chapter)
chapter)
Cotter Pins (Both Sides)
Tie-Rod End Nuts [A] (Both Sides)
Tie-Rod Ends [B] from Steering Knuckles (Both Sides)
NOTICE
Do not loosen the tie-rod end locknuts [C], or the
toe-in of the front wheels will be changed.
Remove the tie-rod end [A] from the steering knuckle, us-
ing a suitable joint remover [B].
Remove:
Left Radiator Side Cover (see Radiator Side Cover Re-
moval in the Frame chapter)
Water Hoses [A]
Horn Ground Lead Terminal [B]
Remove the steering gear assembly bracket bolts [C] and
brackets [D] .
Remove the rubber dumpers [A].

15-14 STEERING
Remove the mounting bolts [A] of the water pipe.
Remove the universal joint clamp bolt [A].

If the clamp bolt becomes hard to turn, search the posi-
tion that it can be easily turned while turning the steering
wheel slowly.
Pull out the rubber boot [B] upward temporary.
Move the steering gear assembly, and pull off the shaft
[A] from the lower universal joint [B].
Lower the steering gear assembly, and then pull it for-
ward.
Remove the rubber boot [C].
Remove the steering gear assembly [A] from the vehicle

left side [B].
Steering Gear Assembly Installation

Adjust the following items if necessary.
Steering Gear Preload (see Steering Gear Preload Ad-
justment)
Tie-Rod Length (see Tie-Rod Length Adjustment)
Clean the tapered portion of the tie-rod end joint and the
tapered hole of the steering knuckle, or the tapers will not
fit snugly.
Apply grease to the sealing surface [A] of the tie-rod end
joint boot.
STEERING 15-15
Install the rubber boot [A] on the shaft [B] of the steering
gear assembly temporary.
Install the shaft of the steering gear assembly to the lower
universal joint [C].
Install the universal joint clamp bolt [D] while aligning the
notch on the shaft of the steering gear assembly with the
clamp bolt hole on the lower universal joint, and tighten it
temporary.
Install:
Rubber Dampers [E]
Brackets [F]
Apply a non-permanent locking agent to the steering gear
assembly bracket bolts [G] and tighten them evenly.
Torque - Steering Gear Assembly Bracket Bolts: 52 Nm
(5.3 kgfm, 38 ftlb)
Tighten
torque.
the universal joint clamp bolt to the specified
Torque - Universal Joint Clamp Bolt: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 15

ftlb)
[H] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[I] KAF950GD
Install the rubber boot [A] so that the mark (F, Arrow) [B]
faces forward.
Tighten:
Torque - Tie-Rod End Nuts: 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25 ftlb)
NOTE
the nearest hole.
15-16 STEERING

ment inthe
Check toe-in of the front wheels (see Toe-in Adjust-
the Wheels/Tires chapter).
Neutral Position
Registration).
Steering Gear Preload Adjustment

Tighten the rack guide spring cap [B] to 12.3 Nm (1.25
kgfm, 109 inlb) of torque.
Back off the cap 40 50.
Tighten the locknut while preventing the cap from turning.
Torque - Rack Guide Spring Cap Locknut: 39 Nm (4.0
kgfm, 29 ftlb)
Pinion [C]
Rack [D]
Rack Guide [E]
Spring [F]
Tie-Rod Length Adjustment

Refer
ter.
to the Toe-in Adjustment in the Wheels/Tires chap-
Tie-Rod Length [A]

Front [B]
Steering Joint Dust Boot Inspection

Refer to the Steering Joint Dust Boot Inspection in the
STEERING 15-17
Steering Knuckles
Steering Knuckle Removal
Remove:
Front Brake Panel Assembly (see Brake Panel Assy Re-
moval in the Brakes chapter)
Cotter Pin
Tie-Rod End Nut [A]
Tie-Rod End [B] from Steering Knuckle
Remove the tie-rod end from the steering knuckle, using
a suitable joint remover (see Steering Gear Assembly Re-
moval).
NOTICE
Do not loosen the tie-rod end locknuts [C], or the
toe-in of the front wheels will be changed.
Remove:
Brake Hose Retainer [D]
Cotter Pin
Strut Clamp Bolt and Nut [E]
Remove:
Cotter Pin
Front Suspension Arm Joint Nut [A]
Front Suspension Arm Joint from Steering Knuckle
Remove the front suspension arm joint from the steering
knuckle, using a suitable joint remover (see Steering Gear
Assembly Removal).
Remove the steering knuckle [B].
Steering Knuckle Installation

Using a cleaning fluid, clean off any oil or dirt on the ta-
pered portions of the front suspension arm joint and the
tie-rod end joint, and the tapered holes of the steering
knuckle and the front suspension arm. Then dry them
with a clean cloth.
Apply grease to the following portions.
Axle Bearing Grease Seal Lips
Front Suspension Arm Joint Boot Sealing Surfaces [A]
Tighten:
Torque - Strut Clamp Nuts: 98 Nm (10.0 kgfm, 72.3 ftlb)
Front Suspension Arm Joint Nuts: 78 Nm (8.0
kgfm, 58 ftlb)
Tie-Rod End Nuts: 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25 ftlb)
15-18 STEERING
Steering Knuckles

NOTE
the nearest hole.

ment inthe
Check toe-in of the front wheels (see Toe-in Adjust-
the Wheels/Tires chapter).
EPS Neutral
Be sure to register the neutral position of the EPS (see
Position Registration).
Knuckle Bearing Removal

Remove:
Steering Knuckle (see Steering Knuckle Removal)
Grease Seal [A]
Drive the bearing [A] out using a suitable bearing driver

from the bearing driver set.
Knuckle Bearing Installation

Press in the bearing until it is bottomed.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set [A]: 57001-1129
Replace the grease seal with a new one.
STEERING 15-19
Steering Knuckles
Knuckle Joint Removal
Remove:
Steering Knuckle (see Steering Knuckle Removal)
Circlip [A]
Remove the knuckle joint [A] using a press.

Special Tool - Knuckle Joint Remover [B]: 57001-1619
First,press the knuckle joint until the remover end [C]
touches the knuckle.
Second, move the remover [A] so that its center align with
the center of the knuckle joint.
Press the knuckle joint, and remove it.
Knuckle Joint Installation

Press the knuckle joint [A] until it is bottomed.
Special Tool - Knuckle Joint Driver [B]: 57001-1640
Replace the circlip with a new one.
15-20 STEERING
EPS (Electric Power Steering) System
Parts Location
EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED) [A]
EPS Motor [A]

[B] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[C] KAF950GD
EPS Torque Sensor [A]

EPS Unit [B] (with EPS Motor and EPS Torque Sensor)
EPS ECU [A]

STEERING 15-21
Speed Sensor [A]
EPS Self-diagnosis System Connector [A]

EPS Fuse Box 1 (EPS Fuse 40 A ) [B]
EPS Fuse Box 2 (EPS Fuse 7.5 A ) [C]
15-22 STEERING
EPS System Wiring Diagram (KAF950G9, GA/HA)
1. EPS ECU 8. EPS Fuse 7.5 A

2. EPS Fuse 40 A 9. Oil Pressure Warning Indicator Light
3. EPS Motor 10. Main Switch
4. EPS Torque Sensor 11. Battery 12 V 52 Ah
5. EPS Self-diagnosis System Connector 12. Main Fuse 30 A
6. Speed Sensor 13. Fuse Box 2
7. EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED) 14. Oil Pressure Switch
Color Codes:
BK: Black P: Pink
BL: Blue R: Red
BR: Brown W: White
G: Green Y: Yellow
STEERING 15-23
EPS System Wiring Diagram (KAF950GB )
1. EPS ECU 9. EPS ECU Relay

2. EPS Fuse 40 A 10. Diodes
3. EPS Motor 11. Oil Pressure Warning Indicator Light
4. EPS Torque Sensor 12. Main Switch
5. EPS Self-diagnosis System Connector 13. Battery 12 V 52 Ah
6. Speed Sensor 14. Main Fuse 30 A
7. EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED) 15. Fuse Box 2
8. EPS Fuse 7.5 A 16. Oil Pressure Switch
Color Codes:
BK: Black P: Pink
BL: Blue R: Red
BR: Brown W: White
G: Green Y: Yellow
15-24 STEERING
Terminal Names
1. Unused
2. Unused
3. Unused
4. Ground for EPS ECU: BK/Y
5. Power Supply (from Battery): W
6. EPS Motor 1 : BK
7. EPS Motor 2 : R
8. External Communication Line: G
9. EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED): BK/W
10. Unused
11. Unused
12. Speed Sensor Signal: P
13. Unused
14. Unused
15. EPS Torque Sensor Signal 1: Y/BK
16. Power Supply (from Main Switch): BL/R
17. Unused
18. Unused
19. Unused
20. EPS Self-diagnosis System Terminal: BL
21. Unused
22. Ground for EPS Torque Sensor: BK/BL
23. EPS Torque Sensor Signal 2: Y/R
STEERING 15-25
EPS System Servicing Precautions
There are number of important precautions that should be
followed servicing the EPS system.
The EPS system operates while running the engine.

This EPS system is designed to be used with a 12 V bat-
tery as its power source. Do not use any other battery
except for a 12 V battery as a power source.
Do not reverse the battery cable connections. This will
damage the EPS ECU.
To prevent damage to the EPS system parts, do not dis-
connect the battery cables or any other electrical connec-
tions when the main switch ON or while the engine is run-
ning.
Do not short the cables that are directly connected to the
battery positive (+) terminal to the chassis ground.
Do not turn the main switch ON while any of the EPS
electrical connectors are disconnected. The EPS ECU
memorizes service codes.
Do not spray water on the electrical system parts, EPS
system parts, connectors, leads and wiring.
If a transceiver is installed on the vehicle, make sure that
operation of the EPS system is not influenced by electric
wave radiated from the antenna. Locate the antenna as
far as possible away from the EPS ECU.
Whenever the electrical connections of the EPS system

are to be disconnected, first turn the main switch OFF.
Conversely, make sure that all the electrical connections
of the EPS system are firmly reconnected before turning
on the main switch.
When reconnecting the connector, connect these connec-
tors securely until they click [A].
The EPS system parts should never be struck sharply, as

with a hummer, or allowed to fall on a hard surface. Such
a shock to the parts can damage them.
The EPS system parts can not be disassembled. Even if
a fault is found, do not try to disassemble and repair the
EPS system parts, replace it.
With the front wheel lifted from the ground, do not move
the front wheel quickly. An abnormal voltage is generated
and the EPS ECU may be damaged.
Using a fully charged battery. If the power supply voltage
of the EPS ECU becomes 10 V or less, EPS system does
not operate correctly.
15-26 STEERING
There are 40 A and 7.5 A fuses for the EPS system. If
the fuse is blown, the EPS system does not operate. In
this case, the EPS warning indicator light (LED) does not
light up and even if engine is started. Replace the fuse.
WARNING
When replacing the 40 A fuse, first disconnect the
battery cables to avoid electrical shock.
If the EPS system fuses are blown frequently, inspect the
EPS system parts.
If the EPS ECU was replaced, be sure to register the EPS
neutral position (see EPS Neutral Position Registration).
The EPS system can not function until the neutral position
is registered in the new EPS ECU. In this case, the EPS
warning indicator light (LED) blinks immediately after en-
gine starts.
If the following parts were removed or replaced, be sure
to register the neutral position of the EPS (see EPS Neu-
tral Position Registration). If the neutral position does not
register, EPS system does not operate correctly.
EPS Unit
Upper and Lower Universal Joints
Steering Knuckles
Do not loosen the following bolts and nuts except repair
work. If the following bolts and nuts were loosened, be
sure to register the EPS neutral position (see EPS Neu-
tral Position Registration). If the neutral position does not
register, EPS system does not operate correctly.
Steering Gear Assembly Bracket Bolts
Tie-Rod End Nuts
Universal Joint Clamp Bolts
EPS Unit Mounting Bolts
Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, be sure to
erase any service codes which might be stored in the EPS
ECU. Using the self-diagnosis function, confirm that the
EPS warning indicator light (LED) lights up (This shows
that there is no service code in the EPS ECU.).
EPS System Troubleshooting Outline
The EPS ECU is equipped with a self-diagnosis function.
When an abnormality in the EPS system occurs, the EPS
ECU lights the EPS warning indicator light (LED) [A] to alert
the rider. In addition, the condition of the problem is stored
in the memory of the EPS ECU as service codes and in
the self-diagnosis mode, the service code is indicated by
the number of times the EPS warning indicator light (LED)
blinks.
STEERING 15-27
If due to a malfunction, the EPS warning indicator light
(LED) remains lit, try to understand the background of the
trouble before starting the repair work. First ask the rider
about the conditions [A] of the trouble, and then start to ex-
amine the cause [B] of the trouble. Do not rely solely on the
self-diagnosis function, use common sense; for example,
check the connections of the connector.
If the problem is with the following parts, the EPS ECU

can not recognize these problem. Therefore, EPS warning
indicator light (LED) does not light up, and service code is
not indicated.
EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED)
EPS ECU Power Source Wiring and Ground Wiring
Speed Sensor
When the repair has been done, the EPS warning indi-
cator light (LED) lights up immediately after engine starts,
and goes off after 1 second. This shows that EPS system is
normal. But, service codes detected once by the EPS ECU
will be memorized in the EPS ECU. Therefore, after main-
tenance work ends, be sure to erase the service codes with
service code erase mode. Do not erase the service codes
during troubleshooting. Wait until all the checks and repair
work are finished to prevent duplication of previous service
codes and unnecessary maintenance work. Before eras-
ing the service codes, record them as problem history. The
problem history can be referred when solving unstable trou-
ble.
Even when the EPS system is operating normally, the
EPS warning indicator light (LED) may light up under strong
electrical interference. If the indicator light lights up, turn the
main switch OFF and then erase the service code.
Much of the EPS system troubleshooting work consists of
confirming continuity of the wiring. The EPS system parts
are assembled and adjusted by the manufacturer, so there
is no need to disassemble or repair them. Replace them as
an assembly.
The basic troubleshooting procedures and precautions
are listed below.
Using a fully charged battery. A fully charged battery is a
must for conducting reliable self-diagnosis function.
Measure coil winding resistance when the EPS system
part is cold (at room temperature).
Check wiring and connections from the EPS ECU con-
nector to the suspected faulty EPS system part, using the
hand tester.
Special Tool - Hand Tester: 57001-1394
15-28 STEERING
Visually inspect the wiring for signs of burning or fraying.

If any wiring is poor, replace the damaged wiring.
Pull each connector [A] apart and inspect it for corrosion,
dirt and damage.
If the connector is corroded or dirty, clean it carefully. If it
is damaged, replace it.
Check the wiring for continuity.
Use the wiring diagram to find the ends of the lead which
is suspected of being problem.
Connect the hand tester between the ends of the leads.
Set the hand tester to the 1 range, and read the tester.
If the tester does not read 0 , the lead is defective. Re-
place the main harness [B] if necessary.
Narrow down suspicious parts and close in on the faulty

EPS system part by repeating the continuity tests.
If no abnormality is found in the wiring or connectors, the
EPS system parts are the next likely suspects. Check
each part one by one.
If an abnormality is found, replace the affected EPS sys-
tem part.
If all the parts and wirings are good, be sure to inspect the
power supply voltage of the EPS ECU.
If the power supply voltage is good, replace the EPS ECU.
STEERING 15-29
EPS System Diagnosis Flow Chart
15-30 STEERING
Inquiries to Rider
Each rider reacts to problems in different ways, so it is important to confirm what kind of condition
the rider is dissatisfied with.
Try to find out exactly what problem occurs under exactly what conditions by asking the rider; know-
ing this information may help you reproduce the problem in the shop.
The following sample diagnosis sheet will help prevent you from overlooking any keys, so always
use it.
Sample Diagnosis Sheet
Rider name: Registration No. (license plate No.):
Year of initial registration: Model:
Engine No.: Frame No.:
Date problem occurred: Problem frequency:
Weather: Mileage:
Steering wheel is heavy.
Steering wheel is too light.
Steering wheel is unbalance.
Steering wheel is naturally turned to one side.
Phenomenon
When operating the steering wheel, make vibration or noise.
When operating the steering wheel, the headlight darkens.
EPS system does not operate.
Other
Engine conditions at
problem
At start-up After starting
Driving conditions At high-speed At low-speed
lights up immediately after engine starts, and goes off after 1 second.
EPS warning lights up immediately after engine starts, and stays on.
indicator light (LED) Blinks immediately after engine starts, and stays on.
conditions Does not light up.
Sometimes lights up.
Self-diagnosis Outline
The EPS self-diagnosis system has two modes and can
be switched to another mode by connecting terminals of the
EPS self-diagnosis system connector [A].
User Mode
The EPS ECU notifies the rider of troubles in EPS system
by lighting the EPS warning indicator light (LED) when EPS
system parts are faulty, and initiates fail-safe function. In
this case, EPS ECU stops the EPS motor operation.
Dealer Mode
The EPS warning indicator light (LED) emits service code
(s) to show the problem (s) by blinking.
STEERING 15-31
Self-diagnosis Procedure
When problem occurs with the EPS system, the EPS
warning indicator light (LED) [A] lights up.
NOTE
Use a fully charged battery when conducting
self-diagnosis. Otherwise, the EPS warning indi-
cator light (LED) blinks very slowly or does not blink.
Keep the EPS self-diagnosis system connector termi-
nals connected during self-diagnosis, with an auxiliary
lead.
Turn the main switch OFF.

Tilt up the front seat.
Disconnect the EPS self-diagnosis system connector [A].
Connect an auxiliary lead [A] to the terminals of the EPS

self-diagnosis system connector [B] as shown.
Auxiliary Lead Connections:
BL Lead [C] BK/Y Lead [D]
The BK/Y lead terminal is connected to the battery ()
terminal.
Start the engine.
Count the blinks of the indicator light to read the service
code (see Service Code Reading).
NOTE
Keep connections of the auxiliary lead until you finish
reading the service code.
If there is no service code, the EPS warning indicator
light (LED) remains lit and service code is not indicated.
Any of the following procedures ends the self-diagnosis

mode.
When the main switch is turned OFF.
When the auxiliary lead is disconnected from the termi-
nals of the EPS self-diagnosis system connector.
15-32 STEERING
Service Code Reading
Service codes are shown by a series of long and short blinks of the EPS warning indicator light
(LED) as shown below.
Read 10th digit and unit digit as the EPS warning indicator light (LED) blinks.
The EPS ECU can memorize all the service codes except the service code 31.
When there are plural service codes in the memory of the EPS ECU, the service codes are displayed
from the lowest number code in the ascending order. The display is repeated until the main switch
is turned OFF or the auxiliary lead is disconnected from the terminals of the EPS self-diagnosis
system connector.
For example, if two problems occurred in the order of 32,12, the service codes are displayed from
the lowest number code in the order listed.
(1232) (1232) (repeated)
Service Code Erasing

The service code memorized in the EPS ECU can not be
erased even if the main switch is turned OFF or battery
cables are disconnected.
Refer to the Service Code Erasing Procedure for the ser-
vice code erasure.
STEERING 15-33
Service Code Table
Service
EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED) Failure Parts Problems
Code
Power supply voltage from main
11
switch is abnormal.
Power supply voltage from

12
battery is abnormal.
EPS neutral position is

31 (1)
unregistration.
32 Current sensor is trouble.
FET(Field Effect Transistor) for

33
EPS motor is trouble.
34 Internal relay is trouble.

EPS ECU
CPU (Central Processing Unit) is
35
trouble.
Direction distinction circuit for

36
EPS torque sensor is trouble.
Boosting transformer circuit is

37
trouble.
51 EPS torque sensor is trouble.

EPS Unit
61 EPS motor is trouble.
NOTE:
(1):This code appears in the following condition.
When the EPS ECU was replaced and the EPS neutral position is not registered in the
new EPS ECU.
In this case, the EPS warning indicator light (LED) blinks immediately after engine starts. But,
the service code 31 is not memorized in the EPS ECU. Therefore, the service code 31 will
disappear when the EPS neutral position was registered in the new EPS ECU.
15-34 STEERING
Self-diagnosis Flow Chart
STEERING 15-35
Service Code Erasing Procedures
NOTE
Keep the self-diagnosis system connector terminals
connected during service code erase mode with an
auxiliary lead.
The EPS motor does not operate during service code
erase mode.
Start the service code erase mode with the following pro-
cedure.
First, turn the main switch OFF.
Second, connect an auxiliary lead to the terminals of the
EPS self-diagnosis system connector by the same pro-
cedure as self-diagnosis mode (see Self-diagnosis Pro-
cedure).
Third, lift the front wheel off the ground.
Fourth, turn the steering wheel fully to the left and keep it.
Fifth, start the engine while turning the steering wheel fully
to the left.
The EPS warning indicator light (LED) ights up for 4 sec-
onds and goes off.
If the service code is indicated, turn the main switch OFF
and repeat from fourth procedure again.
Sixth, free the hands from the steering wheel after indica-
tor light goes off.
After 4 seconds, the EPS warning indicator light (LED)
lights up.
Seventh, turn the steering wheel fully to the left and keep
it, after indicator light lights up.
goes off.
Eighth, free the hands from the steering wheel after indi-
cator light goes off.
blinks two times. This blink shows that the service code
was erased.
If the EPS warning indicator light (LED) does not blink or
lights up, turn the main switch OFF and repeat from fourth
procedure again.
Lastly, turn the main switch OFF within 5 seconds after
indicator light blinks two times, end the service code erase
mode.
If the main switch is not turned OFF within 5 seconds, the
EPS ECU starts the EPS neutral position registration.
NOTE
The EPS neutral position registration is same procedure
as until eighth procedure.
After finishing the service code erase mode, enter the
self-diagnosis mode again to confirm that the service
codes have been erased. If all codes have been
erased, the EPS warning indicator light (LED) remains
lit and service code is not indicated.
15-36 STEERING
Service Code Erasing Flow Chart
STEERING 15-37
EPS Neutral Position Registration
NOTE
Keep the self-diagnosis system connector terminals
connected during the EPS neutral position registration
with an auxiliary lead.
Be sure to lift the front wheel off the ground. The EPS
neutral position can not be registered correctly with the
front wheel on the ground.
The EPS motor does not operate during EPS neutral
position registration.
Register
cedure.
the EPS neutral position with the following pro-
First, turn the main switch OFF.

Second, connect an auxiliary lead to the terminals of the
EPS self-diagnosis system connector by the same pro-
cedure as self-diagnosis mode (see Self-diagnosis Pro-
cedure).
Third, lift the front wheel off the ground.
Fourth, turn the steering wheel fully to the left and keep it.
Fifth, start the engine while turning the steering wheel fully
to the left.
The EPS warning indicator light (LED) ights up for 4 sec-
onds and goes off.
If the EPS warning indicator light (LED) remains lit or
blinks, turn the main switch OFF and repeat from fourth
procedure again.
Sixth, free the hands from the steering wheel after indica-
tor light goes off.
lights up.
Seventh, turn the steering wheel fully to the left and keep
it, after indicator light lights up.
goes off.
Eighth, free the hands from the steering wheel after indi-
cator light goes off.
blinks two times. This blink shows that the service code
in the EPS ECU was erased.
If the EPS warning indicator light (LED) does not blink or
lights up, turn the main switch OFF and repeat from fourth
procedure again.
NOTE
The service code erase is same procedure as until
eighth procedure.
15-38 STEERING
Ninth, wait for 5 seconds after indicator light blinks two
times.
blinks three times. This blink shows that the EPS neutral
position was registered.
If the EPS warning indicator light (LED) does not blink,
turn the main switch OFF and repeat from fourth proce-
dure again.
Lastly, wait for 1 second or more after indicator light blinks
three times and turn the main switch OFF.
Disconnect the auxiliary lead from the terminals of the

self-diagnosis system connector.
Start the engine and confirm that the EPS warning indi-
cator light (LED) lights up for 1 second and goes off.
Confirm the EPS operates correctly.
STEERING 15-39
EPS Neutral Position Registration Flow Chart
15-40 STEERING
Power Supply Voltage Abnormal (Service Code
11,12)
The usable range of the power supply voltage is 10 V to
16 V.
Check the charging condition (see Alternator Operation
Inspection in the Electrical System chapter).
If the charging condition is normal, check the power sup-
ply voltage (see EPS ECU Power Supply Voltage Inspec-
tion).
If the power supply voltage is good, but the problem still
exists, replace the EPS ECU (see EPS ECU Removal/In-
stallation).
EPS Neutral Position Unregistration (Service
Code 31)
This code appears in the following condition.
When the EPS ECU was replaced and the EPS neutral
position is not registered in the new EPS ECU.
Register the EPS neutral position in the new EPS ECU
(see EPS Neutral Position Registration).
Current Sensor Inspection (Service Code 32)
The current sensor is built in the EPS ECU [A]. So, the
current sensor itself can not be inspected.

Disconnect the EPS ECU and EPS motor connectors.
connectors.
Check the wiring for continuity between main harness
Wiring Continuity Inspection

EPS ECU Connector [A]
EPS Motor Connector [B]
R Lead [C]
BK Lead [D]
If the wiring is good, check the power supply voltage (see
EPS ECU Power Supply Voltage Inspection).
stallation).
STEERING 15-41
FET (Field Effect Transistor) Inspection (Service
Code 33)
The FET is built in the EPS ECU [A]. So, the FET itself
can not be inspected.

Check the wiring
connectors. for continuity between main harness

R Lead Terminal [C]
BK Lead Terminal [D]
stallation).
Internal Relay Inspection (Service Code 34)
The relay function is included in the EPS ECU [A]. So, the
relay function can not be inspected.

Check the wiring

R Lead Terminal [C]
stallation).
15-42 STEERING
CPU (Central Processing Unit) Inspection (Service
Code 35)
The CPU is built in the EPS ECU [A]. So, the CPU itself
can not be inspected.
Check the power supply voltage (see EPS ECU Power
Supply Voltage Inspection).
stallation).
Direction Distinction Circuit Inspection (Service

Code 36)
The direction distinction circuit is built in the EPS ECU
[A]. So, the direction distinction circuit itself can not be
inspected.

Check the wiring

R Lead Terminal [C]
stallation).
Boosting Transformer Circuit Inspection (Service
Code 37)
The boosting transformer circuit is built in the EPS ECU
[A]. So, the boosting transformer circuit itself can not be
inspected.
STEERING 15-43

Check the wiring

R Lead Terminal [C]
stallation).
EPS Torque Sensor Inspection (Service Code 51)
Disconnect the EPS torque sensor connector [A].
the
Set the hand tester to the 1 range and connect it to
EPS torque sensor connector [A].
Measure the EPS torque sensor resistance.
EPS Torque Sensor Resistance Inspection
Connections:
(I) Y/R Lead [B] BK/BL Lead [C]
(II) Y/BK Lead [D] BK/BL Lead [C]
Standard:
Both Connections: Any Reading Resistance
(reference 10 40 at 20C
(68F))
If the reading is infinity () , replace the EPS unit (see
EPS Unit Removal/Installation).
15-44 STEERING
If the reading is in specification, disconnect the EPS ECU
connectors and check the wiring for continuity between
main harness connectors.

EPS Torque Sensor Connector [B]
Y/BK Lead [C]
Y/R Lead [D]
BK/BL Lead [E]
If the power supply voltage is good, erase the service
code with the service code erase mode and enter the self
-diagnosis mode again.
If the service code 51 appears again, replace the EPS
ECU (see EPS ECU Removal/Installation).
If the service code 51 disappears, it is a temporary failure.
EPS Motor Inspection (Service Code 61)
Compartment in the Frame chapter).
[B] KAF950G9
Disconnect the EPS motor connector [A].
GC/HA
[C] KAF950GD
STEERING 15-45
the
Set the hand tester to the 1 range and connect it to
EPS motor connector [A].
[B] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[C] KAF950GD
Measure the EPS motor resistance.
EPS Motor Resistance Inspection
Connections: R Lead [D] BK Lead [E]
Standard Any Reading Resistance (reference
(KAF950G9 0.15 0.19 at 20C (68F))
GC/HA):
Standard Any Reading Resistance (reference
(KAF950GD): 0.13 at 20C (68F))
If the reading is infinity () , replace the EPS unit (see
EPS Unit Removal/Installation).
If the reading is not infinity () , disconnect the EPS ECU

connectors and check the wiring for continuity between
main harness connectors.

R Lead Terminal [C]
stallation).
EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED) Removal
Remove:
Control Panel (see Control Panel Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Nut [A]
EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED) [B]
15-46 STEERING
EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED) Inspection
Remove:
ment Removal in the Frame chapter).
Speedometer Cable Upper End [A]
Disconnect the EPS warning indicator light (LED) lead
connectors.
R Lead [B]
BK/W Lead [C]
Using two auxiliary leads, connect the 12 V battery [A] to

the EPS warning indicator light (LED) lead connectors as
follows.
EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED) Inspection
Connections:
Battery (+) Terminal R Lead
Battery () Terminal BK/W Lead
If the EPS warning indicator light (LED) [A] does not light
up, replace it (see EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED) Re-
moval).
If the EPS warning indicator light (LED) lights up, check
the following items.
Oil Pressure Switch
Oil Pressure Warning Indicator Light
If the above items are normal, check the wiring for conti-
nuity (Refer to the next wiring diagram).
STEERING 15-47
EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED) Circuit
1. EPS ECU
2. EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED)
3. EPS Fuse 7.5 A
4. Oil Pressure Warning Indicator Light
5. Main Switch
6. Battery 12 V 52 Ah
7. Main Fuse 30 A
8. Fuse Box 2
9. Oil Pressure Switch
EPS ECU Removal
NOTICE
Never drop the EPS ECU, especially on a hard sur-
face. Such a shock to the EPS ECU can damage it.
Remove the band [A] and open the ECU cover [B].
Disconnect the EPS ECU connectors [A].

15-48 STEERING
Remove:
Right Glove Compartment (see Glove Compartment Re-
Screws [A]
EPS ECU [B] (with Cover)
Remove the cover [A] from the EPS ECU.
EPS ECU Installation

Check that the rubber dampers [A], collars [B] and wellnut
[C] are in place on the frame.
If the rubber dampers are damaged or deteriorated, re-
place them.
When installing the rubber dampers, note the following.
Install the two rubber dampers of the front side so that the
thin thickness side faces right side.
Do not apply a soap and water solution or rubber lubri-
cant.
Install the cover [A] on the EPS ECU.

Install the cover so that open side faces left side.
Insert the projections [B] of the EPS ECU to the rubber
dampers [C].
Tighten the screws securely.
When installing the band to the cover, note the following.

Pass the band through four slits [A] of the cover.
Bind the cover with the band securely.
If the EPS ECU was replaced, be sure to register the EPS
neutral position(see EPS Neutral Position Registration).
NOTE
The EPS system can not function until the neutral posi-
tion is registered in the new EPS ECU.
STEERING 15-49
EPS ECU Power Supply Voltage Inspection
Remove
Removal).
the band and open the cover (see EPS ECU
Visually inspect the EPS ECU connectors [A].

If the connector is clogged with mud or dust, blow it off
with compressed air.
If the connectors are normal, check the terminals of the
EPS ECU connectors.
Disconnect the EPS ECU connectors.
Visually inspect the terminals of the EPS ECU connectors
(main harness and EPS ECU).
If the terminals of the main harness connectors are dam-
aged, replace the main harness.
If the terminals of the EPS ECU connectors are damaged,
replace the EPS ECU.
If the terminals are normal, measure the power supply
voltage of the EPS ECU.
NOTE
Be sure the battery is fully charged.
Set the hand tester [A] to the DC 25 V range and connect
it to the main harness connectors [B].
EPS ECU Power Supply Voltage Inspection

Connections:
(I) Hand Tester (+) W Lead Terminal [C]
Hand Tester () Battery () Terminal
(II) Hand Tester (+) BL/R Lead Terminal [D]
Hand Tester () Battery () Terminal
Main Switch OFF:
Connection (I): Battery Voltage
Connection (II): 0 V
Engine Running:
Both Connections: Battery Voltage
If the reading is out of the specification, check the follow-

ing.
EPS Fuse 40 A (see Fuse Inspection)
EPS Fuse 7.5 A (see Fuse Inspection)
Oil Pressure Switch
Oil Pressure Warning Indicator Light
Power Source Wiring and Ground Wiring (Refer to the
next wiring diagram.)
15-50 STEERING
EPS ECU Power Source Circuit
1. EPS ECU 6. Battery 12 V 52 Ah

2. EPS Fuse 40 A 7. Main Fuse 30 A
3. EPS Fuse 7.5 A 8. Fuse Box 2
4. Oil Pressure Warning Indicator Light 9. Oil Pressure Switch
5. Main Switch
EPS Motor Removal
NOTICE
Do not remove the EPS motor [A] from the EPS unit
since it has been adjusted and set with precision at
the factory.
[B] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[C] KAF950GD
STEERING 15-51
EPS Torque Sensor Removal
NOTICE
Do not remove the EPS torque sensor [A] from the
EPS unit since it has been adjusted and set with
precision at the factory.
EPS Unit Removal

NOTICE
The EPS unit [A] has been adjusted and set with pre-
cision at the factory. Therefore, it should be han-
dled carefully, never struck sharply, as with a ham-
mer, or allowed to fall on a hard surface. Be careful
not to get water or mud on the EPS unit.
Remove:
chapter)
Left Radiator Side Cover (see Radiator Side Cover Re-
Water Hoses [A]
Remove the steering gear assembly bracket bolts [B] and
brackets [C].
Remove the mounting bolts [A] of the water pipe.
Remove the universal joint clamp bolt [A].

If the clamp bolt becomes hard to turn, search the posi-
tion that it can be easily turned while turning the steering
wheel slowly.
Pull out the rubber boot [B] upward temporary.
15-52 STEERING
Move the steering gear assembly, and pull off the shaft
[A] from the lower universal joint [B].
Lower the steering gear assembly, and then pull it for-
ward.
Remove:
Rubber Boot [C]
Universal Joint Clamp Bolt [D]
Lower Universal Joint
Remove:
Steering Shaft (see Steering Wheel and Steering Shaft
Removal)
Upper Universal Joint [B]
Disconnect:
EPS Motor Connector [C]
Torque Sensor Connector [D]
[E] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[F] KAF950GD
Remove:
Cotter Pin [A]
Pin [B]
Push Rod [C]
Spring [D]
Remove the EPS unit mounting bolts [A].

STEERING 15-53
Remove the EPS unit [A] downward while pushing down

the brake pedal [B].
Insert the lower shaft to the hole of the under cover and
avoid the upper shaft from the frame.
NOTICE
The EPS unit [A] has been adjusted and set with
precision at the factory. Do not try to disassemble
and repair the EPS unit.
[B] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[C] KAF950GD
EPS Unit Installation

Check that the rubber dampers [A] and upper and lower
collars [B] are in place on the frame.
If the rubber dampers are damaged or deteriorated, re-
place them.
When installing the rubber dampers, note the following.
Install the rubber dampers so that the thin thickness side
faces up.
Do not apply a rubber lubricant.
Install the EPS unit so that the EPS torque sensor [A]
faces upside.
Install the EPS unit mounting bolts [B] and tighten them
temporary.
Install
unit.
the lower universal joint [C] to the shaft of the EPS
notch on the shaft of the EPS unit with the clamp bolt hole
on the lower universal joint, and tighten it temporary.
[E] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[F] KAF950GD
15-54 STEERING
Install the rubber boot [A] on the shaft [B] of the steering
gear assembly temporary.
Install the shaft of the steering gear assembly to the lower
universal joint [C].
notch on the shaft of the steering gear assembly with the
clamp bolt hole on the lower universal joint, and tighten it
temporary.
Install:
Rubber dampers [E]
Brackets [F]
Apply non-permanent locking agent to the steering gear
assembly bracket bolts [G] and tighten them evenly.
Torque - Steering Gear Assembly Bracket Bolts: 52 Nm
(5.3 kgfm, 38 ftlb)
Tighten
torque.
the EPS unit mounting bolts to the specified
Torque - EPS Unit Mounting Bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 15

ftlb)
[H] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[I] KAF950GD
Install the rubber boot [A] so that the mark (F, Arrow) [B]
faces forward.
Install the upper universal joint [A] to the shaft of the EPS
unit [B].
Install the universal joint clamp bolt (lower) [C] while align-
ing the notch on the shaft of the EPS unit with the clamp
bolt hole on the upper universal joint, and tighten it tem-
porary.
Install the steering shaft [D] to the upper universal joint.
Install the universal joint clamp bolt (upper) [E] while align-
ing the notch on the steering shaft with the clamp bolt hole
on the upper universal joint, and tighten it temporary.
Install the steering shaft mounting bolts [F], washers [G]
and nuts [H].
Tighten all the universal joint clamp bolts to the specified
torque.
15 ftlb)
Install the washer [I] (KAF950GD).
[J] KAF950G9 GC/HA
STEERING 15-55
Mount
ily.

Adjustment)
ing)
Speed Sensor Removal/Installation
Refer to the Speed Sensor Removal/Installation in the
Electrical System chapter.
Speed Sensor Inspection
Refer to the Speed Sensor Inspection in the Electrical
System chapter.
If the speed sensor is normal, check the wiring for conti-
nuity (Refer to the next wiring diagram.).
Speed Sensor Circuit
1. EPS ECU 5. Battery 12 V 52 Ah

2. Speed Sensor 6. Main Fuse 30 A
3. Oil Pressure Warning Indicator Light 7. Fuse Box 2
4. Main Switch 8. Oil Pressure Switch
15-56 STEERING
EPS ECU Relay Removal/Installation
NOTICE
Never drop the relay, especially on a hard surface.
Such a shock to the relay can damage it.
Tilt up the seat.

Remove the EPS ECU relay [A] (BK/Y, W/Y, BR, W/BL)
from the tongue and disconnect the connector.
Installation is the reverse of removal.
EPS ECU Relay Inspection
Remove:
EPS ECU Relay (see EPS ECU Relay Removal/Instal-
lation)
Connect the hand tester [A] and a 12 V battery [B] to the
relay [C] as shown.
Testing Relay
Hand Tester Range: 1
Criteria: When battery is connected 0
When battery is disconnected
Relay Coil Terminals [1] and [2]
Relay Switch Terminals [3] and [4]
If the relay does not work as specified, replace the relay.
Diodes Removal/Installation
Tilt up the front seat and remove the diodes [A].
STEERING 15-57
Diodes Inspection
Remove the diodes (see Diodes Removal/Installation).
Set the hand tester to the 10 or 100 range and
connect it to the diode terminals to check the resistance
in both directions.
The resistance should be low in one direction and more
than ten times as much in the other direction. If any diode
shows low or high in both directions, the diode is defective
and the diode unit must be replaced.
NOTE
The actual meter reading varies with the meter used
and the individual diode, but, generally speaking, the
lower reading should be from the zero to one half the
scale.
EPS Fuse 40 A Removal
NOTICE
Before removing the 40 A fuse [A], be sure to dis-
connect the battery cables to avoid electrical shock.
NOTE
The EPS fuse 40 A is installing with bolts to the EPS
fuse box 1 [B].
Disconnect the battery cables (see Battery Removal in the

Electrical System chapter).
Lift up the EPS fuse box 1 [A] with rubber protector [B].
Slide the rubber protector [A].

Unlock the hooks to open the lids [B].
15-58 STEERING
Remove the terminal bolt [A] on both sides.
Unlock the hook to lift up the lid [A].

box 1 [C].EPS fuse 40 A [B] straight out of the EPS fuse
Pull the
EPS Fuse 7.5 A Removal

Unlock the hook to lift up the lid [A].
Pull the EPS fuse 7.5 A [A] straight out of the EPS fuse
box 2 [B].
Fuse Installation
If a fuse fails during operation, inspect the EPS system to
determine the cause, and then replace it with a new fuse
of proper amperage.
For EPS fuse 40 A, after installing the lead terminals,
tighten the terminal bolts securely.
Fuse Inspection
Remove the fuse (see EPS Fuse 7.5 A Removal/EPS
Fuse 40 A Removal).
Refer to the Fuse Inspection in the Electrical System
chapter.
For EPS fuse 40 A, there is window for inspection in the
upper surface.
FRAME 16-1
Frame
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 16-3
Seats and Seat Belts .............................................................................................................. 16-12
Front Seat Removal .......................................................................................................... 16-12
Front Seat Installation ....................................................................................................... 16-12
Rear Seat Removal........................................................................................................... 16-13
Rear Seat Installation........................................................................................................ 16-14
Seat Belt Removal ............................................................................................................ 16-14
Seat Belt Installation ......................................................................................................... 16-15
Control Panel.......................................................................................................................... 16-16
Control Panel Removal ..................................................................................................... 16-16
Control Panel Installation .................................................................................................. 16-17
Glove Compartment Removal........................................................................................... 16-17
Front Cargo Compartment...................................................................................................... 16-18
Front Cargo Hood Removal .............................................................................................. 16-18
Front Cargo Hood Installation ........................................................................................... 16-18
Front Cargo Hood Cable Adjustment................................................................................ 16-19
Front Cargo Compartment Removal................................................................................. 16-19
Front Cargo Compartment Installation.............................................................................. 16-19
Cargo Bed .............................................................................................................................. 16-20
Cargo Bed Removal.......................................................................................................... 16-20
Cargo Bed Installation....................................................................................................... 16-20
Front, Center and Rear Bars .................................................................................................. 16-22
Front Bar Removal............................................................................................................ 16-22
Front Bar Installation......................................................................................................... 16-22
Rear Bar Removal ............................................................................................................ 16-22
Rear Bar Installation ......................................................................................................... 16-23
Center Bar Removal ......................................................................................................... 16-23
Center Bar Installation ...................................................................................................... 16-24
Cargo Bed Latch Position Inspection................................................................................ 16-24
Cargo Bed Latch Position Adjustment .............................................................................. 16-25
Guard...................................................................................................................................... 16-26
Front Guard Removal ....................................................................................................... 16-26
Front Guard Installation .................................................................................................... 16-26 16
Fenders .................................................................................................................................. 16-27
Front Fender Removal ...................................................................................................... 16-27
Front Fender Installation ................................................................................................... 16-27
Rear Fender Assembly Removal ...................................................................................... 16-27
Covers .................................................................................................................................... 16-29
Front Cover Removal........................................................................................................ 16-29
Front Cover Installation..................................................................................................... 16-29
Front Fender Inner Cover Removal .................................................................................. 16-29
Front Fender Inner Cover Installation ............................................................................... 16-30
Radiator Side Cover Removal .......................................................................................... 16-30
Front Side Cover Removal................................................................................................ 16-30
Front Side Cover Installation............................................................................................. 16-31
Rear Side Cover Removal ................................................................................................ 16-31
Rear Side Cover Installation ............................................................................................ 16-31
Middle Cover Removal ..................................................................................................... 16-31
Middle Cover Installation................................................................................................... 16-32
Flap Cover Removal ......................................................................................................... 16-32
16-2 FRAME
Flap and Flap Stay Removal............................................................................................. 16-32

Floor Center Panel Removal............................................................................................. 16-32
Floor Center Panel Installation.......................................................................................... 16-34
Rear End Subframe................................................................................................................ 16-35
Rear End Subframe Removal ........................................................................................... 16-35
Rear End Subframe Installation ....................................................................................... 16-35
FRAME 16-3
Exploded View
This page intentionally left blank.
16-4 FRAME
Exploded View
FRAME 16-5
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Battery Holder Mounting Nuts 17 1.7 13
2 Stay Rod Rear Nut 88 9.0 65
3. KAF950G9 GC/HA, CA and EUR Models
4. Apply grease on both surface.
5. Apply grease on the groove.
6. KAF950G9 GC/HA
AD: Apply adhesive.
G: Apply grease.
16-6 FRAME
Exploded View
FRAME 16-7
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Center Bar Mounting Bolts 64 6.5 47
2 Front Bar Mounting Bolts (Lower) 98 10.0 72.3
3 Front Bar Mounting Bolts (Upper) 44 4.5 32
4 Front Seat Bar Mounting Bolts 64 6.5 47
5 Rear Bar Mounting Bolts (Lower) 64 6.5 47
6 Rear Bar Mounting Bolts (Upper) 44 4.5 32
7 Rear Bar Mounting Nuts (Middle) 44 4.5 32
8 Rear End Subframe Mounting Nuts 44 4.5 32 R
9 Top Bar Mounting Bolts 44 4.5 32
10. Reflector (KAF950G9 GB, CA Models)
11. Reflector (KAF950GC , CA Models)
12. KAF950G9 GC/HA
AD: Apply adhesive.
G: Apply grease.
16-8 FRAME
Exploded View
FRAME 16-9
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Seat Belt Buckle Mounting Bolts 34 3.5 25
2 Seat Belt Mounting Bolts 34 3.5 25
3. KAF950G9, GA/HA
AD: Apply adhesive.
G: Apply grease.
16-10 FRAME
Exploded View
FRAME 16-11
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Tail Gate Fixing Lever Screws 4.4 0.45 39 inlb L
2 Screen Fixing Lever Screws 4.4 0.45 39 inlb L
3. Fix the bolt to inside from outside.
4. 18 mm (0.71 in.)
5. Dampers
AD: Apply adhesive.
G: Apply grease.
16-12 FRAME
Seats and Seat Belts
Front Seat Removal
Tilt up the seat [A].
Remove:
Seat Bracket Nuts [B]
Seat Brackets [C]
Seat
Remove:
Caps
Seat Back Mounting Nuts [A]
Seat Back [B]
[C] KAF950G9 GA/HA
[D] KAF950GB
Front Seat Installation

Replace the seat bracket nuts and seat back mounting
nuts with new ones.
Apply lithium grease (NLGI Grade No.2) to the inner sur-
face of the seat bracket [A].
Be careful not to overtighten the seat bracket nuts. After
tightening the nuts, the seat must be moved up and down
smoothly.
Install the front seat back [A] so that its thicker side [B]
faces downward.
Apply adhesive to the caps.
FRAME 16-13
When replacing the rear handle pad [A], install it on the

seat bar [B] with adhesive agent.
Apply adhesive cement to 3 places: Both ends and center
(Length = 80 mm, 3.15 in.).
Slit [C]
Install the cover [D] so that its velcro side [E] faces down-
ward.
Rear Seat Removal

Fold the rear seat and push its assembly into the stored
position.
Pivot Bolt [A]
Remove:
Nut [B]
Washers [C]
Rear Seat [D]
Remove:
Rear Seat Back Mounting Nuts [A]
Rear Seat Stay [B]
Rear Seat Back [C]
Remove:
Bottom Lever Bolts [A]
Bottom Lever [B] with Upper Lever [C]
Remove the circlip [A].

16-14 FRAME
Remove (Left Side only):

Circlip [A]
Spring [B] and Pin [C]
Separate the upper lever from the bottom lever.
Rear Seat Installation

Replace the removed nuts with new ones.
Install the rear seat back [A] so that its thicker side [B]
faces upward.
Seat Belt Removal

Remove:
Front Seat Belt Mounting Bolts [A]
Front Seat Belts [B]
Remove:
Front Seat Belt Buckle Mounting Bolts [A]
Front Seat Belt Buckles [B]
Remove:
Rear Seat Belt Mounting Bolts [A]
Rear Seat Belts [B]
FRAME 16-15
Remove:
Rear Seat Belt Buckle Mounting Bolts [A]
Rear Seat Belt Buckles [B]
Seat Belt Installation

Tighten:
Torque - Seat Belt Mounting Bolts: 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25
ftlb)
Install the front [A] and rear seat belts so that their instal-
lation angle is 40 60 [B].
Tighten:
Torque - Seat Belt Buckle Mounting Bolts: 34 Nm (3.5
kgfm, 25 ftlb)
Install the front seat belt buckles [A] so that their red but-
tons [B] face inside.
16-16 FRAME
Control Panel
Control Panel Removal
Remove:
ment Removal)
Remove the bands [A] and clamp [B], and free the leads.
Disconnect:
Light Switch Lead Connector [C]
Oil Pressure Warning/Glow Plug Indicator Light Lead
Connector [D]
Speedometer Illumination Light Lead Connector [E]
Coolant Temperature Warning/Parking Brake Indicator
Light Lead Connector [F]
Power Steering Warning Light Lead Connector [G]
Hour Meter Lead Connector [H]
Main Switch Lead Connector [I]
Power Outlet Connector Lead Connector [J]
Fuel Gauge/Hour Meter Lead Connectors [K]
[L] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[M] KAF950GD
Disconnect
(KAF950GD).
the horn switch lead connectors [A]
Remove:
Bolts [A]
Speedometer Cable Upper End [B]
Speedometer [C] with Bracket
FRAME 16-17
Control Panel
Remove the steering wheel (see Steering Wheel and

Steering Shaft Removal in the Steering chapter).
Remove
lars.
the control panel mounting screws [A] and col-
Open the glove compartment covers [A]

Remove the control panel [B]
Control Panel Installation

Run the harness, cables and leads correctly (see Cable,
Glove Compartment Removal
Remove:
Control Panel (see Control Panel Removal)
Screws [A]
Glove Compartment [B]
16-18 FRAME
Front Cargo Compartment
Front Cargo Hood Removal
Tilt up the cargo hood [A].
Remove:
Cargo Hood Mounting Bolts [B] and washers
Cargo Hood
Front Cargo Hood Installation

If the dampers [A] are removed from the front cargo hood
[B], install them as follows.
0 5 mm (0 0.20 in.) [C]
2 5 mm (0.08 0.20 in.) [D]

Contact the bracket [A] of the front cargo hood and the
boss [B] of the arm [C].
FRAME 16-19
Front Cargo Compartment
If the hook bracket was removed from the front cargo
hood, install it as follows.
Tighten the bolts [A] while pushing the bracket [B] forward
[C].
Front Cargo Hood Cable Adjustment

Compartment Removal).
Loosen the adjuster mounting nuts [A], and slides the ad-
juster as shown in the figure.
20.5 21.5 mm (0.81 0.85 in.) [B]
Tighten the adjuster mounting nuts securely.
Front Cargo Compartment Removal

Remove:
Front Fenders (see Front Fender Removal)
Coolant Reserve Tank (see Coolant Reserve Tank Re-
moval in the Cooling System chapter)
Remove:
Screws [A] and Collars
Remove:
Side Mounting Bolts [A] (Left and Right)
Front Cargo Compartment [B]
Front Cargo Compartment Installation

Installation
parts size.
is the reverse of removal, note the following
Screws [A] [L = 16 mm (0.63 in.)] and Collars [L = 4 mm

(0.16 in.)]
Screws [B] [L = 22 mm (0.87 in.)] and Collars [L = 6 mm
(0.24 in.)]
Tapping Screw [C] [L = 16 mm (0.63 in.)] and Collar [L =
4 mm (0.16 in.)]
16-20 FRAME
Cargo Bed
Cargo Bed Removal
Remove the rear fender assembly (see Rear Fender As-
sembly Removal).
Open the clamps [A] and disconnect the tail/brake light
lead connectors [B] (left and right).
Remove (Left and Right):
Bolts [C]
Tail/Brake Light Assemblies [D]
Open the steal clamp on the cargo bed and free the lead.
Unlock the hooks [A].

to store. rear seat and push it toward the front seat back
Raise the

Snap Pins [A]
Cargo Bed Mounting Pins [B]
Remove the cargo bed.
Cargo Bed Installation

Apply lithium grease (NLGI Grade No.2) to the cargo bed
mounting pins.
Check that the following are in place on the cargo bed and
frame.
Cargo Bed Rubber Dampers [A]
Frame Rubber Dampers [B]
Tail Gate Pivot Rubber Dampers (Left and Right)
FRAME 16-21
Cargo Bed
When the cargo bed is disassembled, note the following

when installing the plates and tail gate.
Be sure the clearance [A] between the back end of the
carrier [B] and the bottom of the tail gate [C] is more than
2 mm (0.079 in.) as shown in the figure (left and right).
Be sure the clearance [A] between the plate end [B] and
the tail gate end [C] is less than 5 mm (0.197 in.) as shown
in the figure (left and right).
16-22 FRAME
Front, Center and Rear Bars
Front Bar Removal
Remove:
Front Bar Mounting Bolts [A] and Washers (Upper)
Front Bar Mounting Bolts [B] (Lower)
Front Bar [C]
Front Bar Installation

Tighten:
Torque - Front Bar Mounting Bolts (Upper): 44 Nm (4.5
kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Front Bar Mounting Bolts (Lower): 98 Nm (10,0
kgfm, 72,3 ftlb)
Install the front fenders (see Front Fender Installation).
Rear Bar Removal
Rear Side Covers (see Rear Side Cover Removal)
Remove:
Rear Bar Mounting Bolts [A] and Washers (Upper)
Remove:
Air Duct [A]
Rear Bar Mounting Bolts [B] and Nuts (Middle)
Rear Bar Mounting Bolts [C], Washers and Nuts (Lower)
Remove:
Air Duct [A]
Rear Bar Mounting Bolts [B] and Nuts (Middle)
Rear Bar Mounting Bolts [C], Washers and Nuts (Lower)
Rear Bar [D]
FRAME 16-23
Rear Bar Installation
Be sure the rubber plates [A] are in position.
Plug one hole [B] and plug only half about another hole
[C], using the rubber plate.
Be sure the rubber dampers [A] are in position.

The rubber damper rear end and bracket rear end are on
the same line [B].
Front [C]
When installing the right middle pipe [A], tighten the bolts
and nuts as shown in the figure.
Front [B]
Replace the rear bar mounting nuts (lower) with new
ones.
Tighten:
Torque - Rear Bar Mounting Bolts (Upper): 44 Nm (4.5
kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Rear Bar Mounting Nuts (Middle): 44 Nm (4.5
kgfm, 32 ftlb)
Rear Bar Mounting Bolts (Lower): 64 Nm (6.5
kgfm, 47 ftlb)
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapter).
Center Bar Removal
Remove:
Rear Bar (see Rear Bar Removal)
Top Bar Mounting Bolts [A] and Washers
Top Bars [B]
16-24 FRAME
Remove:
Seat Bar Mounting Bolts [A] and Washers
Seat Bar [B] with Front Seat Back
Remove:
Front Bar Mounting Bolts (Upper Side only)
Center Bar Mounting Bolts [A], Washers and Nuts
Center Bar [B]
Center Bar Installation

Replace the center bar mounting nuts with new ones.
Tighten:
Torque - Center Bar Mounting Bolts: 64 Nm (6.5 kgfm, 47
ftlb)
Top Bar Mounting Bolts: 44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 32
ftlb)
Seat Bar Mounting Bolts: 64 Nm (6.5 kgfm, 47
ftlb)
Route the fuel tank breather hose [A] and install its end
into the steel clamp [B] on the center bar as shown in the
figure.
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapter).
Cargo Bed Latch Position Inspection

Cargo bed must be latched securely on the cargo bed or
the rear seat hooks [A] without rattling.
Latch [B]
If there is rattling or not snug enough, adjust the latch
positions.
FRAME 16-25
Cargo Bed Latch Position Adjustment
Release the mounting bolts [A].
Reposition the latch to the suitable place by sliding within
the ellipse bolt holes.
Retighten the mounting bolts.
NOTE
Adjustment must be made on both sides.
16-26 FRAME
Guard
Front Guard Removal
Remove:
Screws [A] and Collars (KAF950G9 GC/HA)
Front Guard Cover [B] (KAF950G9 GC/HA)

Front Guard Bolts [A] (Upper)
Front Guard Bolts [B] and Nuts (Lower)
Remove the front guard [C].
[D] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[E] KAF950GD
Front Guard Installation

Replace the nuts (lower) with new ones.
FRAME 16-27
Fenders
Front Fender Removal
Remove:
Rivets [B]
Clear the hook portion [C] from the slot and remove the
front fender [D].
Front Fender Installation

Check that the clip-nuts [A] are in place as shown in the
figure.
Insert
fender.
the hook portion [A] into the slot [B] of the front
Install
size.
the front fender, note the following parts [A] [B] [C]
Screws [A] [L = 16 mm (0.63 in.)] and Collars [L = 4 mm

(0.16 in.)]
Screw [B] [L = 22 mm (0.87 in.)] and Collar [L = 6 mm
(0.24 in.)]
Tapping Screw [C] [L = 20 mm (0.79 in.)] and Collar [L =
9.5 mm (0.37 in.)]
Quick Rivets [D]
Rear Fender Assembly Removal

Remove:
Rear Fender [B]
16-28 FRAME
Fenders
Remove:
Tapping Screws [A]
Bolt [B], Collar and Nut
Rear Fender Stay [C]
Remove:
Bolts [A], Collars and Nuts
Rear Fender Inner Cover [B]
FRAME 16-29
Covers
Front Cover Removal
Remove:
Front Guard (see Front Guard Removal)
Screws [A] and Collars (Left and Right)
Bolts [B] and Washers (Left and Right)
Disconnect the head light connecters [A] (Left and Right).

Remove the front cover [B] with head lights assembly.
Front Cover Installation

Check that the clip-nuts [A] (left and right) are in place as
Attach the rubber damper [A] of the bracket to the dent

[B] of the front cover.
Front Fender Inner Cover Removal

Remove:
Front Fender (see Front Fender Removal)
Tapping Screw [A] and Collar
Quick Rivets [B]
Front Fender Inner Cover [C] (Middle)
16-30 FRAME
Covers
Remove:
Tapping Screws [A] and Collars
Quick Rivets [B]
Front Fender Inner Cover [C] (Front)
Remove:
Middle Cover (see Middle Cover Removal)
Screws [B]
Nut [C] and Collar
Quick Rivets [D]
Front Fender Inner Cover [E] (Rear)
Front Fender Inner Cover Installation

Replace the nut with a new one.
Radiator Side Cover Removal
Remove:
Tapping Screws [A]
Bolt [B]
Remove the front guard mounting nut [C] temporary, and
remove the radiator side cover [D].
Front Side Cover Removal

Remove:
Quick Rivets [B]
Front Side Cover [C]
FRAME 16-31
Covers
Front Side Cover Installation
Install
size.
the front side cover, note the following parts [A] [B]
Screw [A] [L = 16 mm (0.63 in.)] and Collar [L = 4 mm

(0.16 in.)]
Screw [B] [L = 16 mm (0.63 in.)] and Collar [L = 6 mm
(0.24 in.)]
Quick Rivets [C]
Rear Side Cover Removal

Remove:
Tapping Screws [B] and Collars
Quick Rivets [C]
Rear Side Cover [D]
Rear Side Cover Installation

figure.
Install the rear side cover, note the following parts [B] [C]
[D] size.
Screws [B] [L = 16 mm (0.63 in.)] and Collars [L = 4 mm
(0.16 in.)]
Screw [C] [L = 16 mm (0.63 in.)] and Collar [L = 6 mm
(0.24 in.)]
Tapping Screws [D] [L = 16 mm (0.63 in.)] and Collars [L =
4 mm (0.24 in.)]
Quick Rivets [E]
Middle Cover Removal

Remove:
Quick Rivets [B]
Screw [C] and Collar
Middle Cover [D]
16-32 FRAME
Covers
Middle Cover Installation
Install is the reverse of removal, note the following.
figure.
Flap Cover Removal

Remove:
Quick Rivets [B]
Flap Cover [C]
Flap and Flap Stay Removal

Remove:
Rear Side Cover (see Rear Side Cover Removal)
Flap Cover (see Flap Cover Removal)
Screw [A] and Collar
Quick Rivet [B]
Flap [C]
Remove:
Flap Stay Mounting Bolts [A]
Flap Stay [B]
Floor Center Panel Removal

Remove:
Screws [A]
Quick Rivets [B]
Front Seat Lower Cover (Front) [C]
FRAME 16-33
Covers
Remove:
Bolts [A]
Throttle Pedal [B]
Remove:
Tapping Screws [A]
Front Floor Center Panel [B]
Remove:
Tapping Screws [A]
Front Seat Lower Cover Rear [B]
Remove:
Fuel Tank (see Fuel Tank Removal in the Fuel System
chapter)
Tapping Screws [A]
Tapping Screw [B] and Washer
Rear Seat Lower Cover [C]
Remove:
Tapping Screws [A]
Rear Floor Center Panel [B]
16-34 FRAME
Covers
Floor Center Panel Installation
Install the bushing [A] so that the cut side [B] faces to the
throttle pedal.
FRAME 16-35
Rear End Subframe
Rear End Subframe Removal
Remove:
stallation chapter)
Transmission Case (see Transmission Case Removal in
the Transmission chapter)
Rear End Subframe Mounting Bolts [A] and Nuts
Rear End Subframe [B]
Rear End Subframe Installation

Replace
ones.
the rear end subframe mounting nuts with new
Tighten:
Torque - Rear End Subframe Mounting Nuts: 44 Nm (4.5
kgfm, 33 ftlb)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 17-1
Electrical System
Table of Contents
Exploded View................................... 17-4 Armature Inspection..................... 17-44
Wiring Diagram (KAF950G9, GA/HA) 17-12 Pinion Gear Inspection................. 17-45
Wiring Diagram (KAF950GB, GC)..... 17-14 Starter Switch Inspection ............. 17-45
Wiring Diagram (KAF950GD) ............ 17-16 Starter Circuit Relay Inspection ... 17-45
Specifications .................................... 17-18 Preheating System ............................ 17-47
Special Tools ..................................... 17-20 Glow Plug Removal ..................... 17-47
Parts Location.................................... 17-21 Glow Plug Installation .................. 17-47
Precautions........................................ 17-23 Glow Plug Inspection ................... 17-47
Electrical Wiring................................. 17-24 Preheating Timer Inspection ........ 17-48
Wiring Inspection ......................... 17-24 Glow Plug Relay Inspection ......... 17-48
Battery ............................................... 17-25 Glow Plug Relay Installation ........ 17-48
Battery Removal .......................... 17-25 Fuel Cut Solenoid .............................. 17-50
Battery Installation ....................... 17-25 Fuel Cut Solenoid ........................ 17-50
Electrolyte Level Inspection Fuel Cut Solenoid Inspection ....... 17-50
(Conventional Type Battery)...... 17-27 Radiator Fan...................................... 17-51
Electrolyte Specific Gravity Radiator Fan Circuit Inspection.... 17-51
Inspection (Conventional Type Radiator Fan Motor Inspection..... 17-51
Battery)...................................... 17-27 Radiator Fan Breaker Inspection . 17-51
Charging Condition Inspection Radiator Fan Relay Inspection..... 17-52
(Conventional Type Battery)...... 17-27 Meter, Gauge..................................... 17-54
Initial Charging (Conventional Speedometer Removal ................ 17-54
Type Battery)............................. 17-27 Speedometer Installation ............. 17-54
Charging Condition Inspection Fuel Gauge/Hour Meter Removal
(Sealed Type Battery) ............... 17-29 (KAF950GD) ............................. 17-55
Ordinary Charging........................ 17-30 Fuel Gauge/Hour Meter
Battery Testing Chart Installation (KAF950GD) ........... 17-55
(Conventional Type Battery)...... 17-31 Fuel Gauge (LED) Inspection
Alternator ........................................... 17-33 (KAF950GD) ............................. 17-55
Alternator Removal ...................... 17-33 Fuel Level Gauge Inspection
Alternator Installation ................... 17-33 (KAF950GD) ............................. 17-56
Alternator Disassembly ................ 17-33 Lighting System ................................. 17-57
Alternator Assembly..................... 17-35 Headlight Beam Adjustment ........ 17-57
Alternator Operational Inspection 17-36 Headlight Bulb Replacement ....... 17-57
Stator Coil Inspection................... 17-37 Tail/Brake Light Replacement ...... 17-57
Rotor Coil Inspection.................... 17-37 Light Switch Bulb Replacement ... 17-58
17
Slip Ring Cleaning ....................... 17-37 Indicator Light Bulb Replacement 17-59
Slip Ring Diameter ....................... 17-37 Speedometer Illumination Bulb
Carbon Brush Length................... 17-37 Replacement ............................. 17-59
Rectifier Inspection ...................... 17-38 Headlight Removal....................... 17-60
Regulator Inspection .................... 17-38 Headlight Installation.................... 17-60
Alternator Ball Bearing Inspection 17-38 Reverse Light Switch Installation
Electric Starter System ...................... 17-40 (EUR Model) ............................. 17-60
Starter Motor Removal................. 17-40 Switches and Sensors ....................... 17-62
Starter Motor Installation.............. 17-40 Brake Light Switch Inspection...... 17-62
Starter Motor Disassembly........... 17-40 Radiator Fan Switch Inspection ... 17-62
Starter Motor Assembly ............... 17-42 Coolant Temperature Switch
Carbon Brush Inspection ............. 17-43 Inspection.................................. 17-63
Yoke Inspection............................ 17-43 Switch Inspection ......................... 17-64
Brush Plate Inspection ................. 17-44 Speed Sensor Removal ............... 17-64
Commutator Cleaning/Inspection. 17-44 Speed Sensor Installation ............ 17-65
17-2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Speed Sensor Inspection............. 17-65 50 A Fuse Removal ..................... 17-66

Fuses................................................. 17-66 Fuse Installation........................... 17-66
Fuse Removal.............................. 17-66 Fuse Inspection............................ 17-67
Fuse Installation........................... 17-66

Exploded View
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Alternator Adjusting Bracket Bolts 20 2.0 15
2 Alternator Mounting Bolt 39 4.0 29
3 Alternator Pulley Locknut 11 1.1 97 inlb
4 Starter Motor End Cover Screws 1.5 0.15 13 inlb
5 Starter Motor Mounting Bolts 39 4.0 29
6 Starter Motor Through Bolts 9.3 0.95 82 inlb
G: Apply grease.
Exploded View
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Battery Holder Mounting Nuts 17 1.7 13
2 Connecting Plate Nuts 1.2 0.12 11 inlb
3 Coolant Temperature Switch 27 2.8 20 L
4 Glow Plugs 17 1.7 13
5 Neutral Switch 15 1.5 11
6 Oil Pressure Switch 14 1.4 10 SS
9. KAF950G9 GC/HA, Other than US Model
10. Fuel Cut Solenoid Connector
11. Glow Plug Relay
12. Light Switch
13. Preheating Timer
14. Radiator Fan Breaker
15. Radiator Fan Relay
16. Starter Circuit Relay
17. Horn Button
18. KAF950GB
19. KAF950G9, GA/HA
20. KAF950GD
G: Apply grease.
Exploded View
Exploded View
Torque
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Speed Sensor Bolt 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
2. KAF950G9 GC/HA
3. Ground Lead Connection
4. Horn
5. Horn Switch Contact
6. Steering Gear Assembly
7. Hour Meter
8. Fuel Gauge/Hour Meter
9. Speedometer
Exploded View
EUR Model
Exploded View
1. Reverse Light
2. Reverse Light Switch
Wiring Diagram (KAF950G9, GA/HA)
Wiring Diagram (KAF950G9, GA/HA)
Wiring Diagram (KAF950GB, GC)
Wiring Diagram (KAF950GB, GC)
Wiring Diagram (KAF950GD)
Wiring Diagram (KAF950GD)
Specifications

Battery
Capacity 12 V 52 Ah
Voltage 12.6 V or more
Conventional Type:
Gross Weight 14.5 kg (32.0 lb)
Electrolyte Volume 3.8 L (232 cu in.)
Electrolyte Level Between upper and lower level
Specific Gravity 1.265 at 20C (68F)
Sealed Type:
Gross Weight 13.4 kg (29.5 lb)
Electrolyte Volume 3.03 L (185 cu in.)
Alternator
Type Three-phase (built-in regulator/rectifier)
Fan Belt Deflection 9.5 11.5 mm (0.37 0.45 in.) at 98 N
(10 kgf, 22 lb)
Output Voltage 13.3 14.8 V at 25C (77F)
Output Amperage (no load) 10 A or less
Output Amperage (load) 20 A or more
Stator Coil Resistance 0.2 or less
Rotor Coil Resistance 2.8 3.0
Slip Ring Diameter 14.4 mm (0.57 in.) 14.0 mm (0.55 in.)
Carbon Brush Length (Projected 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) 8.4 mm (0.33 in.)
Portion)
Electric Starter System
Starter Motor:
Carbon Brush Length 15.5 mm (0.61 in.) 11.0 mm (0.43 in.)
Commutator Diameter 30 mm (1.18 in.) 29 mm (1.14 in.)
Preheating System
Glow Plug Resistance About 0.1 5.0
Meter, Gauge
Fuel Level Gauge Resistance:
Full Position 9 11
Empty Position 119 121
Switches and Sensors
Brake Light Switch Timing ON after 10 mm (0.39 in.) of pedal travel
Radiator Fan Switch Resistance:
Rising Temperature From OFF to ON at 86 90C (187
194F)
Falling Temperature From ON to OFF at 81 85C (178
185F)
ON: Less than 0.5
OFF: More than 1 M
Specifications
Coolant Temperature Switch

Resistance:
Rising Temperature From OFF to ON at 112 118C (234
244F)
Falling Temperature From ON to OFF within 10C (50F) of
ON temperature
ON: Less than 0.5
OFF: More than 1 M
Special Tools
Socket Wrench, Hex 22: Hand Tester:
57001-1236 57001-1394
Parts Location
Hour Meter [A]
Main Switch [B]
Power Outlet Connector [C]
Fuel Gauge/Hour Meter [D]
[E] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[F] KAF950GD
Light Switch [A]

Oil Pressure Warning Indicator Light [B]
Coolant Temperature Warning Indicator Light [C]
Speedometer [D]
Parking Brake Indicator Light [E]
Glow Plug Light [F]
Horn Button [G]
[H] KAF950G9 GC/HA
[I] KAF950GD
Starter Circuit Relay [A]

Preheating Timer [B]
Radiator Fan Relay [C]
Glow Plug Relay [D]
Parking Brake Light Switch [E]
Parts Location
Fuse Box [A]
Frame Ground Terminal [B]
Radiator Fan Breaker [C]
Battery 12 V 52 Ah [D]
50 A Fuse [E]
Starter Motor [A]

Alternator [B]
Glow Plugs [C]
Coolant Temperature Switch [D]
Engine Ground Terminal [E]
Oil Pressure Switch [A]

Fuel Cut Solenoid Valve [B]
Neutral Switch [C]
Horn [A]
Radiator Fan Switch [B]
Radiator Fan [C]
Brake Light Switch [D]
Speed Sensor [A]

Precautions
There are a number of important precautions that are
musts when servicing electrical systems. Learn and ob-
serve all the rules below.
Do not reverse the battery cable connections. This will
burn out the diodes in the electrical parts.
Always check battery condition before condemning other
parts of an electrical system. A fully charged battery is a
must for conducting accurate electrical system tests.
The electrical parts should never be struck sharply, as
with a hammer, or allowed to fall on a hard surface. Such
a shock to the parts can damage them.
To prevent damage to electrical parts, do not disconnect
the battery cables or any other electrical connections
when the main switch is ON, or while the engine is
running.
Because of the large amount of current, never keep the
main switch turned to the start position when the starter
motor will not turn over, or the current may burn out the
starter motor windings.
Take care not to short the cables that are directly con-
nected to the battery positive (+) terminal to the chassis
ground.
Troubles may involve one or in some cases all items.
Never replace a defective part without determining what
CAUSED the failure. If the failure was brought on by
some other item or items, they too must be repaired or
replaced, or the replacement part will soon fail again.
Make sure all connectors in the circuit are clean and tight,
and examine wires for signs of burning, fraying, etc. Poor
wires and bad connections will affect electrical system op-
eration.
Measure coil and winding resistance when the part is cold
(at room temperature).
Electrical Wiring
Wiring Inspection
Visually
etc.
inspect the wiring for signs of burning, fraying,
If any wiring is poor, replace the damaged wiring.

Pull each connector [A] apart and inspect it for corrosion,
dirt, and damage.
If the connector is corroded or dirty, clean it carefully. If it
is damaged, replace it.
Check the wiring for continuity.
Use the wiring diagram to find the ends of the lead which
is suspected of being a problem.
Connect the hand tester between the ends of the leads.
Set the tester to the 1 range, and read the tester.
If the tester does not read 0 , the lead is defective. Re-
place the lead or the wiring harness if necessary.
Battery
In this model, two batteries are prepared.
Conventional Type Battery [A] (KAF950G9 GC/HA,
Other Than US Model)
The caps [B] can be removed.
Sealed Type Battery [A] (US Model and KAF950GD)
Battery Removal
Remove the front seat lower cover rear (see Floor Center
Panel Removal in the Frame chapter).
Slide the positive terminal cover [A] out.
first, and thenthethebattery
Disconnect negative () cable and lead [B]
positive (+) cable and leads [C].
Battery Holder Mounting Nuts [D]
Remove:
Battery Holder [E]

Remove the battery [F] backward [G].
Battery Installation
Check that the rubber dampers [A] on the battery case [B]
and battery holder [C] are properly in place.
Install the battery case [A] so that the long side [B] faces
right side [C].
Battery
Install the O-rings [A] from the opposite end of the threads
[B] of each battery holder rod [C] to protect the O-rings.
NOTE
Do not set the O-ring on the threads of the rod.
Install:
Battery Holder Rod (Front Side)
Pipe [A]
For Conventional Type Battery: 206.5 mm (8.13 in.)
For Sealed Type Battery: 199.5 mm (7.85 in.)
Battery Holder [B]
Install the holder so that the short side [C] of the holder
faces forward.
Tighten the battery holder mounting nut [D] lightly.
Put the battery on the case so that the positive terminal

[A] faces right side.
Install:
Battery Holder [B]
Battery Holder Rod (Rear Side)
Pipe [C] and Nut [D]
Tighten:
Torque - Battery Holder Mounting Nuts: 17 Nm (1.7 kgfm,
13 ftlb)
Connect the four leads on the positive lead connector [A]

as shown in the figure.
Red/White, Red [B]
Blue, White [C]
Black/White [D]
Red (Alternator Lead) [E]
Install the four leads almost parallel to the positive cable
so that they can be covered with the cap easily.
Connect the positive (+) cable and leads first, and then
connect the negative () cable and lead (black and
black/yellow).
Put a light coat of grease on the terminals to prevent cor-
rosion.
Cover the positive terminals with the positive terminal
cover.
Battery
(for Sealed Type Battery)
Confirm the position of the battery handle [A] is below the
holder [B] and cables [C] as shown in the figure.
Electrolyte Level Inspection (Conventional Type

Battery)
Refer to the Electrolyte Level Inspection (Conventional
Type Battery) in the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Electrolyte Specific Gravity Inspection
Refer to the Electrolyte Specific Gravity Inspection (Con-
ventional Type Battery) in the Periodic Maintenance chap-
ter.
Charging Condition Inspection (Conventional
Type Battery)
Refer to the Charging Condition Inspection (Conventional
Type Battery) in the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Initial Charging (Conventional Type Battery)
DANGER
Batteries produce an explosive gas mixture of hy-
drogen and oxygen that can cause serious injury
and burns if ignited. Keep the battery away from
sparks and open flames during charging. When
using a battery charger, connect the battery to the
charger before turning on the charger. This proce-
dure prevents sparks at the battery terminals which
could ignite any battery gases.
NOTICE
Charging the battery at a rate higher than speci-
fied may ruin the battery. Charging at a high rate
causes excess heat which can warp the plates and
cause internal shorting. Higher-than-normal charg-
ing rates also cause the plates to shed active mate-
rial. Deposits will accumulate, and can cause inter-
nal shorting
If the temperature of the electrolyte rises above
45C (113F) during charging, reduce the charging
rate to lower the temperature, and increase charg-
ing time proportionately.
Battery
Remove:
Battery (see Battery Removal)
Filler Caps (see Electrolyte Level Inspection (Conven-
tional Type Battery))
WARNING
Place the carton [A] on a flat surface as shown in the

figure, pull the tab back to edge of the carton.
Pull out the hose [B] and cut off end of the hose.
Fill each cell [A] until the electrolyte level rises to bottom
[B] of the split ring [C] of the vent well.
NOTICE
Do not fill into the split [D]. Do not overfill.
After filling cells, wait five to ten minutes.

If necessary to bring electrolyte to proper level, add the
additional electrolyte.
WARNING
Neutralize any residue with baking soda.
Rinse empty package with large quantities of water.
Destroy empty package to prevent accidents!
Place
ports.
the strips of filler caps [A] loosely over the filler
Charge the battery at 15 amps until specific gravity of

electrolyte rises to 1.250 and a temperature of 15.5C
(60F) (Both conditions must be met.).
Battery
If violent gassing or spewing occurs, reduce the charge
rate.
NOTICE
Never allow a battery to get HOT to the touch. If the
battery is excessively hot to the touch, discontinue
charging immediately.
Allow the battery to cool down before monitoring
gravities or continuing charge.
After charging, if the electrolyte level has fallen, refill the

battery with the electrolyte to upper level.
Fit the filler caps [A] firmly.
Charging Condition Inspection (Sealed Type

Battery)
Battery charging condition can be checked by measuring
battery terminal voltage.
Remove the battery (see Battery Removal).
NOTICE
Be sure to disconnect the negative () cable first.
Measure the battery terminal voltage.

NOTE
Measure with a digital voltmeter [A] which can be read
to one decimal place voltage.
If the reading is below the specified, refreshing charge is
required.
Battery Terminal Voltage
Standard: 12.6 V or more
Battery
Ordinary Charging
DANGER
Batteries produce an explosive gas mixture of hy-
drogen and oxygen that can cause serious injury
and burns if ignited. Keep the battery away from
sparks and open flames during charging. When
using a battery charger, connect the battery to the
charger before turning on the charger. This proce-
dure prevents sparks at the battery terminals which
could ignite any battery gases.
NOTICE
Always remove the battery from the vehicle for
charging. If the battery is charged while still in-
stalled, battery electrolyte may spill and corrode
the frame or other parts of the vehicle.
Charging the battery at a rate higher than specified
may ruin the battery. Charging at a high rate causes
excess heat which can warp the plates and cause
internal shorting.
Higher-than-normal charging rates also cause the
plates to shed active material. Deposits will accu-
mulate, and can cause internal shorting.
If the temperature of the electrolyte rises above
45C (113F) during charging, reduce the charging
rate to lower the temperature, and increase charg-
ing time proportionately.
Remove the battery (see Battery Removal).

NOTE
Never attempt to charge a frozen battery.
Allow it to warm up to room temperature before charg-
ing.
Never leave a battery on a trickle charger longer than
48 hours. Serious damage to the battery will occur.

Charge the battery with a current of 1 to 1.5 amps until the
specific gravity rises to 1.250 and temperature reaches
15.5C (60F).
Refer to the Battery Charging Time Table for the charging.
Battery
Check the electrolyte level after charging.

If the electrolyte level is low add water only after initial
activation.
WARNING
Turn the charger off or plug it, then disconnect it from the
battery.
If the battery condition indicates that it is not fully charged,
additional charging time is necessary.
(Sealed Type Battery)
Charge the battery according to the battery terminal volt-
age.
WARNING
This battery is sealed battery type. Never remove
seal sheet or cap [A] even at charging. Never add
water. Charge with current and time as stated be-
low.
Refer to the Battery Charging Time Table for the charging.

Battery Charging Time Table at 27C (80F)
Battery State of Charging Time to Full Charge
Voltage Charge 2 A 6 A 10 A
12.6 V 100% Full Charge
12.4 V 75% 405 min. 135 min. 81 min.
12.2 V 50% 810 min. 270 min. 162 min.
12.0 V 25% 1 215 min. 405 min. 243 min.
11.8 V 0% 1 620 min. 540 min. 324 min.
Determine battery condition after charging.

Determine the condition of the battery 30 minutes after
completion of the charge by measuring the terminal volt-
age according to the table below.
Criteria Judgement
12.6 V or higher Good
12.0 12.6 V or lower Charge insufficient Recharge
12.0 V or lower Unserviceable Replace
Battery Testing Chart (Conventional Type Battery)

Once battery is in an adequate state of charge the fol-
lowing load test procedure will be valid. The load test is
undertaken to determine if the battery has adequate elec-
trical performance or if it has to be replaced.
Important: This procedure is valid only it the battery is at
or above the state of check specified in STEP 2.
Battery
Battery Testing Chart
Alternator
Alternator Removal
Remove:
Alternator Terminal Locknut [A]
Alternator Lead Connector [B]
Remove:
Alternator Adjusting Bracket Bolt [A]
Alternator Mounting Bolt [B]
Alternator [C]
Alternator Installation
Clean the alternator legs and alternator bracket where the
alternator is grounded.
Adjust the fan belt deflection (see Cooling Fan Belt In-
spection in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Tighten:
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Alternator Mounting Bolt: 39 Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29
ftlb)
Alternator Disassembly
Remove:
Terminal Nut [A]
Insulator [B]
End Cover Bolts [C]
End Cover [D]
Remove:
Brush Holder [A]
Regulator [B]
Rectifier Screws [C]
Alternator
Straighten the stator coil wires [A].

Remove the rectifier [B].
Use the following, loosen the pulley locknut [A].

Socket Wrench [B] (Special Tool: 57001-1236)
Deep Socket Wrench [C]
Special Tool - Socket Wrench, Hex 22: 57001-1236
Remove:
Pulley Locknut
Pulley [D]
Remove the collar [A].
Remove:
Housing Cover Mounting Bolts [A] and Nuts [B]
Housing Cover [C]
Remove:
Rotor [A]
Alternator Housing [B]
Alternator
Remove:
Bearing Holder [A]
Ball Bearing [B]
To remove the ball bearing [A], use a suitable puller.
Alternator Assembly
Press the bearing and bearing holder onto the rotor shaft.
Straighten the stator coil wires.
Housing Cover [A]
Install:
Housing Cover Mounting Bolts [B] and Nuts [C]
Install the rectifier [A].

Bend the stator coil wire ends [B] around the screw holes.
Tighten the rectifier screws.
Install:
Regulator
Brush Holder
End Cover
Insulator
Terminal Nut
Alternator
Install:
Collar
Pulley [A]
Use the following, tighten the locknut.
Socket Wrench [B] (Special Tool: 57001-1236)
Deep Socket Wrench [C]
Special Tool - Socket Wrench, Hex 22: 57001-1236
Torque - Alternator Pulley Locknut: 11 Nm (1.1 kgfm, 97
inlb)
Alternator Operational Inspection

Check the battery condition.
Conventional Type Battery (see Charging Condition
Inspection (Conventional Type Battery) in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter)
Sealed Type Battery (see Charging Condition Inspection
(Sealed Type Battery))
NOTE
Always check the battery condition before condemning
the alternator. The battery must be fully charged in or-
der to conduct accurate alternator inspection.
Check the wiring (see Wiring Inspection).

normal operating
Warm up the engine to bring the components up to their
temperatures.
Remove the 30 A main fuse (see Fuse Removal).
Stop the engine.
Connect the hand tester [A] (range DC 25 V) and ammeter

[B] (range DC 40 A, after the engine start) as shown in the
figure.
Battery [C]
50 A Fuse [D]
Alternator [E]
Load [F]
Measure the alternator output voltage and amperage at 2
000 rpm with the light switch turned OFF.
Alternator Output Voltage
Standard: 13.3 14.8 V at 25C (77F)
Alternator Output Amperage (no load)

Standard: 10 A or less
Stop the engine.

Measure
Install the 30 A main fuse (see Fuse Installation).
000 rpm with
the alternator output voltage and amperage at 2
the light switch turned ON.
Alternator Output Voltage
Standard: 13.3 14.8 V at 25C (77F)
Alternator Output Amperage (load)

Standard: 20 A or more
If the readings are not within the specified range, check
the alternator.
Alternator
Stator Coil Inspection
Connect the hand tester ( 1 range) between the coil
wires and read the tester.
If the tester does not read as specified, replace the alter-
nator frame.
Stator Coil Resistance: 0.2 or less
Using the highest hand tester range, measure the resis-

tance between the stator coil core and each of the coil
windings.
If there is any reading at all, the stator coil winding has a
short and the alternator housing must be replaced.
Rotor Coil Inspection
Connect the hand tester ( 1 range) between the slip
rings [A] and read the tester.
If the tester does not read as specified, replace the rotor
[B].
Rotor Coil Resistance: 2.8 3.0
Using the highest tester range, measure the resistance

between the rotor shaft and each of the slip rings.
If there is any reading at all, the rotor coil has a short and
must be replaced.
Slip Ring Cleaning
Visually inspect the slip ring for dirt or pitting.
If necessary, smooth the slip ring with No. 300 No. 500
emery cloth.
Slip Ring Diameter
Measure the diameter of the slip rings.
If the measurement is less than the service limit, replace
the rotor [A].
Slip Ring Diameter
Carbon Brush Length

Measure the length [A] that both carbon brushes that stick
out of the holder.
If either one is worn down to less than the service limit,
replace it.
Carbon Brush Length (Projected Portion)
Alternator
Rectifier Inspection
Set the hand tester to the 1 k range.
Zero the hand tester, and connect it to each terminal to
check the resistance in both directions.
than ten times as much in the other direction. If the rec-
tifier [A] shows low or high in both directions, the rectifier
is defective and the rectifier must be replaced.
NOTE
The actual meter reading varies with the meter used
and the individual rectifier, but, generally speaking, the
lower reading should be from zero to one half the scale.
NOTICE
If a megger or a meter with a large-capacity battery
is used, the rectifier will be damaged.
Regulator Inspection
Set the hand tester to the 1 k range.
Check the resistance between F [A] and B [B] terminals
in both directions.
than ten times as much in the other direction.
If the reading shows low or high in both directions, the
regulator [C] is defective and must be replaced.
Alternator Ball Bearing Inspection

NOTICE
Do not disassemble the alternator for bearing in-
spection since disassembling the alternator dam-
ages the bearings.
Turn the alternator rotor shaft back and forth while check-
ing for play, roughness or binding of bearings.
If bearing play, roughness, or binding is found, disassem-
ble the alternator and replace the bearings.
Alternator
Alternator Circuit
1. Main Switch
2. Battery
3. Fusible Link 50 A
4. Load
5. Alternator
6. Stator Coil
7. Rotor
8. Rectifier
9. Regulator
10. Main Fuse 30 A
11. Fuse Box 2
Starter Motor Removal
Remove:
Starter Motor Lead Connector [A]
Starter Motor Cable [B]
Starter Motor Mounting Bolts [C]
Starter Motor [D]
Starter Motor Installation

Clean the mating surface [A] of the starter motor and the
end plate where the starter motor is grounded.

the figure.
Install the starter motor and tighten the mounting bolts.
Torque - Starter Motor Mounting Bolts: 39 Nm (4.0 kgfm,
29 ftlb)
Starter Motor Disassembly

Remove:
Field Coil Cable Nut [A]
Field Coil Cable [B]
Remove:
Starter Motor Through Bolts [A]
Yoke [B]
Remove:
End Cover Screws [A] and O-rings
End Cover [B]
Remove:
Armature [A]
Positive Brushes [B]
Brush Plate [C]
Remove:
Drive End Cover Screws [A]
Drive End Cover [B]
Remove:
Starter Clutch [A]
Idle Gear [B]
Steel Ball [C]
Remove:
Retainer [A]
Rollers [B]
Remove the return spring [A].
Starter Motor Assembly

Apply grease to the following parts.
Retainer and Rollers
Starter Clutch
Steel Ball
Return Spring
Armature Bearing
Grease - Denso No. 50 Grease or Equivalent (Esso Beacon
325)
Install the retainer [A] and rollers [B] on the drive end
cover shaft [C].
Face the opening side [D] of the retainer to the magnetic
switch assy.
Install:
Starter Clutch [A]
Idle Gear [B]
Install:
Steel Ball
Return Spring
Drive End Cover and Screws
Install the positive brushes [A] on the brush plate [B] with
needle nose pliers.
Pull the springs [C] and brushes, and hold the brushes
with the springs.
Install the armature.
Install:
End Cover [A]
End Cover Screws [B] and O-rings
Tighten:
Torque - Starter Motor End Cover Screws: 1.5 Nm (0.15
kgfm, 13 inlb)
Install the yoke [A] on the magnetic switch [B].

Tighten:
Torque - Starter Motor Through Bolts: 9.3 Nm (0.95 kgfm,
82 inlb)
Install the field coil cable and tighten the nut securely.
Carbon Brush Inspection

Measure the carbon brush length [A].
If the brush length is less than the service limit, replace
the brush assembly.
Carbon Brush Length
Yoke Inspection
Measure the resistance between the carbon brush and
the wire terminal [A].
If there is not close to 0 , the field coils have an open.
Replace the yoke.
the yoke body [B].
If there is any reading, the yoke has a short. Replace the
yoke.
Brush Plate Inspection
the brush plate [A].
If there is not close to 0 , the brush plate has an open.
Replace the brush plate.
Measure the resistance between the brush plate and the
(+) brush holder [B].
If there is any reading, the brush plate has a short. Re-
place the brush plate.
Commutator Cleaning/Inspection
Smooth the commutator surface [A] if necessary with fine
emery cloth [B], and clean out the grooves.
Measure the diameter [A] of the commutator [B].

Replace the starter motor with a new one if the commu-
tator diameter is less than the service limit.
Commutator Diameter
Standard: 30 mm (1.18 in.)
Service Limit: 29 mm (1.14 in.)
Armature Inspection
Using the 1 range of the hand tester, measure the
resistance between any two commutator segments [A].
If there is a high resistance or no reading () between
any two segments, a winding is open. Replace the starter
motor.
Using the highest range of the hand tester, measure the
resistance between the segments and the shaft [B].
If there is any reading at all, the armature has a short.
Replace the starter motor.
NOTE
Even if the foregoing checks show the armature to be
good, it may be defective in some manner not readily
detectable with the hand tester. If all other starter motor
and starter motor circuit components check good, but
the starter motor still does not turn over or only turns
over weakly, replace the starter motor with a new one.
Pinion Gear Inspection
Turn the pinion gear by hand. It should turn clockwise
freely [A], but should not turn freely counterclockwise [B].
If the pinion gear does not operate as it should or if there
is any worn or damaged part, replace it.
Starter Switch Inspection

Connect a 12 V battery to the starter switch [A] as shown
in the figure.
Connect the battery negative () cable [B] first and then
the positive lead to the terminal in the connector [C].
If the switch does not work as specified, the switch is de-
fective. Replace the starter switch.
Testing Switch
Criteria: When battery is connected
Pinion gear must move outward quickly.
Pinion gear must return quickly.
Starter Circuit Relay Inspection

Remove:
Mounting Rivets [A]
Screws [B]
Front Seat Lower Cover Left [C]
Remove:
Starter Circuit Relay Connector [A]
Starter Circuit Relay [B]
Connect the hand tester [A] and 12 V battery [B] to the

starter circuit relay [C] as shown in the figure.
If the relay does not work as specified, the relay is defec-
tive. Replace the relay.
Testing Relay
Electric Starter Circuit

2. Main Switch
3. Neutral Switch
4. Battery
5. Starter Motor
6. Main Fuse 30 A
7. Fuse Box 2
8. Starter Relay Fuse 30 A
9. Fuse Box 1
Preheating System
Glow Plug Removal
Remove the caps [A].
Remove:
Connecting Plate Nuts [A]
Connecting Plate [B]
Glow Plug Lead [C]
Remove the glow plug [A].
Glow Plug Installation

Tighten:
Torque - Glow Plugs: 17 Nm (1.7 kgfm, 13 ftlb)
Connecting Plate Nuts: 1.2 Nm (0.12 kgfm, 11
inlb)
Glow Plug Inspection

Using the 1 range of the hand tester, measure the
resistance between the terminal [A] and the housing [B]
of the glow plug.
If the tester does not read as specified, replace the glow
plug.
Glow Plug Resistance: About 0.1 5.0
NOTE
Be careful not to apply the battery voltage to the glow
plug directly.
Be careful not to scratch the heater section [C].
Preheating System
Preheating Timer Inspection
Remove the front seat lower cover left (see Starter Relay
Inspection).
Check that the main switch is turned OFF, and connect
the hand tester [A] to the preheating timer [B] as follows.
Hand Tester Range: DC 25 V
Hand Tester (+) Lead Black Lead Terminal
Hand Tester () Lead Ground
When the main switch is turned ON, the reading should
show less than 1.8 V during 5 seconds.
If the preheating timer does not work, replace the timer.
Glow Plug Relay Inspection
Remove:
Front Seat Lower Cover Left (see Starter Relay Inspec-
tion)
Mounting Bolt [A] and Nut
Glow Plug Relay [B]
Glow Plug Relay Lead Connectors [C]

glow plug relay [C] as shown in the figure.
Testing Relay
Glow Plug Relay Installation

Connect
lows.
the leads to the glow plug relay terminals as fol-
Black Lead (Tag No. 85) to Terminal No. 85 [A]

Brown Lead (Tag No. 86) to Terminal No. 86 [B]
Black/White Lead (Tag to Terminal No. 87 [C]
No. 87)
Black/White Lead (Tag to Terminal No. 30 [D]
No. 30)
Preheating System
Preheating System Circuit
1. Neutral Switch
3. Glow Plug Relay
4. Glow Plug Light
5. Main Switch
6. Glow Plugs
7. Battery
8. Main Fuse 30 A
9. Preheating Timer Fuse 5 A
10. Fuse Box 2
11. Starter Relay Fuse 30 A
12. Fuse Box 1
13. Preheating Timer
Fuel Cut Solenoid
Fuel Cut Solenoid
The fuel cut solenoid [A] is in the fuel injection pump.
When the main switch is turned to the START position,
the fuel solenoid is energized and the solenoid valve [B]
lifts against the spring [C] and opens the fill port [D] to the
pressure chamber.
When the switch is returned to the ON position, after the
engine has started, the current flows through a resistor to
the solenoid, reducing the current slightly but maintaining
enough energy to hold the valve open.
Turning the main switch to the OFF position shuts off the
current to the solenoid. With no current to hold the valve,
the spring forces the valve to close the fill port, thus shutting
off the fuel supply and the engine.
Fuel Cut Solenoid Inspection
When the main switch is turned ON, check that the fuel
cut solenoid makes a clicking sound (operating sound).
If the fuel injection pump does not click, replace it, or con-
sult a reliable fuel injection pump repair shop (ex. Denso
Service Station).
Fuel Cut Solenoid Circuit
1. Main Switch
2. Battery
3. Main Fuse 30 A
4. Preheating Timer Fuse 5 A
5. Fuse Box 2
6. Fuel Cut Solenoid
7. Fuel Injection Pump
Radiator Fan
Radiator Fan Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the leads from the radiator fan switch.
leads.
Using an auxiliary lead [A], connect the radiator fan switch
If the radiator fan rotates, inspect the radiator fan switch.

If the radiator fan does not rotate, inspect the following.
Wiring and Connectors
Radiator Fan Breaker (see Radiator Fan Breaker In-
spection)
Radiator Fan Motor (see Radiator Fan Motor Inspection)
Radiator Fan Relay (see Radiator Fan Relay Inspection)
Radiator Fan Motor Inspection
Disconnect
ness.
the fan motor lead connector [A] from the har-
Using
motor.
two auxiliary leads, supply battery power to the fan
If the fan does not rotate at this time, the fan motor is
defective and must be replaced.
Radiator Fan Motor Leads
Red : Battery (+)
Black : Battery ()
Radiator Fan Breaker Inspection

Battery Cables (see Battery Removal)
Remove:
Radiator Fan Breaker [A]
Inspect the breaker for operation.

Connect:
12 V Battery [A]
0.3 Resistance [B]
Radiator Fan Breaker [C]
Switch [D]
If the circuit in the breaker will not open within 60 seconds,
replace the breaker.
Radiator Fan
Radiator Fan Relay Inspection
Remove:
Front Seat Lower Cover Left (see Starter Relay Inspec-
tion)
Radiator Fan Relay Lead Connector [A]
Radiator Fan Relay [B]

radiator fan relay [C] as shown in the figure.
Testing Relay
Radiator Fan
Radiator Fan Circuit
1. Radiator Fan Relay

2. Radiator Fan Switch
3. Radiator Fan
4. Battery
Meter, Gauge
Speedometer Removal
Remove:
Front cargo compartment (see Front Cargo Compart-
ment Removal in the Frame chapter).
Band [A]
Disconnect the speedometer illumination lead connector
[B].
Remove:
Speedometer Cable [A]
Meter Bracket Bolts [B] and washers
Remove the speedometer [A] backward [B].
Remove:
Speedometer screws [A] and washers [B]
Speedometer bracket [C] and washers [D]
Speedometer [E]
Remove the rubber dampers as necessary.
Remove the rubber dampers as necessary.
Speedometer Installation
Install the following parts as shown in the figure.
Rubber Dampers [A]
Washers [B]
Speedometer Bracket [C]
Speedometer Screws [D]
Speedometer [E]
Install the two rubber dampers of the speedometer
bracket so that its thicker side faces meter side.
the speedometer screws.
Meter, Gauge
Fuel Gauge/Hour Meter Removal (KAF950GD)
Clear the clips [A] and remove the stopper [B].
Remove the fuel gauge/hour meter [C].
Fuel Gauge/Hour Meter Installation (KAF950GD)

Run the harness, cables and leads correctly (see Cable,
Fuel Gauge (LED) Inspection (KAF950GD)
Remove the fuel gauge/hour meter (see Fuel Gauge/Hour
Meter Removal).
[1] Battery ()
[2] Battery (+)
[4] Fuel Level Gauge
Using the auxiliary leads, connect the 12 V battery to the

fuel gauge/hour meter connector as follows.
Battery Positive (+) Terminal to Terminal [2]
Battery Negative () Terminal to Terminal [1]
Connect the variable rheostat [A] to the terminal [4].
Check that the number of segments [A] matches the re-

sistance value of the variable rheostat.
The number of fuel gauge segments increases or de-
creases one by one every 10 seconds.
Variable Rheostat
Display Segments
Resistance ()
10 10
120 1 (blink)
If the fuel gauge display function does not work, replace
the fuel gauge/hour meter.
Meter, Gauge
Fuel Level Gauge Inspection (KAF950GD)
Remove:
Fuel Level Gauge (see Fuel Level Gauge Removal in
Check that the float moves up and down smoothly without
binding. It should go down under its own weight.
If the float does not move smoothly, replace the fuel level
gauge.
Float in Full Position [A]
Float in Empty Position [B]
Using a tester, measure the resistance across the termi-

nals in the fuel level gauge lead connector.
Special Tool - Needle Adapter Set: 57001-1457
If the tester readings are not as specified, or do not
change smoothly according as the float moves up and
down, replace the fuel level gauge.
Fuel Level Gauge Resistance
Standard: Full position: 9 11
Empty position: 119 121
Fuel Level Gauge Circuit (KAF950GD)
1. Main Switch
2. Fuel Gauge
3. Fuel Level Gauge
4. Battery
5. Fuse Box 1
6. Main Fuse 30 A
Lighting System
Headlight Beam Adjustment
Turn the adjusting screw [A] on each headlight in or out
to adjust the headlight vertically.
Headlight Bulb Replacement

Remove the front cover (see Front Cover Removal in the
Frame chapter).
Turn the headlight bulb [A] counterclockwise [B] and pull
out the bulb from the headlight.
Replace the headlight bulb.

headlight.
Fit the projections [A] of the bulb in the hollows [B] of the
Turn the headlight bulb [A] clockwise [B].

Install the front cover (see Front Cover Installation in the
Frame chapter).
Tail/Brake Light Replacement

Remove:
Screws [A]
Tail/Brake Light Lens [B]
Lighting System
Push and turn the bulb [A] counterclockwise [B] and re-
move it.
NOTICE
Do not use bulbs rated for greater wattage than the
specified value.
Insert the new bulb [A] by aligning its upper and lower pins
[B] with the upper and lower grooves [C] in the socket, and
turn the bulb clockwise.
Turn the bulb about 15.
Install the tail/brake light lens.
Be careful not to overtighten the lens mounting screws.
Light Switch Bulb Replacement

Turn
bulb.
the socket [A] counterclockwise, and pull it with the
Pull the bulb [A] out of the socket.

NOTICE
Do not turn the bulb. Pull the bulb out to prevent
damage to the bulb.
Do not use bulb rated for greater wattage than the
specified value.
Insert the new bulb in the socket.

Align the projections [A] of the socket with the recesses
[B] in the switch body, and turn the socket clockwise.
Lighting System
Indicator Light Bulb Replacement
Oil Pressure Warning Indicator Light [A]
Coolant Temperature Warning Indicator Light [B]
Parking Brake Indicator Light [C]
Glow Plug Light [D]
Remove:
Light Assembly [A]
Lens [B]
Roll the rubber [A] up and pull the bulb [B] out of the
socket.
NOTICE
damage to the bulb.
specified value.
Install:
New Bulb
Lens [A]
Light Assembly [B]
Speedometer Illumination Bulb Replacement

Pull the socket [A] with the bulb from the speedometer.
Lighting System
Pull the bulb [A] out of the socket [B].

NOTICE
damage to the bulb.
specified value.
Insert the new bulb in the socket [A].

Install the socket into the speedometer [B].
Headlight Removal
Remove:
chapter)
Bolts [A] (KAF950F9 FB)
Screws [A] (KAF950FC )
Screws [B]
Headlight Installation
figure.
For the KAF950F9 FB, tighten the bolts and screws.
For the KAF950FC, tighten the screws.
Install the front cover (see Front Cover Installation in the
Frame chapter).
Reverse Light Switch Installation (EUR Model)

Put the transmission shift lever in the REVERSE position.
shift lever
Install the reverse light switch bracket [A] on the reverse
so that the switch rod [B] contacts the boss [C]
and the clearance is 1 2 mm (0.04 0.08 in.) [E].
Tighten the shift shaft lever clamp bolt [D] securely.
Lighting System
Lighting System Circuit
1. Speedometer Illumination 12. Oil Pressure Switch

2. Oil Pressure Warning Indicator Light 13. EPS Fuse 7.5 A
3. Coolant Temperature Warning Indicator 14. EPS Warning Indicator Light (LED)
Light 15. EPS ECU
4. Parking Brake Indicator Light 16. Reverse Light Switch (EUR Model)
5. Light Switch Indicator Light 17. Reverse Light (EUR Model)
6. Light Switch 18. Tail/Brake Lights
7. Main Switch 19. Battery
8. Headlights 20. Main Fuse 30 A
9. Brake Light Switch 21. Fuse Box 2
10. Coolant Temperature Switch
11. Parking Brake Light Switch
Brake Light Switch Inspection
Refer to the Brake Light Switch Inspection in the Periodic
Radiator Fan Switch Inspection
Remove the radiator fan switch (see Radiator Fan Switch
Removal in the Cooling System chapter).
Suspend the fan switch [A] in a container of coolant so that
the temperature sensing projection and threaded portion
are submerged.
Suspend an accurate thermometer [B] in the coolant, so
that the sensitive portions [C] are located in almost the
same depth.
NOTE
The switch and thermometer must not touch the con-
tainer sides or bottom.
Place the container over a source of heat and gradu-

ally raise the temperature of the coolant while stirring the
coolant gently.
Using the hand tester, measure the internal resistance
of the switch across the terminals at the temperatures
shown in the table.
If the hand tester does not show the specified values, re-
place the switch.
Radiator Fan Switch Resistance
Rising Temperature:
From OFF to ON at 86 90C (187 194F)
Falling Temperature:
From ON to OFF at 81 85C (178 185F)
ON: Less than 0.5
OFF: More than 1 M
Coolant Temperature Switch Inspection
Remove the coolant temperature switch (see Coolant
Temperature Switch Removal in the Cooling System
chapter).
Suspend the switch [A] in a container of coolant so that
the temperature sensing projection and threaded portion
are submerged.
Suspend an accurate thermometer [B] in the coolant, so
that the sensitive portions [C] are located in almost in the
same depth.
NOTE
The switch and thermometer must not touch the con-
tainer sides or bottom.
Place the container over a source of heat and gradu-

ally raise the temperature of the coolant while stirring the
coolant gently.
Using the hand tester, measure the internal resistance
of the switch across the connector and the body at the
temperatures shown in the table.
If the hand tester does not show the specified values, re-
place the switch.
Coolant Temperature Switch Resistance
Rising Temperature:
From OFF to ON at 112 118C (234 244F)
Falling Temperature:
From ON to OFF within 10C (50F)
of ON temperature
ON: Less than 0.5
OFF: More than 1 M
Switch Inspection
Using a hand tester, check to see that only the con-
nections shown in the table have continuity (about zero
ohms).
For the main switch, light switch, brake light switch, park-
ing brake light switch, and neutral switch, refer to the ta-
bles in the Wiring Diagram.
If the switch has an open or short, repair it or replace it
with a new one.
Horn Switch Connections
Oil Pressure Switch Connections*
*: Engine lubrication system is in good condition.

Reverse Light Switch Connections (EUR Model)
Speed Sensor Removal

NOTICE
Never drop the speed sensor, especially on a hard
surface. Such a shock to the sensor can damage it.

Disconnect the speed sensor lead connector [A].
Bolt [B]
Remove:
Speed Sensor [C]

Speed Sensor Installation
Apply transmission oil to the O-ring.
Tighten
Torque - Speed Senor Bolt: 8.8 Nm (0.90 kgfm, 78 inlb)
Speed Sensor Inspection

Remove the speed sensor (see Speed Sensor Removal).
Connect the speed sensor connector [A] with the battery
[B], 10 k resistor [C] and hand tester [D] as shown in the
figure.
Set the tester to the DC 25 V range.
Trace [A] each side of the speed sensor surface with the
screwdriver.
Then the tester indicator should flick [B].
If the tester indicator does not flick, replace the speed
sensor.
Fuses
Fuse Removal
Unlock the hook [A] and remove the fuse box cover [B].
Pull the fuses [A] straight out of the fuse box.
Fuse Installation
Install the fuse cover [A] so that the yellow mark [B] faces
left side of the vehicle.
50 A Fuse Removal
out of thethefuse
Unlock stopper [A] and pull the 50 A fuse [B] straight
box.
Fuse Installation
If a fuse fails during operation, inspect the electrical sys-
tem to determine the cause, and then replace it with a
new fuse of proper amperage.
Install the fuse box fuses on the original position as spec-
ified on the lid.
Fuses
Fuse Inspection
Remove the fuse (see Fuse Removal).
Inspect the fuse element.
For 50 A fuse, there is window for inspection in the upper
surface.
If it is blown out, replace the fuse. Before replacing a
blown fuse, always check the amperage in the affected
circuit. If the amperage is equal to or greater than the
fuse rating, check the wiring and related components for
a short circuit.
Housing [A] Terminals [C]
Fuse Element [B] Blown Element [D]
NOTE
If the engine is operated under the condition which the
battery needs refreshing charge, a main fuse may blow
out due to a mass current flows to the battery.
NOTICE
When replacing a fuse, be sure the new fuse
matches the specified fuse rating for that circuit.
Installation of a fuse with a higher rating may cause
damage to wiring and components.
APPENDIX 18-1
Appendix
Table of Contents
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing .............................................................................................. 18-2
Troubleshooting Guide ........................................................................................................... 18-31
18
18-2 APPENDIX
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing
KAF950G9 GC/HA
APPENDIX 18-3
1. Accessory Terminal
2. Main Switch
3. Band
4. EPS ECU
5. Hour Meter
7. Glow Plug Light
8. Parking Brake Indicator Light
9. Speedometer Cable
10. Speedometer Illumination
11. Coolant Temperature Warning Indicator Light
13. Light Switch
14. Band
15. To Left Headlight
16. Band
17. EPS Motor Connector
18. Band
19. EPS Torque Sensor Connector
20. Band
21. To Right Headlight
22. Front
23. Detail A
24. Accessory Terminals
25. Band
26. Front
27. Clamp
28. Detail B
29. Detail C
30. 25 mm (0.98 in.)
31. To Horn Switch
18-4 APPENDIX
KAF950GD
APPENDIX 18-5
1. Accessory Terminal
2. Main Switch
3. Band
4. EPS ECU
5. Fuel Gauge/Hour Meter
7. Glow Plug Light
8. Parking Brake Indicator Light
10. Speedometer Illumination
11. Coolant Temperature Warning Indicator Light
13. Horn Button
14. Light Switch
15. Band
16. To Left Headlight
17. Band
18. EPS Motor Connector
19. Band
20. EPS Torque Sensor Connector
21. Band
22. To Right Headlight
23. Front
24. Detail A
25. Accessory Terminals
26. Band
27. Front
28. Clamp
29. Detail B
30. Detail C
31. 25 mm (0.98 in.)
32. To Horn Switch
18-6 APPENDIX
1. Radiator Fan Motor

2. Radiator Fan Motor Lead
3. The band must be located in exact position as shown in the figure.
4. Radiator Fan Switch Lead
5. 50 mm (1.97 in.)
6. Horn Lead
7. Clamp
8. Front Final Gear Case Breather Hose
9. Clamp
10. Front Final Gear Case
11. The cooling hose should be under the bracket of the frame.
12. Front
13. View from Top
APPENDIX 18-7
1. Hold the right brake hose with the harness.

2. Right Brake Hose
3. Brake Master Cylinder
4. Keep the brake hose away from the EPS unit.
5. Install the clamp in this direction.
6. Left Brake Hose
7. Front
18-8 APPENDIX
1. EPS 40 A Fuse
2. EPS 7.5 A Fuse
3. Clamp
4. Band
5. EPS Self-diagnosis System Connector
6. Band
7. Band
8. Band
APPENDIX 18-9

3. Hi/Low Shift Cable
4. Transmission Shift Cable
5. Throttle Cable
6. Clamp
7. To Engine
8. Nut
9. Torque Converter Case
10. Torque Converter Inner Cover
11. Front
12. Viewed from Top
18-10 APPENDIX
KAF950G9 (Early Model)
1. Breather Tube (L = 1 480 mm (58.3 in.))

2. Brake Hose
3. Coolant Reserve Tank
4. Band
5. Clamp
6. Brake Pipe
7. Front
8. Route cooling hose under frame pipe.
9. Pass the cooling hose through the hole of the bracket on the frame.
APPENDIX 18-11
KAF950G9 (Late Model) and Later Model
1. Breather Tube (L = 1 100 mm (43.3 in.))

2. Brake Hose
3. Push the tube into the hole of case storage.
4. Clamp
5. Band
6. Front
18-12 APPENDIX
1. Right Brake Drum

2. Right Frame
3. Breather Tube
4. Brake Pipe
5. Brake Cable
6. Left Brake Drum
7. Left Frame
8. Band
APPENDIX 18-13
KAF950G9 GC/HA
1. Right Parking Brake Cable 8. Right Brake Hose

2. Left Parking Brake Cable 9. Right Leaf Spring
3. Clamp 10. Left Leaf Spring
4. Rubber Tube 11. 50 mm (1.97 in.)
5. Cap 12. Band
6. Washer 13. Front
7. Left Brake Hose 14. View A
18-14 APPENDIX
KAF950GD
APPENDIX 18-15
1. Right Parking Brake Cable
2. Left Parking Brake Cable
3. Clamp
4. Rubber Tube
5. Cap
6. Washer
7. Left Brake Hose
8. Right Brake Hose
9. Right Leaf Spring
10. Left Leaf Spring
11. 50 mm (1.97 in.)
12. Band
13. Front
14. View A
15. Detail B
16. Corrugated Tubes
17. Install the corrugated tubes so that the slits face inside of the vehicle to prevent the breather
tube and brake hose being damaged by the edges of the slit.
18. 30 mm (1.2 in.)
19. Tapes (Fix the corrugated tubes on the parking brake cables.)
20. View C
21. 70 mm (2.8 in.)
18-16 APPENDIX
2. Clamp the speedometer cable with the parking brake cable.
3. Parking Brake Cable
APPENDIX 18-17
18-18 APPENDIX
APPENDIX 18-19
1. Run the cables straight to front.
2. Trim
3. Run the cables under the main harness and fuel hose.
4. Run the cables on the damper of right rear brake pipe.
5. Throttle Cable
6. Fix the differential shift cable, 2WD/4WD shift cable and speedometer cable with the clamp.
7. Be sure that there is clearance between the cables and the shaft drive.
8. Fix the transmission shift cable and hi/low shift cable with the band.
9. Clamp
10. Differential Shift Cable: Keep 25 mm (0.98 in.) or more clearance between the rear shock
absorber and differential shift cable. Run the cable on the outside of right rear brake hose.
11. 2WD/4WD Shift Cable: Keep 25 mm (0.98 in.) or more clearance between the rear shock
absorber and 2WD/4WD shift cable. Run the cable on the outside of right rear brake hose.
12. Transmission Shift Cable
13. Hi/Low Shift Cable
14. Band
16. Front
17. Right Side View of Rear Area
18. Set the white mark between center bracket and clamp.
18-20 APPENDIX
1. Run the speed sensor lead through inside 10. Band

of the 2WD/4WD shift cable and differen- 11. Neutral Switch Lead
tial shift cable. 12. 80 mm (3.15 in.)
2. Band 13. Tape the tube at both ends.
3. Tail/Brake Light Lead 14. 490 500 mm (19.3 19.7 in.)
4. 80 mm (3.15 in.) 15. Front
5. Clamp 16. View from Top
6. Band 17. Upper
7. Neutral Switch Lead 18. Right
8. Detail A 19. Detail B
9. Fill up lithium grease (NLGI Grade No.2). 20. Detail C
APPENDIX 18-21
1. Floor Center Panel 12. Parking Brake Switch Lead

2. Trim 13. Starter Circuit Relay
3. Run the main harness under the leads. 14. Preheating Timer
4. Main Harness 15. Radiator Fan Relay
5. Alternator Lead (Brown) 16. Glow Plug Relay
6. Alternator Cable (Red) 17. Run the branch of harness on right side
7. Starter Motor Lead of clamp.
8. Battery () Cable (to Engine Ground) 18. Run the battery (+) () cables on the rub-
9. Battery (+) Cable (to Starter Motor) ber damper for the left rear brake line.
10. Align the white tape of the harness with 19. Front
this clamp. 20. Upper
11. Band 21. Inside
18-22 APPENDIX
1. Alternator Lead
2. Main Harness
3. Battery (+) Cable
4. Battery () Cable
5. Battery
6. Band
7. Fuse Box 1
8. Fuse Box 2
10. Yellow Mark
11. Yellow Tape
APPENDIX 18-23
18-24 APPENDIX
KAF950G9 GC/HA
APPENDIX 18-25
1. Band
2. Fuel Return Hose
3. Fuel Output Hose
4. Fuel Filter
5. Fuel Pipes
6. Fuel Tank
7. Fitting
8. Seal
9. Upper Wall of Fuel Tank
10. Clamp
11. Output or Return Hoses
12. Air Vent Hose
13. Check Valve
14. Joint
15. To Clamp on Center Bar
16. To Hole in Floor Board
17. From Fuel Tank
18. To Injection Pump
19. From Injection Pump
20. To Fuel Tank
21. Harness and Leads
22. Brake Pipe
23. All Cables
24. Position the tabs of clamps facing toward backside of vehicle.
25. Section A-A
26. Pass the fuel hose through clamp.
18-26 APPENDIX
KAF950GD
APPENDIX 18-27
1. Band
2. Fuel Return Hose
3. Fuel Output Hose
4. Fuel Filter
5. Fuel Pipes
6. Fuel Tank
7. Fitting
8. Seal
9. Upper Wall of Fuel Tank
10. Clamp
11. Output or Return Hoses
12. Air Vent Hose
13. Check Valve
14. Joint
15. To Clamp on Center Bar
16. To Hole in Floor Board
17. From Fuel Tank
18. To Injection Pump
19. From Injection Pump
20. To Fuel Tank
21. Harness and Leads
22. Brake Pipe
23. All Cables
24. Position the tabs of clamps facing toward backside of vehicle.
25. Section A-A
26. Pass the fuel hose through clamp.
18-28 APPENDIX
KAF950G9 GC/HA
1. Horn Button
2. Horn Switch Contact
3. Run the born switch lead to the straightly down (Do not twist it around the steering shaft).
4. Ground Lead
5. To Main Harness
6. Band
7. Front
8. Installation condition of horn switch contact.
9. View from A
APPENDIX 18-29

2. Cable Bracket
3. About 100 mm (3.94 in.)
4. Cable Clamp
18-30 APPENDIX
EUR Model
1. Tail/Brake Light Lead 8. Tail/Brake Light

2. Band 9. Reverse Light
3. Neutral Switch 10. Bracket
4. Shift Lever 11. Cargo Bed
5. Reverse Switch 12. Cap
6. Switch Holder 13. Bracket
7. Clearance: 1 2 mm (0.04 0.08 in.) 14. View A
Adjust the switch location to this clear- 15. View B
ance in shift lever working condition.
APPENDIX 18-31
NOTE Fuel tank air vent obstructed
This is not an exhaustive list, giving every Fuel injection pump trouble
possible cause for each problem listed. It Compression low:
is meant simply as a rough guide to assist Fuel injection nozzle loose
the troubleshooting for some of the more Glow plug loose
common difficulties. Cylinder head not sufficiently tightened
down
No valve clearance
Engine Doesnt Start, Starting Difficulty:
Cylinder, piston worn
Starter motor not rotating:
Piston ring bad (worn, weak, broken, or
Neutral switch trouble
sticking)
Starter motor trouble
Piston ring/groove clearance excessive
Battery voltage low
Cylinder head gasket damaged
Relays not contacting or operating
Cylinder head warped
Wiring open or shorted
Valve spring broken or weak
Main switch trouble
Valve not seating properly (valve bent,
Fuse blown
worn, or carbon accumulation on the
Starter motor rotating but engine doesnt
seating surface)
turn over:
Other:
Starter motor trouble
Engine oil viscosity too high
Pinion or ring gear worn
Front final gear case oil viscosity too high
Engine wont turn over:
Drive train trouble
Valve seizure
Brake dragging
Rocker arm seizure
Poor Running or No Power at High Speed:
Cylinder, piston seizure
Fuel/air mixture incorrect:
Crankshaft seizure
Air cleaner clogged, poorly sealed, or miss-
Connecting rod small end seizure
ing
Connecting rod big end seizure
Fuel tank air vent obstructed
Camshaft seizure
Fuel line clogged
No fuel flow:
Fuel injection pump trouble
No fuel in tank
Compression low:
Fuel tank air vent obstructed
Fuel injection nozzle loose
Fuel injection pump trouble
Glow plug loose
Fuel filter clogged
Cylinder head not sufficiently tightened
Fuel line clogged
down
Compression low:
No valve clearance
Fuel injection nozzle loose
Glow plug loose
Piston ring bad (worn, weak, broken, or
Cylinder head not sufficiently tightened
sticking)
down
No valve clearance
Piston rings bad (worn, weak, broken, or
sticking)
seating surface)
Knocking:
Carbon built up in combustion chamber
Fuel poor quality or incorrect
seating surface)
Poor Running at Low Speed:
Fuel/air mixture incorrect:
Air cleaner clogged, poorly sealed, or miss-
ing
18-32 APPENDIX
Miscellaneous: Driven pulley spring broken or weak
Brake dragging Converter engagement speed too low:
Overheating Drive pulley spring broken or weak
Engine oil level too high Converter engagement speed too high:
Engine oil viscosity too high Belt drive or worn
Front final gear case oil viscosity too high Drive or driven pulley sheave dirty or worn
Drive train trouble Drive pulley weight doesnt move smoothly
Overheating: Drive pulley movable sheave doesnt move
Fuel/air mixture incorrect: smoothly
Air cleaner clogged, poorly sealed, or miss- Drive or driven pulley movable sheave bush
ing worn
Compression high: Drive pulley weight or roller worn
Carbon built up in combustion chamber Shifting too quickly:
Engine load faulty: Drive pulley spring weak
Engine oil level too high Driven pulley spring weak or incorrectly in-
Engine oil viscosity too high stalled (too loose)
Drive train trouble Shifting too slowly:
Brake dragging Belt dirty or worn
Converter and/or belt excessive heating: Drive or driven pulley sheave dirty or worn
Belt dirty or worn Drive pulley weight doesnt move smoothly
Drive or driven pulley sheave dirty or worn Drive pulley movable sheave doesnt move
Driven pulley spring broken or weak smoothly
Drive pulley spring broken or weak Driven pulley spring incorrect installed (too
Idle speed too high tight)
Converter fan damaged Driven pulley movable sheave doesnt
Lubrication inadequate: move smoothly
Engine oil level too low Gear Shifting Faulty:
Engine oil poor quality or incorrect Doesnt go into gear:
Front final gear case overheating: Shift arm bent or seized
Insufficient oil Gear stuck on the shaft
Bevel gears maladjusted Shift cable maladjusted
LSD clutches maladjustment Shift cable lubrication inadequate
Coolant incorrect: Shift cable damaged
Coolant level too low Jumps out of gear:
Coolant deteriorated Shifter groove worn
Wrong coolant mixed ratio Gear dogs worn
Cooling system component incorrect: Shift arm positioning bolt spring weak or
Radiator clogged broken
Thermostat trouble Shift block worn
Radiator cap trouble Transmission shaft, and/or gear splines
Radiator fan switch trouble worn
Fan motor broken Shift cable maladjusted
Fan blade damaged Overshifts:
Water pump not turning Shift arm positioning bolt spring weak or
Water pump impeller damaged broken
Over Cooling: Shift cable maladjusted
Radiator fan switch trouble Abnormal Engine Noise:
Thermostat trouble Knocking:
Converter Operation Faulty: Carbon built up in combustion chamber
Belt slipping: Fuel poor quality or incorrect
Belt dirty, or worn Fuel injection nozzle incorrect
Drive or driven pulley sheave dirty or worn Overheating
APPENDIX 18-33
Piston slap: Drum worn unevenly or scored
Cylinder/piston clearance excessive Brake spring(s) weak or broken
Cylinder, piston worn Foreign matter in hub
Connecting rod bent Brake not properly adjusted
Piston pin, piston pin hole worn Other noise:
Valve noise: Bracket, nut, bolt, etc. not properly
Valve clearance incorrect mounted or tightened
Valve spring broken or weak Exhaust Smokes Excessively:
Camshaft bearing worn White smoke:
Rocker arm push rod runout excessive Piston oil ring worn
Other noise: Cylinder worn
Connecting rod small end clearance exces- Valve oil seal damaged
sive Valve guide worn
Connecting rod big end clearance exces- Engine oil level too high
sive Black smoke:
Piston ring worn, broken, or stuck Air cleaner clogged
Piston seizure or damaged Brown smoke:
Cylinder head gasket leaking Air cleaner poorly sealed or missing
Exhaust pipe leaking at cylinder head con- Handling and/or Stability Unsatisfactory:
nection Steering wheel hard to turn:
Crankshaft runout excessive Steering shaft bearing damaged
Engine mount loose Steering shaft lubrication inadequate
Crankshaft bearing worn Steering shaft bent
Cooling fan belt loose Steering gear assembly damaged
Abnormal Drive Train Noise: Tire air pressure too low
Converter noise: LSD clutch maladjusted
Belt worn EPS unit trouble
Drive or driven pulley sheave worn EPS ECU trouble
Drive or driven pulley movable sheave bush Noise when turning:
worn Damaged side gear or pinion (front final
Drive or driven pulley mount loose gear case)
Driven pulley shoe worn Worn clutch friction plate (front final gear
Drive pulley weight or roller side washer case)
worn Worn clutch spring (front final gear case)
Drive pulley weight or roller worn ESP unit mount loose
Transmission noise: Steering wheel shakes or excessively
Bearings worn vibrates:
Transmission gear worn or chipped Tire(s) worn
Metal chips jammed in gear teeth Suspension arm bushing worn
Transmission oil insufficient Tie-rod joint worn
Final drive noise: Wheel rim warped
Bearing worn Axle shaft bearing worn
Gears worn or chipped Steering wheel mount loose
Metal chips jammed in gear teeth Steering bolt or nut loose
Insufficient lubricant Steering wheel pulls to one side:
Bevel gears maladjusted Frame bent
LSD clutch friction plate worn Wheel misalignment
LSD clutch spring worn Suspension arm bent or twisted
Universal joint damaged Steering shaft bent
Abnormal Frame Noise: Steering gear assembly damaged
Shock absorber noise: Front or rear tire air pressure unbalanced
Shock absorber damaged Shock absorber unbalanced
Brake noise:
Brake linings overworn or worn unevenly
18-34 APPENDIX
Shock absorption unsatisfactory: Drum worn unevenly or scored
(Too hard) Oil, grease on lining and drum
Tire air pressure too high Dirt, water between lining and drum
Shock absorber damaged Overheated brakes
(Too soft) Battery Trouble:
Tire air pressure too low Battery discharged:
Shock absorber oil leaking Battery faulty
Shock absorber spring weak Battery cable making poor contact
Brake Doesnt Hold: Load excessive (e.g., bulb of excessive
Air in the brake line wattage)
Brake fluid leakage Main switch trouble
Brake fluid deteriorated Alternator trouble
Primary or secondary cup trouble Wiring faulty
Master or wheel cylinder scratched inside Battery overcharged:
Brake not properly adjusted Alternator trouble
Linings overworn or worn unevenly Battery faulty
MODEL APPLICATION
Year Model Beginning Frame No.
JK1AFDG19B500001
2009 KAF950G9
JK1AF950GGB600001
JK1AFDG1AB502001
2010 KAF950GA
JK1AF950GGB600601
2010 KAF950HA JK1AFDH1AB500001
JK1AFDG1BB503301
2011 KAF950GB
JK1AF950GGB601001
JK1AFDG1CB505101
2012 KAF950GC
JK1AF950GGB601401
JK1AFDG1DB508101
2013 KAF950GD
JK1AF950GGB601901
:This digit in the frame number changes from one machine to another.
Part No.99924-1409-05 Printed in Japan

KAF950GDF - Kawasaki Trans Diesel 4x4 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KAF950GDF - Kawasaki Trans Diesel 4x4 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KAF950GDF - Kawasaki Trans Diesel 4x4 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What does the manual cover?

What does the manual cover?

How is the manual organized?

How is the manual organized?

MULE 4010 TRANS44

This quick reference guide will assist

COUNTRY AND AREA CODES

that are necessary when servicing Kawasaki Indicates

Cleaning Vehicle before Disassembly

Storage of Removed Parts

Liquid Gasket, Non-permanent Locking Agent

Ball Bearing and Needle Bearing

Oil Seal, Grease Seal

Apply specified grease to the lip of seal before installing

Circlips, Cotter Pins

Direction of Engine Rotation

KAF950G9 Right Side View

Frame Number Engine Number

Items KAF950G9 GD/HA

Items KAF950G9 GD/HA

Items KAF950G9 GD/HA

Units of Volume: Units of Pressure:

Units of Force: Units of Power:

Steering ............................................................................................................................... 2-42

Fuel hose - replace 5 years 2-15

Coolant - change 2 years 2-18

Converter driven pulley shoe -

Converter air cleaner element -

Engine oil - change* 1 year 2-29

FREQUENCY Whichever First

: Clean, adjust, lubricate, torque, or replace parts as necessary.

Letters used in the Remarks column mean:

Item Standard Service Limit

Item Standard Service Limit

Idle Speed Adjustment

Removal in the Frame chapter)

When installing, run the hoses according to Cable, Wire,

Install the radiator screen.

Radiator Hose and Connection Inspection

Tilt up the front cargo hood.

Tapping Screw [B] and Collar

Remove the coolant reserve tank mounting bolts [A].

Remove the radiator cap [A] in two steps.

Tighten the drain plugs.

Front [A] Radiator Cap [C]

Water and Coolant Mixture Ratio (Recommended)

Bleed the air from the cooling system as follows.

Install the reserve tank cap [B].

Cooling Fan Belt Inspection

Remove the fan cover bolts [A].

Take off the fan cover [A].

Remove the fan cover [A] as shown in the figure.

Check the fan belt deflection.

Loosen the alternator adjusting bracket bolt [A] and alter-

Insert the water pipe [A] up to the end of the bending

Engine Top End

Turn the crankshaft pulley [A] clockwise so that the timing

Using a thickness gauge [A], measure the valve clearance

When positioning #1 piston TDC at the compression

Turn the crankshaft pulley 360 clockwise.